Finisher Ab 1

Finisher-AB1
Saddle
Finisher-AB2
SERVICE
MANUAL
DU7-1230-000
MAY 2007
REV. 0
COPYRIGHT 2007 CANON INC. CANON Finisher-AB1 / Saddle Finisher-AB2 REV. 0 PRINTED IN U.S.A.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Application
This manual has been issued by Canon Inc. for qualified persons to learn technical theory, installation,
maintenance, and repair of products. This manual covers all localities where the products are sold. For this reason,
there may be information in this manual that does not apply to your locality.
Corrections
This manual may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors due to improvements or changes in
products. When changes occur in applicable products or in the contents of this manual, Canon will release technical
information as the need arises. In the event of major changes in the contents of this manual over a long or short
period, Canon will issue a new edition of this manual.
The following paragraph does not apply to any countries where such provisions are inconsistent with local law.
Trademarks
The product names and company names used in this manual are the registered trademarks of the individual
companies.
Copyright
This manual is copyrighted with all rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this manual may not be copied,
reproduced or translated into another language, in whole or in part, without the written consent of Canon Inc.
COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC.

Printed in Japan
Caution
Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to avoid disclosure of confidential information.

Introduction
Symbols Used
This documentation uses the following symbols to indicate special information:
Symbol Description
Indicates an item of a non-specific nature, possibly classified as Note, Caution, or

Warning.
Indicates an item requiring care to avoid electric shocks.
Indicates an item requiring care to avoid combustion (fire).
Indicates an item prohibiting disassembly to avoid electric shocks or problems.
Indicates an item requiring disconnection of the power plug from the electric outlet.
Indicates an item intended to provide notes assisting the understanding of the topic in
question.
Memo
Indicates an item of reference assisting the understanding of the topic in question.

REF.
Provides a description of a service mode.
Provides a description of the nature of an error indication.

Introduction
The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual:

1. Each chapter contains sections explaining the purpose of specific functions and the relationship between elec-
trical and mechanical systems with reference to the timing of operation.
In the diagrams, represents the path of mechanical drive; where a signal name accompanies the
symbol, the arrow indicates the direction of the electric signal.
The expression "turn on the power" means flipping on the power switch, closing the front door, and closing
the delivery unit door, which results in supplying the machine with power.
2. In the digital circuits, '1'is used to indicate that the voltage level of a given signal is "High", while '0' is used
to indicate "Low".(The voltage value, however, differs from circuit to circuit.) In addition, the asterisk (*) as
in "DRMD*" indicates that the DRMD signal goes on when '0'.
In practically all cases, the internal mechanisms of a microprocessor cannot be checked in the field.
Therefore, the operations of the microprocessors used in the machines are not discussed: they are explained
in terms of from sensors to the input of the DC controller PCB and from the output of the DC controller PCB
to the loads.
The descriptions in this Service Manual are subject to change without notice for product improvement or other
purposes, and major changes will be communicated in the form of Service Information bulletins.
All service persons are expected to have a good understanding of the contents of this Service Manual and all
relevant Service Information bulletins and be able to identify and isolate faults in the machine."

Contents
Contents
Chapter 1 Specifications
1.1 Product Specifications...................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.1 Specifications (finisher) ............................................................................................. 1-1
1.2 Names of Parts.................................................................................................. 1-4
1.2.1 External View.............................................................................................................. 1-4
1.2.2 Cross Section ............................................................................................................. 1-5
Chapter 2 Installation
2.1 Making Pre-Checks........................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.1 Checking the Contents.............................................................................................. 2-1
2.2 Installation Procedure....................................................................................... 2-3
2.2.1 Points to Note When Turning ON/OFF the power of Host Machine .................. 2-3
2.2.2 Before Installing Finisher .......................................................................................... 2-3
2.2.3 Connecting with Machine.......................................................................................... 2-4
2.2.4 Connecting with High-Capacity Stacker ................................................................. 2-6
2.2.5 After Installation........................................................................................................ 2-10
2.3 Making Adjustments ....................................................................................... 2-11
2.3.1 Height Adjustment.................................................................................................... 2-11
2.4 Attaching the Labels etc................................................................................. 2-14
2.4.1 Affixing Labels .......................................................................................................... 2-14
Chapter 3 Functions
3.1 Basic Construction ............................................................................................ 3-1
3.1.1 Overview...................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.2 Electrical Control Unit ....................................................................................... 3-2
3.2.1 Overview...................................................................................................................... 3-2
3.2.2 Finisher Controller PCB ............................................................................................ 3-3
3.3 Stacking Unit...................................................................................................... 3-4
3.3.1 Overview...................................................................................................................... 3-4
3.3.2 Tray Ascent/Descent Control ................................................................................... 3-5
3.3.3 Auxiliary Tray Lift Control.......................................................................................... 3-6
3.3.4 Tray Paper Surface Detection.................................................................................. 3-7
3.4 Feeding Unit....................................................................................................... 3-8

Contents
3.4.1 Overview..................................................................................................................... 3-8

3.4.2 Basic Sequence of Operations ............................................................................. 3-11
3.4.3 Horizontal Registration Detection ......................................................................... 3-12
3.4.4 Horizontal Registration Correction/Alignment Operation .................................. 3-14
3.4.5 Buffer Operation ...................................................................................................... 3-17
3.4.6 Switching Over the Paper Path............................................................................. 3-19
3.5 Intermediate Process Tray Assembly........................................................... 3-20
3.5.1 Overview................................................................................................................... 3-20
3.5.3 Stacking Operation ................................................................................................. 3-24
3.5.4 Alignment.................................................................................................................. 3-28
3.5.5 Stapling Operation .................................................................................................. 3-30
3.5.6 Delivery Operation .................................................................................................. 3-32
3.6 Detecting Jams................................................................................................. 3-33
3.6.1 Jam Detection in the Finisher Assembly ............................................................. 3-33
3.7 Power Supply ................................................................................................... 3-35
3.7.1 Overview................................................................................................................... 3-35
3.7.2 Protective Mechanism ............................................................................................ 3-36
Chapter 4 Parts Replacement Procedure

4.1 Removing from the Host Machine................................................................... 4-1
4.1.1 Finisher Assembly ..................................................................................................... 4-1
4.2 External Covers.................................................................................................. 4-2
4.2.1 Rear Lower Cover ..................................................................................................... 4-2
4.2.2 Rear Upper Cover ..................................................................................................... 4-2
4.2.3 Upper Cover Unit ...................................................................................................... 4-3
4.2.4 Delivery Tray .............................................................................................................. 4-4
4.2.5 Stack Wall (Upper) .................................................................................................... 4-5
4.2.6 Stack Wall (Lower) .................................................................................................... 4-5
4.2.7 Rear Middle Cover .................................................................................................... 4-6
4.2.8 Inside Cover (Upper) ................................................................................................ 4-6
4.2.9 Inside Cover (Lower) ................................................................................................ 4-7
4.3 Drive System ...................................................................................................... 4-7
4.3.1 Staple Unit .................................................................................................................. 4-8
4.3.2 Front Alignment Motor .............................................................................................. 4-9
4.3.3 Rear Alignment Motor .............................................................................................. 4-9
4.3.4 Tray Shift Motor ....................................................................................................... 4-11
4.3.5 Shift Motor ................................................................................................................ 4-12
4.3.6 Belt Controller Unit .................................................................................................. 4-15
4.4 Document Feeding System ............................................................................ 4-18
4.4.1 Stack Delivery Roller .............................................................................................. 4-18

Contents
4.4.2 Process Tray Assembly ..........................................................................................4-20

4.4.3 Process Tray .............................................................................................................4-21
4.4.4 Feed Belt ...................................................................................................................4-22
4.4.5 Paddle Unit ................................................................................................................4-24
4.4.6 Paddle ........................................................................................................................4-24
4.4.7 Tray Unit ....................................................................................................................4-24
4.5 Electrical System............................................................................................. 4-28
4.5.1 Finisher Controller PCB ..........................................................................................4-28
4.5.2 Static Charge Eliminator .........................................................................................4-28
4.5.3 Horizontal Registration Sensor Unit ......................................................................4-30
Chapter 5 Maintenance
5.1 User Maintenance ............................................................................................. 5-1
5.1.1 User Maintenance Items (finisher) .......................................................................... 5-1
5.2 Maintenance and Inspection ........................................................................... 5-1
5.2.1 Periodically Replaced Parts .....................................................................................5-1
5.2.1.1 Periodically Replaced Parts in the Finisher...................................................................... 5-1
5.2.2 Durables ......................................................................................................................5-1
5.2.2.1 Durables in the Finisher ...................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2.2.2 Durables in the Saddle Stitcher.......................................................................................... 5-2
5.2.3 Periodical Servicing ...................................................................................................5-2
5.2.3.1 Scheduled Servicing for the Finisher ................................................................................ 5-2
5.2.3.2 Scheduled Servicing for the Saddle Stitcher.................................................................... 5-2
5.3 Adjustment ......................................................................................................... 5-3
5.3.1 Basic Adjustment .......................................................................................................5-3
5.3.1.1 Adjusting the Height ............................................................................................................. 5-3
5.3.1.2 Adjusting the Horizontal Registration/Angle..................................................................... 5-6
5.3.1.3 Adjusting the Sensor Intensity............................................................................................ 5-8
5.3.2 Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement ..........................................................5-10
5.3.2.1 Adjusting the Tray A/B Position........................................................................................ 5-10
5.3.2.2 Adjusting the Angle of the Aligning Plate (orthogonal) ................................................. 5-11
5.3.2.3 Adjusting the Stapler Position .......................................................................................... 5-12
5.3.2.4 Adjusting the Speed of the Swing Guide ........................................................................ 5-12
5.3.2.5 Adjusting the Aligning Plate Width................................................................................... 5-13
5.3.2.6 Adjusting the Transport Belt Position .............................................................................. 5-16
5.3.2.7 Adjusting the Stapling Position (rear 1-point) ................................................................ 5-17
5.3.2.8 Adjusting the Stapling Position (front 1-point)................................................................ 5-20
5.3.2.9 Adjusting the Stapling Position (2-point)......................................................................... 5-22
5.3.2.10 Adjusting the Delivery of Stapled Stacks (lower delivery).......................................... 5-25
5.3.2.11 Adjustment of EEPROM (IC107) on the Finisher Controller PCB After Replacement 5-
27
5.3.2.12 Bufferless mode 1 ............................................................................................................ 5-29

Contents
5.3.2.13 Bufferless mode 2 ............................................................................................................ 5-30

5.3.2.14 Assist stopper position adjustment................................................................................ 5-30
5.3.2.15 Staple inlet guide height adjustment ............................................................................. 5-32
5.3.2.16 Paddle height adjustment .............................................................................................. 5-34
5.3.2.17 Adjustment at poor tray stackability (when the upper curl occurs) ......................... 5-36
5.3.2.18 Adjustment at poor tray stackability (when the lower curl occurs) .......................... 5-37
5.3.2.19 Adjustment at poor tray stackability (run over when using thin paper) ................... 5-39
5.3.2.20 Tray stacking limit cancellation adjustment ................................................................. 5-41
5.3.2.21 Saddle staple alignment adjustment ............................................................................. 5-43
5.3.2.22 Saddle disengage roller position adjustment............................................................... 5-46
5.3.2.23 The amount of sending of a saddle disengage roller adjustment............................. 5-49
5.3.2.24 Saddle staple position adjustment................................................................................. 5-51
5.3.3 Other ......................................................................................................................... 5-53
5.3.3.1 Service Mode (by DIP switch)<Incerter>........................................................................ 5-53
5.4 Troubleshooting ............................................................................................... 5-56
5.4.1 Malfunction ............................................................................................................... 5-56
5.4.1.1 Malfunction/Faulty Detection ............................................................................................ 5-56
5.5 Outline of Electrical Components .................................................................. 5-58
5.5.1 Sensors (Finisher Unit)........................................................................................... 5-58
5.5.2 Microswitches (Finisher Unit) ................................................................................ 5-62
5.5.3 Solenoids (Finisher Unit)........................................................................................ 5-64
5.5.4 Motors (Finisher Unit) ............................................................................................. 5-66
5.5.5 Fans (Finisher Unit) ................................................................................................ 5-69
5.5.6 PCBs (Finisher Unit) ............................................................................................... 5-70
5.6 Variable Resistors (VR), Light-Emitting Diodes (LED), and Check Pins by PCB
5-71
5.6.1 Overview................................................................................................................... 5-71
5.6.2 Finisher Controller PCB ......................................................................................... 5-71
5.7 Upgrading.......................................................................................................... 5-72
5.7.1 Upgrading ................................................................................................................. 5-72
5.8 Service Tools .................................................................................................... 5-72
5.8.1 Solvents and Oils .................................................................................................... 5-72
Chapter 6 Error Code

6.1 Jam Codes .......................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1.1 Jam Codes ................................................................................................................. 6-1
6.2 Error Codes......................................................................................................... 6-2
6.2.1 Error Codes .................................................................................................................. 6-2

Chapter 1
SPECIFICATIONS

Contents
Contents
1.1 Product Specifications .......................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.1 Specifications (finisher).................................................................................................1-1
1.2 Names of Parts ...................................................................................................... 1-4
1.2.1 External View ................................................................................................................1-4
1.2.2 Cross Section .................................................................................................................1-5

Chapter 1
1.1 Product Specifications

1.1.1 Specifications (finisher)
0015-2057
T-1-1
Item Description Remarks
Stacking tray A/B by tray lift

mechanism
Stacking orientation tray A face-down/face-up
tray B face-down
Stack size tray A A3,A4,A4R,A5R,B4,B5,B5R,Jpn postcard in feed direction, 182 to 487.7 mm;
R,279.4mmx432.8mm(11x17),LGL,LTR,EXE,LT in cross-feed direction,139.7 to
RR,STMTR,EXER 320.2 mm
tray B A3,A4,A4R,B4,B5,B5R,279.4mmx432.8mm(11x in feed direction, 182 to 457.2 mm;

17),LGL,LTR,EXE,LTRR,EXER in cross-feed direction, 182 to
304.8mm
Types of Paper Plain paper (64g/m2 to 90g/m2), Heavy paper (91 g/m2 to 200 g/
m2), Recycled paper, Colored paper, Postcard, Label, Index
paper, Tracing paper, 3-hole paper.
Number of trays 2
Mode type non-staple, staple
Number of sheets non-staple tray A: if small-/large-size, equivalent of 1000 in multiple mode, the number of
(Note 1) sort sheets(147 mm in height) sheets are as follows:
if small-size, equivalent of 3000
sheets (423 mm in height); if large-
size, 1500 sheets (216 mm in height)
tray B: if small-size, equivalent of 2000 sheets
(285mm in height),if large-size, equivalent of 1000
sheets(147 mm in height)
staple sort tray A: if small-/large-size, equivalent of 1000
sheets (147 mm in height), or 100 sets
tray B: if small-size, equivalent of 2000 sheets (285
mm in height), or 100 sets; if large-size, equivalent
of 1000 sheets (147 mm in height), or 100 sets
Staple/non-staple if small-size, equivalent of 200 sets (285 m in height), or 100 sets; applicable to tray B only
mix (Note 1) if large-size, equivalent of 100 sheets(9147 mm in height), or 100
sets
Folded sheet mix tray A: 10 folded sheets max. per set/20 folded sheets max. per job
(Note 1)
tray B: 10 folded sheets max. per set/30 folded sheets max. per job
Stapling method stapling by rotating cam
Stapled stack if small-size, 100 sheets as converted with reference to paper

of 80g/m2
if large-size, 50 sheets
1-1
Chapter 1
1: The number of sheets refers to the result of conversion based on paper of 80g/m2
2: A sheet of paper may be grouped into the following:
-large-size; A3,B4,279.4mmx432.8mm(11x17),LGL
-small-size; A4,A5,B5,EXE,LTR,STMT,postcard,A4R,B5R,LTRR
T-1-2
Staple accommodation in special staple cartridge (5000 staples)
Detection of staples yes an alert condition

identified at 0 to 40
staples
Manual stapling no
Stack size front 1-point
A3,A4,A4R,B4,B5,279.4mmx432.8mm(11x17),EXE,LGL,LTR,
LTRR
rear 1-point
LTRR
2-point
LTRR
Paper detection yes
Control panel no
Display no
Dimensions W:800xD:786xH:1180mm
Weight 126 kg (approx.)
Power supply 100V,200-240V
Maximum power 360 W or less

consumption
1-2
Chapter 1
Staple Position
1-Point Stapling (front)
45 30
5 2.0 5 2.0
5 2.0
5 2.0
A3, B4, A4, B5, / 11"x17", LTR A4R / LGL, LTRR
1-Point Stapling (rear)
45 30
5 2.0 5 2.0
5 2.0
5 2.0
2-Point Stapling
A3, A4 B4, B5 11"x17", LTR
82.7 4.0 62.7 4.0 73.7 4.0

5 2.0
5 2.0
5 2.0
202.7 4.0 182.7 4.0 193.7 4.0
1-3
Chapter 1
1.2 Names of Parts

1.2.1 External View
0015-2060
[5]
[2] [3]
[1]
[4]
[7]
[6]
F-1-1
[1]Tray B [5]Upper cover
[2]Tray A [6]Inlet transport unit
[3]Top delivery outlet [7]Front cover
[4]Bottom delivery outlet
1-4
Chapter 1
1.2.2 Cross Section

0015-2062
[7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[5]
[6] [16]
[4] [17]
[3] [18]
[2]
[1]
[19]
F-1-2
[1]Transport belt [8]Delivery roller [14]Assist roller 2
[2]Stack delivery roller [9]Buffer roller 2 [15]Shift roller 2
[3]Swing guide [10]Assist roller 3 [16]Shift roller 1
[4]Paddle [11]Buffer roller 3 [17]Assist roller 1
[5]Tray B [12]Transport roller [18]Inlet transport roller
[6]Stack transport roller [13]Buffer roller 1 [19]Stapler
[7]Tray A
1-5
Chapter 2
INSTALLATION

Contents
Contents
2.2.5 After Installation........................................................................................................ 2-10
2.4.1 Affixing Labels .......................................................................................................... 2-14

Chapter 2
2.1 Making Pre-Checks

2.1.1 Checking the Contents
0016-0898
[5] [6] [7] [9] [10]
[3]
[9]
[1] 1
[8]
[4]
[2] [9]
[9]
M_ _ ________ ___ _________ ___________ __ _____ ____________. M_ _ ________ ___ _________ ___________ __ _____ ____________.
P_ _ ______ ___ __________ _____ ____________ ___ _____________. P_ _ ______ ___ __________ _____ ____________ ___ _____________.
J_ ____ ____________ ___ ________ _____ ___ _______ _____________ _________. J_ ____ ____________ ___ ________ _____ ___ _______ _____________ _________.
P____ ___ ________ __ __ _________ _____ ___ ___________ ___ __________. P____ ___ ________ __ __ _________ _____ ___ ___________ ___ __________.
P_______ _______ ____ _____ _ ________ ____ ______________. P_______ _______ ____ _____ _ ________ ____ ______________.
P___ ___ ________ __ _____ ___________ ___ _____ __ _____________. P___ ___ ________ __ _____ ___________ ___ _____ __ _____________.
_______________________________. _______________________________.
_______________________________. _______________________________.
_____________________________________. _____________________________________.
___________________________________________. ___________________________________________.
FU5-8941 FU5-8941
[11] 2 [12] 3 [13] [14] 3 [15]
[17] [18] 3
[16] 4 [19] 5
F-2-1
2-1
Chapter 2
[1]*1 Finisher 1pc [2] Latch plate (for front) 1pc

[3] Latch plate (for rear) 1pc [4] Positioning Pin 1pc
[5] ARCNET cable 1pc [6] coaxial connector 1pc
[7] Shunt Cable 1pc [8] Wire Saddle 1pc
[9] Screws (RS tight; M4X10) 10pc [10] Screw (Bind; M4X8) 1pc
[11]*2 Guide map label 1pc [12]*3 Guide map label 1pc
[13] Staple label 1pc [14]*3 LED Lamp Label 1pc

(products for China, Korea and
Taiwan)
[15] jam removal label 1pc [16]*4 Power Cable 3pc
[17] Staple cartridge 3pc [18]*3 Saddle staple cartridge 2pc
[19]*5 Sheet, FCC Class A 1pc
*1: The figure shows Saddle Finisher AB2.

*2: Included only for Finisher AB1.
*3: Included only for Saddle Finisher AB2.
*4: Perform only for EUR. Use the appropriate power code for relevant country/area. Bring back unused
power codes.
*5: Included only for UL.
2-2
Chapter 2
2.2 Installation Procedure 2.2.2 Before Installing Finisher

0016-0901
2.2.1 Points to Note When Turning 1) Open the front cover of the finisher.
2) Remove 1 screw [2] from the front latch retainer
ON/OFF the power of Host [1].
Machine
0016-5236
Power-On Order for Turning On the

Power When Pickup/Delivery Accessories
are Connected
Be sure to turn on the power in the correct [1]
order otherwise it may cause an error because
the host machine fails to recognize
accessories including this equipment.
<Power-On Order> [2]

1) Accessories (accessories including this F-2-2
equipment)
2) Host machine 3) Detach the rear small cover [1].
- 4 screws [2]
MEMO:
There is no power-on order among [2]
accessories
Points to Note When Turning Off the

Main Power of the Host Machine [1]
Be sure to turn off the main power in the
following order to protect hard disk of the host
machine.
1) Press the power switch on control panel for
[2]
3 sec or more.
2) Follow the instruction on the shutdown
sequence screen (the main power switch will
go off automatically).
3) Turn off the breaker. F-2-3
4) Disconnect the power plug.
2-3
Chapter 2
4) Remove 1 screw [1] on the rear latch retainer and

pull the hinge [2] forward and downward.
R
[2] [1]
[2] [1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
[3]
F-2-5
2) Fit the positioning pin [1].

F-2-4 - 2 screws (RS tight; M4X10) [2]
2.2.3 Connecting with Machine

0016-0903
Check the power on the host machine is [1]

surely turned off and the power supply cable [2]
is unplugged.
1) Sub-Station Upper Left Cover [1] and rear [2]

latch plates.
- 4 screws (RS tight; M4X10) [3]

F-2-6
Confirm the mark engraved on each latch plate

when attaching.
Front [1]: F
Rear [2]: R
2-4
Chapter 2
3) While lifting up the front latch plate [1], fit the 4) Fix the front latch retainer.
positioning pin on the machine side [2] to the - 1 screw [2] (Use the screw removed in the step
finisher's positioning hole [3]. Connect the 2 of "Before Installing Finisher")
finisher with the machine.
<Front side>
[1]
[1]
F-2-7 [2]
F-2-9
<Rear side>
5) Shut the front cover of the finisher.
6) Lift up the rear latch plate [1] to fit the pin and fix
it.
- 1 screw [2] (Use the screw removed in the step
4 of "Before Installing Finisher")
[1] [2]
[2] [3]
F-2-8
F-2-10
2-5
Chapter 2
7) Attach the rear small cover. left side of the high-capacity stacker.
8) Remove 1 screw [1] on the rear lower cover of the - 4 screws (RS tight; M4X10)
finisher.

when attaching.
Front [1]: F
Rear [2]: R
[1]
F-2-11
R
9) Connect the shunt cable [1].
- 1 screw (User the ones removed in step 8).
- 1 screw (Use the included screw for the
finisher.)
F
[2] [1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
[2]
F-2-12
[3] [1]
2.2.4 Connecting with High-Capacity
F-2-13
Stacker
0016-0904
Check the power on the host machine is surely

turned off and the power supply cable is
unplugged.
1) Attach the front [1] and rear [2] latch plates to the
2-6
Chapter 2
2) Fit the positioning pin [1] of the high-capacity <Rear side>

stacker to the position [A].
- 2 screws [2]
[A]
[2] [3]
[1] F-2-16
[2]
4) Fix the front latch plate (front) [1].
- 1 screw [2] (Use the screw removed in step 2 of
"Before Installing Finisher")
F-2-14
3) While lifting up the front latch support [1], fit the

positioning pin [2] of the high-capacity stacker to
the positioning plate hole [3] on the finisher for
connection.
<Front side>
[1]
[2]
F-2-17
5) Close the front cover of the finisher.

[1]
F-2-15
2-7
Chapter 2
6) Lift up the rear latch plate [1] to fit the pin and fix 9) Connect the shunt cable [1].
it. - 1 screw (Use the ones removed in step 8.)
- 1 screw [2] (Use the screw removed in step 4 of - 1 screw (Use the included screw for the high-
"Before Installing Finisher") capacity stacker.)
[1] [2]
[1]
[3] [2]
F-2-20
10) See "After Installation" to connect the ARCNET

cable to the high-capacity stacker and the
finisher.
F-2-18
2.2.5 After Installation
7) Attach the rear small cover.
8) Remove 1 screw [1] on the rear lower cover of the 0016-0907
finisher. 1) Free the terminal connector [1] from the sub

station.
[1]
[1]
F-2-19
F-2-21
2-8
Chapter 2
2) Connect the ARCNET cable [1] to the terminal [2]

at sub station, and then turn the finger grip [3] in
the direction of the arrow to connect.
Be sure to turn off the host machine and unplug the

[3] power supply cable when connecting the ARCNET
[1] cable.
[2]
[2]
[3]
[1]
F-2-22
Rotate the ARCNET cable until they are fully

fixed, or the electrical contact can be unstable.
F-2-24
3) Put the end terminal connector [2] and the 5) Attach the wire saddle [1] to the rear lower cover
ARCNET cable [3] to the coaxial connector [1], of the finisher to bundle the signal cable [2] on it.
and turn each of then in the direction of the arrow
to connect.
[2] [1]
[1]
[3]
[2]
F-2-23

at finisher, and then turn the finger grip [3] in the
direction of the arrow to connect. F-2-25
2-9
Chapter 2
6) Connect the power supply plug of the finisher.

(Perform only for EUR)
[1]
After setting the connection sequence, the host
machine should be turned off and on to enable the
setting.

F-2-26
are Connected
Be sure to turn on the power in the correct
7) For Finisher /Saddle Finisher , connect the power order otherwise it may cause an error because
supply cable to the host machine. (Perform only
for EUR) the host machine fails to recognize accessories
- 1 screw (bind; M4X8) [2] including this equipment.
[2] <Power-On Order>

[1]
1) Accessories (accessories including this
equipment)
2) Host machine
MEMO:
There is no power-on order among accessories
F-2-27
8) Plug the power supply cable of the machine in the
power outlet. Main Power of the Host Machine
9) Turn on the power switch on the finisher, and then Be sure to turn off the main power in the
turn on the host machine. following order to protect hard disk of the host
10) Enter the service mode and set the connection
sequence. machine.
Choose the item with "Finisher" displayed from 1) Press the power switch on control panel for
COPIER>OPTION>ACCPST-D>ACC1 to 8 to 3 sec or more.
enter the connection sequence of the finisher.
MEMO: go off automatically).
When connecting to the host machine directly,
3) Turn off the breaker.
enter "1" and press "OK".
11) Follow the shutdown sequence to turn off the

power switch of the host machine/finisher.
12) Turn on the power switch of the finisher and then
that of the host machine.
2-10
Chapter 2
2.3 Making Adjustments

2.3.1 Height Adjustment
0016-1444
Depending on the floor condition of an installation

site, you should adjust the height of the finisher. If
not properly adjusted, paper might be jammed more
frequently in the feeder assembly. Follow the steps
below to adjust the height when it is necessary.
[1]
1. 1. Checking the height

1) Check the height of the finisher and the main
station. The height difference between the right
top of the finisher [1] and the left top of the main
station [2] should be within 2mm.
[1] [2]
[1]
2. Height adjustment
1) Disconnect the finisher from the main station.
2) Remove the wrench [1] from the finisher front
cover.
- 1 screw [2]
F-2-28 1]
2) If the difference exceeds 2mm, adjust the height.
2]
Adjust the height with 4 casters [1] as shown in

the figure.
F-2-29
2-11
Chapter 2
3) For Finisher AB1, detach the caster front cover.

- 1 screw [2] [1]
[1]
[2]
F-2-32
[2]
6) Measure the height [A] from the floor to the
F-2-30 bottom of the machine to check the figure is in the
range of 84.6+ -0.5mm.
4) For Saddle Finisher, detach the saddle inner cover
(lower) [1].
- 1 screw [2]
- 1 knob [3]
- 3 screws [4]
[A]
84.6 0.5mm
[1]
F-2-33
[4] 7) Loosen the fixing nut [1] with the wrench [2] in
the direction of [A].
[2] [3] [4]
F-2-31 [1]
5) Detach 2 caster covers [1] on the left side of the

equipment. (Figure shows Saddle Finisher.)
- 2 screws [2]
[A]
[2]
F-2-34
2-12
Chapter 2
9) Tighten the fixing nut [1] in the direction of [B].
[1]
When loosening the fixing nut on the front
caster of the saddle finisher, insert the wrench
[B]
[3] into the opening just below the saddle
bottom plate [2].
[1]
F-2-36
10) Repeat the steps above to adjust the height of

other 3 casters.
11) Connect the finisher to the host machine again to
[3] check the height.
Attach the cover and other parts removed in the
previous steps if the height difference is in the
tolerable range. If not, repeat the steps above to
[2] readjust the height.
8) Rotate the adjusting bolt [1] with the wrench

(small) [2] to adjust the height in the range of
84.6+ -0.5mm.
- To increase the height: rotate in the direction of
[A]
- To lower the height: rotate in the direction of [B]
(Height change per rotation: approx. 1.75 mm)
[1]
[A]
[B]
[2]
F-2-35
2-13
Chapter 2
2.4 Attaching the Labels etc. 4) For Saddle Finisher AB2 (product for China,
Korea and Taiwan), affix the LED lamp label [2]
on the label [1] found in the saddle lower inner
2.4.1 Affixing Labels cover.
0016-1445
1) Open the front cover of the finisher.

2) Affix the Guide map label [1] to the inside of the
front cover. (Figure shows the saddle finisher).
[1]
[2]
M_ _ ________ ___ _________ ___________ __ _____ ____________.
P_ _ ______ ___ __________ _____ ____________ ___ _____________.
J_ ____ ____________ ___ ________ _____ ___ _______ _____________ _________.
P____ ___ ________ __ __ _________ _____ ___ ___________ ___ __________.
P_______ _______ ____ _____ _ ________ ____ ______________.
P___ ___ ________ __ _____ ___________ ___ _____ __ _____________.
_______________________________.
_______________________________.
F-2-39
_____________________________________.
___________________________________________.
FU5-8941
5) Open the upper cover to pull the shift guide [1] to

[1]
F-2-37
3) Affix the Staple label [1] to the inside of the front

cover.
[A]
[1]
F-2-40
[1]
F-2-38
2-14
Chapter 2
6) Affix the jam removal label [2] in the local

language on the position of [A] on the shift guide.
[1]
[2]
[2]
[A]
F-2-41
7) Attach the parts removed in the previous steps in

the following order.
- The shift guide
- upper cover
2-15
Chapter 3
FUNCTIONS

Contents
Contents
3.1.1 Overview...................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.2.1 Overview...................................................................................................................... 3-2
3.3 Stacking Unit...................................................................................................... 3-4
3.3.1 Overview...................................................................................................................... 3-4
3.4 Feeding Unit....................................................................................................... 3-8
3.4.1 Overview...................................................................................................................... 3-8
3.4.2 Basic Sequence of Operations .............................................................................. 3-11
3.4.3 Horizontal Registration Detection.......................................................................... 3-12
3.4.4 Horizontal Registration Correction/Alignment Operation................................... 3-14
3.4.5 Buffer Operation ....................................................................................................... 3-17
3.4.6 Switching Over the Paper Path.............................................................................. 3-19
3.5 Intermediate Process Tray Assembly .......................................................... 3-20
3.5.1 Overview.................................................................................................................... 3-20
3.5.3 Stacking Operation .................................................................................................. 3-24
3.5.4 Alignment................................................................................................................... 3-28
3.5.5 Stapling Operation ................................................................................................... 3-30
3.5.6 Delivery Operation ................................................................................................... 3-32
3.6 Detecting Jams................................................................................................ 3-33
3.6.1 Jam Detection in the Finisher Assembly .............................................................. 3-33
3.7 Power Supply................................................................................................... 3-35
3.7.1 Overview.................................................................................................................... 3-35
3.7.2 Protective Mechanism ............................................................................................. 3-36

Chapter 3
3.1 Basic Construction

3.1.1 Overview
0015-2067
The machine consists of the following 5 blocks: electrical control block, stacking block, transport block,
intermediary tray, and saddle stitcher block (Note).
Electrical control block
Transport
Stacking block block
To host machine
Intermediary
tray block
Saddle stitcher block
F-3-1
The descriptions on the saddle stitcher block apply to the Saddle Finisher AB2.
3-1
Chapter 3
3.2 Electrical Control Unit

3.2.1 Overview
0015-2068
The electrical control block governs all the control mechanisms of the machine, i.e., stacking block, transport
block, intermediary tray block, and saddle stitcher block.
The electrical control block consists of 2 entities: finisher controller PCB and saddle stitcher controller PCB
(Note). The following is a block diagram of the machine's electrical control block, each serving the functions
described:
Electrical
control block Stacking block
Finisher
controller PCB Transport block
To host machine
Intermediary
Saddle stitcher tray block
controller PCB
Saddle stitcher
block
F-3-2
The descriptions on the saddle stitcher controller PCB apply to the Saddle Finisher AB2.
3-2
Chapter 3
3.2.2 Finisher Controller PCB

0015-2069
The finisher controller PCB drives the various loads (motors, solenoids) of the machine in response to the
commands from the host machine (copier), and indicates the states of the sensors and switches to the host
machine.
It also serves to control the punch unit and the saddle finisher controller PCB.
Finisher
controller PCB
Saddle stitcher Motor,

controller PCB CPU Solenoid
Intermediate
tray driver
PCB
Punch unit ASIC1 Switch,
(accessory) Sensor
ASIC2
Motor,
ROM Solenoid
Switch,
To host machine EEPROM
Sensor
F-3-3
The machine uses the following ICs, each possessing specific functions:
IC Description
CPU Controls the communications with the host machine; controls ASIC1/ASIC2.
ASIC1 Controls the communications with accessories; controls the drive to various loads.
ASIC2 Controls the drive to various loads.
ROM Stores the firmware used to operate the machine.
EEPROM Stores counter readings and adjustment values.
3-3
Chapter 3
3.3 Stacking Unit

3.3.1 Overview
0015-2072
The stacking block moves up and down the 2 delivery trays according to the instructions from the finisher
controller PCB.
Finisher controller PCB
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11]
UN15
Tray A UN16
PS32
M22
UN17 PS34
UN18
Tray B
PS33
SL9
M23
PS35
F-3-4
[1]Tray B paper detection signal [7]Tray A lift motor drive single

[2]Tray B paper surface detection light-emitting signal [8]Tray A lift motor rotation detection signal
[3]Tray B paper surface detection light-receiving signal [9]Auxiliary tray solenoid drive signal
[4]Tray A paper detection signal [10]Tray B lift motor drive signal
[5]Tray A paper surface detection light-emitting signal [11]Tray B lift motor rotation detection signal
[6]Tray A paper surface detection light-receiving signal
M22:tray A lift motor PS35:tray B lift motor rotation sensor

M23:tray B lift motor UN15:tray A paper surface sensor (light-emitting)
SL9:auxiliary tray solenoid UN16:tray A paper surface sensor (light-receiving)
PS32:tray A paper sensor UN17:tray B paper surface sensor (light-emitting)
PS33:tray B paper sensor UN18:tray B paper surface sensor (light-receiving)
PS34:tray A lift motor rotation sensor
3-4
Chapter 3
3.3.2 Tray Ascent/Descent Control

0015-2073
The tray A/B is moved up or down by controlling 2 motors (M22, M23) in response to the instructions from the
finisher controller.
The machine uses 2 sensors (PS34, PS35) to check for faults in these motors.
The sensor monitors the rotation of the motors; when any of the following occurs, the finisher controller PCB
will stop the drive to the motor and, at the same time, will communicate the fact to the host machine:
Related Error Code

- E540 (fault in tray A)
While the tray A motor (M22) is rotating, the tray A lift motor rotation detection signal is absent for 250 msec
or more.
While the tray B motor (M23) is rotating, the tray B lift motor rotation detection signal is absent for 250 msec
or more.
[1] [2] [3] [4]
Tray A
M22
PS34
Tray B
M23
PS35
F-3-5
[1]Tray A lift motor drive signal [3]Tray B lift motor drive signal
[2]Tray A lift motor rotation detection signal [4]Tray B lift motor rotation detection signal
M22:tray A lift motor PS34:tray A lift motor rotation sensor

M23:tray B lift motor PS35:tray B lift motor rotation sensor
3-5
Chapter 3
3.3.3 Auxiliary Tray Lift Control

0015-2074
In response to an increase in the number of folded sheets in the tray, the auxiliary tray is moved up to prevent a
delivery jam associated with the tray B (memo) by making sure that the lead and trail edges of the stacks
deposited in the tray will be even.
The auxiliary tray is moved by operating the solenoid (SL9) according to the instructions from the finisher
controller PCB.
[1]
Tray A
Auxiliary tray
Tray B
SL9
M23
F-3-6
[1]Auxiliary tray solenoid drive signal
SL9:Auxiliary tray solenoid
MEMO:
A stack with a folded sheet tends to be higher along its lead edge than its trail edge, blocking the discharge slot
when it contains multiple folded sheets. (A subsequent sheet will likely hit the preceding sheet, causing a jam.)
3-6
Chapter 3
3.3.4 Tray Paper Surface Detection

0015-2075
The machine is equipped with a mechanism to detect the position of the top of the stack deposited in its 2 trays.
The trays are each fitted with a sensor PCB that consists of a light-emitting segment (UN15, UN17) and a light-
receiving segment (UN16, UN18).
The light-emitting segment is arranged at the rear of the machine, and is a LED. The light-receiving segment,
on the other hand, is found at the front of the machine, and it consists of 3 photosensors.
When the power is turned on or a jam has been removed, the finisher controller PCB checks the 3 photosensors
(light-receiving segment) as soon as the LED (light-emitting segment) goes on.
As more and more sheets are deposited in the tray, the light reaching the light-receiving segments will be
blocked, causing the finisher controller PCB to move down the tray to keep the top of the stack at a specific level.
When the tray becomes full of paper (i.e., light blocked, not reaching any of the 3 photosensors), the finisher
controller PCB switches over to a different tray for subsequent delivery. If the newly selected tray is full, it will
stop the operation of the machine, and will indicate the fact to the host machine.
UN15
[4]
[6]
[1]
UN16
UN16 3
[1] 2
[2] 1
[2]
UN17
[5]
UN16
3
2
1
[1]
[2]
[1]
UN18
[3]
F-3-7
[1]Paper [5]Stack delivery roller

[2]Tray A [6]Tray descent movement (sample)
[3]Tray B
[4]Non-sort delivery roller
UN15:tray A paper surface sensor (light-emitting) UN17:tray B paper surface sensor (light-emitting)
UN16:tray A paper surface sensor (light-receiving) UN18:tray B paper surface sensor (light-receiving)
3-7
Chapter 3
3.4 Feeding Unit

3.4.1 Overview
0015-2076
The machine's transport block serves to move paper to the stacking block or the saddle stitcher block according
to the instructions from the finisher controller PCB. It also is used in conjunction with horizontal registration
adjustment and alignment operation.
The machine uses 6 sensors to check for jams in the paper path.
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14]
SL3 M5 SL2 M4 SL6 SL1 M8 M3 SL5 M7 M2 SL4 M6 M1
From
inserter
To tray A
Shift unit
Horizontal
registration
detection unit
To tray B
From host machine
To saddle stitcher block
F-3-8
3-8
Chapter 3
[1]Saddle path switch solenoid drive signal [9]Assist roller 2 shift solenoid drive signal
[2]Delivery motor drive signal [10]Horizontal registration motor drive signal
[3]Upper path switch solenoid drive signal [11]Shift transport motor drive signal
[4]Buffer motor drive signal [12]Assist roller 1 shift solenoid drive signal
[5]Assist roller 3 shift solenoid drive signal [13]Horizontal registration detection unit shift motor drive signal
[6]Buffer path switch solenoid [14]Inlet transport motor drive signal
[7]Transport roller shift motor drive signal
[8]Buffer front transport motor drive signal
M1:inlet transport motor SL1:buffer path switch solenoid
M2:shift transport motor SL2:upper path switch solenoid
M3:buffer front transport motor SL3:saddle path switch solenoid
M4:buffer motor SL4:assist roller 1 shift solenoid
M5:delivery motor SL5:assist roller 2 shift solenoid
M6:horizontal registration detection unit shift motor SL6:assist roller 3 shift solenoid
M7:horizontal registration shift motor
M8:transport roller shift motor
3-9
Chapter 3
[1] [2] [3] [4] From inserter [5] [6]
PS5
To tray A
UN13
UN14
UN24
PS3
To tray B
PS6
From host machine
From saddle stitcher unit
F-3-9
[1]Lower delivery sensor signal [5]Buffer path 1 sensor signal
[2]Lower path sensor signal [6]Inlet sensor signal
[3]Upper delivery sensor signal
[4]Buffer path 2 sensor signal
PS3:inlet sensor UN13:buffer path 1 sensor
PS5:upper delivery sensor UN14:buffer path 2 sensor
PS6:lower delivery sensor UN24:lower path sensor
3-10
Chapter 3
3.4.2 Basic Sequence of Operations

0015-2077
The transport block uses a sequence of operations that consists of the following 5:
1. Horizontal Registration Detection [1]

Detects the position of the paper.
2. Horizontal Registration Correction [2]

Corrects the position of the paper with reference to the result of horizontal registration detection.
3. Alignment [3]
Switches the position of the stack with reference to the result of horizontal registration detection. (only in shift
mode)
4. Buffer Operation [4]

Keeps the sheet stationary inside the transport block; thereafter, joins it with the subsequent sheet for forward
movement.
5. Movement Switch-Over [5]

Moves the paper to the stacking block or the saddle stitcher block.
The particulars of individual operations are as follows:
[4]
From inserter
To stacking block
[2] [3]
[1]
[5]
From host machine

To stacking block
F-3-10
3-11
Chapter 3
3.4.3 Horizontal Registration Detection

0015-2078
1) About 150 msec after the lead edge of paper has moved past the inlet sensor (PS3), the finisher controller
PCB causes the horizontal registration detection unit shift motor (M6) to rotate clockwise so that the horizontal
registration sensor (UN12) moves to its standby position (paper edge) from home position.
[4] [5]
[1]
[2]
M6
M6 [3]
UN12
PS3
PS3
F-3-11
[1]Shift roller unit [4]Standby position
[2]Horizontal registration detection unit [5]Home position
[3]Paper
3-12
Chapter 3
2)The finisher controller PCB causes M6 to rotate clockwise so that UN12 moves to horizontal registration
detection position (11 mm toward the inside from standby position), during which UN12 detects the edge of
paper to be moved. The finisher controller PCB uses the results of the detection to compute the horizontal
registration value.
[4] [5]
[1]
[2]
M6
M6 [3]
UN12
PS3
PS3
F-3-12
[1]Shift roller unit [4]Horizontal registration detection position
[2]Horizontal detection unit [5]Standby position
[3]Paper
3)The finisher controller PCB causes M6 to rotate counterclockwise to move PS5 to standby position.
3-13
Chapter 3
3.4.4 Horizontal Registration Correction/Alignment Operation

0015-2079
1) About 200 msec after the inlet sensor (PS3) detects the lead edge of paper, the finisher controller PCB causes
the transport motor (M2) to rotate clockwise, thereby causing the roller inside the shift roller unit to rotate.
2) The finisher controller PCB computes the horizontal registration correction value with reference to the result
of horizontal registration detection. Thereafter, when the lead edge of paper reaches the buffer path 1 sensor
(UN13), the PCB causes the horizontal registration shift motor (M7) to rotate clockwise or counterclockwise in
keeping with the horizontal registration correction value so that the shift roller unit moves to the front or the
rear, causing the paper clamped by the shift roller to move to the front or to the rear. All this serve to correct the
horizontal registration of the paper to an appropriate value.
UN13
UN13
M7 M7
[1]
M2 M2
[2]
[3]
PS3
PS3
F-3-13
[1]Shift roller unit
[2]Horizontal registration detection unit
[3]Paper
3-14
Chapter 3
Before Correction After Correction

[1] [1]
UN13 UN13
[2]
[3]
F-3-14
[1]Correct position
[2]Paper
3-15
Chapter 3
3) If the machine is in job offset mode, the shift roller unit is moved to the front or the rear as in the case of
horizontal registration correction operation (Note), thereby offsetting the stacks of sheets discharged to the
delivery tray.
[1] [1]
[2] [2]
F-3-15
This time, the degree of shift is determined with the horizontal registration correction taken into account.
3-16
Chapter 3
3.4.5 Buffer Operation

0015-2080
The finisher controller PCB keeps a sheet of paper in the paper path and forwards it together with the subsequent
sheet of paper using the buffer motor (M4) and the buffer path switching solenoid (SL1) with the help of the
buffer path 1 sensor and the buffer path 2 sensor (UN13,UN14).
M4 SL1
UN13
UN14
Buffer path
F-3-16
M4:buffer motor UN14:buffer path 2 sensor
SL1:buffer path switching solenoid
UN13:buffer path 1 sensor
The buffer operation takes place as follows when 3 sheets of paper are moved:
3-17
Chapter 3
[1] [2]
UN13 UN13 UN13
UN14 UN14 UN14
[1]
[1]
[2]
[1]
UN13 UN13
[3]
UN13
UN14 UN14 UN14
[1] [2]
[1]
[2]
[3]
UN13
UN14
[1] [2]
F-3-17
3-18
Chapter 3
3.4.6 Switching Over the Paper Path

0015-2081
1) The finisher controller PCB turns off or on the2 flappers (upper delivery flapper, lower delivery flapper) to
switch over the destination of paper.
[2]
[3] [1]
[4]
[5]
[6] [7]
F-3-18
[1]From the host machine [5]Lower delivery flapper
[2]Paper [6]To tray B
[3]To tray A [7]To saddle delivery belt
[4]Upper delivery flapper
3-19
Chapter 3
3.5 Intermediate Process Tray Assembly

3.5.1 Overview
0015-2083
The intermediary tray block serves to shift or staple a stack of sheets in response to the instructions from the
finisher controller PCB, and then sends the result to the stacking block. The paper path is fitted with 2 sensors
for detection of a jam.
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12]
M9
M10 M13 M19 M18 M15 M14 M16 M5 M17 M12 M25 M21
F-3-19
3-20
Chapter 3
[1]Front alignment motor drive signal/rear alignment motor signal [7]Paper trail edge retaining motor drive signal
[2]Stack delivery auxiliary motor drive signal [8]Delivery motor drive signal
[3]Stack delivery motor drive signal [9]Transport belt motor drive signal
[4]Swing guide motor drive signal [10]Assist motor drive signal
[5]Paddle rotation motor drive signal [11]Staple motor drive signal
[6]Paddle lift motor drive signal [12]Staple motor shift drive signal
M5:delivery motor M17:transport belt shift motor
M9:front alignment motor M18:swing guide motor
M10:rear delivery auxiliary motor M19:stack delivery motor
M12:assist motor M21:staple shift motor
M13:stack delivery auxiliary motor M25:staple motor
M14:paddle rotation motor
M15:paddle lift motor
M16:paper trail edge retaining motor
3-21
Chapter 3
[1] [2]
PS6
PS17
F-3-20
[1]Lower delivery sensor signal [2]Handling tray sensor signal
PS6:lower delivery sensor PS17:processing tray sensor
3-22
Chapter 3

0015-2085
The intermediary tray block uses the following 4 sequences of operations:
1.Stacking Operation [1]

Deposits sheets coming front the transport block in the intermediary tray.
2.Aligning Operation [2]

Switches over the point of depositing stacks between the front and the rear of the tray. (in shift mode)
3.Stapling Operation [3]

Staples a stack of sheets at a specific point. (in staple mode)
4.Delivery Operation [4]

Discharges the sheets deposited in the intermediary tray to the tray A or the tray B.
The following are the particulars of the individual operations:
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
F-3-21
3-23
Chapter 3
3.5.3 Stacking Operation

0015-2086
1) When the sheet coming from the transport block reaches the lower delivery sensor (PS6), the machine moves
the transport belt in the direction of the arrow, and rotates the delivery roller in the direction of the arrow. As a
result, the transport belt rotates to move the paper in the direction of the tray. At the same time, the stack delivery
roller is rotated to discharge the paper to the outside of the machine. The machine's stack delivery auxiliary
mechanism (Note) causes the stack delivery tray to extend outside the machine to support the paper.
[1] [3]
PS6
[2]
[4] [5]
F-3-22
[1]Paper [4]Sort delivery roller
[2]Stack delivery auxiliary tray [5]Transport belt
[3]Stack delivery roller
3-24
Chapter 3
2) When the trail edge of paper moves past PS6, the stack delivery roller and the paddle rotate in the direction
of the arrow, thereby pulling the paper back into the machine.
[1]
[6]
[5]
PS6
[2]
[3]
[4]
F-3-23
[1]Paper [4]Assist stopper
[2]Stack delivery roller [5]Transport belt
[3]Sort delivery roller [6]Paddle
3-25
Chapter 3
3)When the trail edge of paper reaches the process stopper, the machine stops the rotation of the stack delivery
roller and the paddle. The swing guide [7] is moved up.
[7]
[1] [6]
[5]
PS6
[2]
[3]
[4]
F-3-24
[1]Paper [5]Transport belt
[2]Stack delivery roller [6]Paddle
[3]Sort delivery roller [7]Swing guide
[4]Processing stopper
Stack Delivery Auxiliary Function

This machine is equipped with the stack delivery auxiliary mechanism as a means of preventing misalignment
of extra-length paper.
Misalignment occurs when the trail edge of paper hangs down on its own weight at the stack delivery operation.
The paper is then pulled back in the direction of the arrow, causing its lead edge to move away from the stopper.
The tray auxiliary plate is pushed outside the machine before delivery occurs to hold the lead edge of paper. This
prevents misalignment. The tray auxiliary plate is pulled inside the machine at the end of the delivery operation.
3-26
Chapter 3
Stacks Subject to Misalignment
[1]
[4]
Tray
[2]
[3]
Stacks Free of Misalignment
[1]
[5]
Tray
[2]
[3]
F-3-25
[1]Stack [4]Variation present among lead edges of sheets
[2]Tray auxiliary plate [5]Variation absent among trail edges of sheets
3-27
Chapter 3
3.5.4 Alignment
0015-2087
1) At the end of stacking, the swing guide is moved up, and then the aligning plate is operated as part of an
alignment operation (Note), causing the stack of sheets to move to the rear or to the front.
The foregoing sequence of operations applies only to the Tray B. A sequence of alignment operations is
executed for the tray A while paper is in the paper path.
[2] [3]
[1]
F-3-26
[1]Aligning plate
[2]Stack
[3]Swing guide
3-28
Chapter 3
lignment Mechanism (shift)

The machine’s alignment mechanism operates either of its 2 aligning plates to switch over (offset) the point of
depositing individual stacks of sheets.
Shifting to the Front Shifting to the Rear

[4]
[4]
[5] [5]
[3] [3]
[1] [2] [1] [2]

F-3-27
[1]Tray [4]Rear aligning plate
[2]Front aligning plate [5]Existing stacks
[3]Paper
3-29
Chapter 3
3.5.5 Stapling Operation

0015-2088
1)At the end of alignment operation, the machine moves down the swing guide and performs stapling (Note).
[1]
[2]
[5]
[4]
[3]
F-3-28
[1]Swing guide [4]Stapler
[2]Stapled stack of sheets [5]Aligning plate
3-30
Chapter 3
2) As needed, the staple unit is moved to empty itself of the waste staples in the waste staple case.
The machine's stapling sequence consists of the following operations: driving a staple, cutting the staple
tips, clinching the staple.
F-3-29
[1]Stack of sheets [4]Cutting the staple tips
[2]Staple [5]Clinching the staple
[3]Driving a staple
3-31
Chapter 3
3.5.6 Delivery Operation

0015-2089
1) The machine starts delivery of the stack at the end of alignment or stapling by rotating the delivery roller in
the direction of the arrow.
2) When a stack has 11 or more sheets, the assist stopper moves in the direction of the arrow in synchronization
with the stack delivery roller so that the paper delivery operation is smoothly performed.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
F-3-30
[1]Swing guide
[2]Stapled stack of sheets
[4]Assist stopper
3-32
Chapter 3
3.6 Detecting Jams

3.6.1 Jam Detection in the Finisher Assembly
0015-2098
The machine is equipped with the following sensors to check the presence/absence of paper and to see if paper
is moving properly:
- inlet sensor
- shift unit sensor
- upper delivery sensor
- lower delivery sensor
- buffer path 1 sensor
- lower path sensor
PS5 UN14 UN13
PS4
UN24
PS6
PS3
F-3-31
3-33
Chapter 3
The presence of a jam, on the other hand, is checked by the finisher controller PCB, running a check at such
times as programmed in advance.
When the finisher controller PCB finds a jam, it will cause the stitcher controller PCB to suspend the ongoing
transport/delivery operation and communicate the presence of a jam to the host machine.
T-3-1
Jam Sensor Description Code
Inlet sensor delay PS3 The inlet sensor (PS3) does not detect paper within a specific period 1002
of time (distance) after the delivery signal from the host machine has
been received.
Inlet sensor stationary PS3 The paper does not leave the inlet sensor (PS3) within a specific period 1103
of time after it has detected paper.
Shift unit sensor delay PS4 The shift unit sensor (PS4) does not detect paper within a specific 1004
period of time (distance) after the inlet sensor (PS3) has detected
paper.
Shift unit sensor PS4 The paper does not leave the shift unit sensor (PS4) within a specific 1105
stationary period of time (distance) after the inlet sensor (PS3) has detected
paper.
Buffer path 1 sensor UN13 The buffer path 1 sensor (UN13) does not detect paper within a 1006
delay specific period of time (distance) after the shift unit sensor (PS4) has
detected paper.
Buffer path 1 sensor UN13 The paper does not leave the buffer path 2 sensor (UN14) within a 1107
stationary specific period of time (distance) after the shift unit sensor (PS4) has
detected paper.
delay specific period of time (distance) after the shift unit sensor (PS4) has
detected paper.
stationary specific period of time (distance) after the shift unit sensor (PS4) has
detected paper.
Upper delivery sensor PS5 The upper delivery sensor (PS5) does not detect paper within a 100A
delay specific period of time (distance) after the buffer path 2 sensor (UN14)
has detected paper.
Upper delivery sensor PS5 The paper does not leave the upper delivery sensor (PS5) within a 110B
stationary specific period of time (distance) after the buffer path 2 sensor (UN14)
has detected paper.
Lower delivery sensor PS6 The lower delivery sensor (PS6) does not detect paper within a 100E
delay specific period of time after the buffer path 2 sensor (UN14) has
detected paper.
Lower delivery sensor PS6 The paper does not leave the lower delivery sensor (PS6) within a 110F
has detected paper.
Lower path sensor delay UN24 The lower path sensor (UN24) does not detect paper within a specific 100C
period of time (distance) after the buffer path 2 sensor (UN14) has
detected paper.
Lower path sensor UN24 The paper does not leave the lower path sensor (UN24) within a 110D
has detected paper.
Residual (at power-on) Paper exists within the transport path at power-on. 1320
Residual (during initial Paper exists in the path during initial rotation of the host machine. 1721
rotation)
Door open MSW1 The front cover switch (MSW1) has identified the front cover as being 1422
open during machine operation.
3-34
Chapter 3
3.7 Power Supply

3.7.1 Overview
0015-2100
The machine's power supply mechanism converts the AC power from the power outlet into DC for supply to its
various loads.
The AC power is supplied to the circuit when the power switch (SW1) is turned on. It is then converted by the
circuit into the following DC power supplies; +24 V, +5 V, and +3.3 V. Both +36 V and +24 V are used to drive
the various motors; +24 V is also used to drive solenoids and clutches, while +3.3 V is also used to the ICs on
the PCBs.
MSW1
Other
Fuse box accessories
Leakage
PCB
breaker
SW1
(main switch)
Stitching +3.3V
Intermediate Motor
circuit
+5V tray driver Solenoid
+24V PCB
Over-current/ Sensor
over-voltage
detection +3.3V
Motor
circuit Finisher Transport
+5V
controller motor driver Solenoid
PCB +24V PCB
+3.3V +3.3V Sensor
+3.3V
Motor
Saddle stitcher
AC/DC +5V +5V +5V
controller Solenoid
converter +24V +24V PCB
Sensor
MSW5 MSW6
+24V
M21
M25
MSW3 MSW4 MSW2
+36V
M22
Power supply PCB
M23
F-3-32
T-3-2
MSW1:front door switch M21:stapler shift motor
MSW2:tray approach switch M22:tray A motor
MSW3:tray safety switch (front) M23:tray B motor
MSW4:tray safety switch (rear) M25:stapler motor
MSW5:staple safety switch (front)
MSW6:staple safety switch (rear)
3-35
Chapter 3
3.7.2 Protective Mechanism

0015-2101
The machine is equipped with protective mechanisms that will automatically shut off the output voltage to
prevent damage to the power supply circuit in the event of over-current or over-voltage caused, for example, by
a short-circuit in any of its loads.
If DC output is absent in the power supply circuit, suspect that the over-current or over-voltage protective
mechanism has gone on. Turn off the power switch (SW301), remove the cause of the fault, and turn the power
back on.
In addition to the foregoing mechanism, the machine uses the following:

- fuse
The power supply circuit is fitted with 2 fuses which blow to shut off the power in response to over-current in
the AC line.
- Interlock Switch
The machine's external covers and safety levers are fitted with a total of 7 microswitches which go off to cut off
the power supply when a specific cover is opened or a specific lever is operated.
3-36
Chapter 4
PARTS REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

Contents
Contents
4.1 Removing from the Host Machine .................................................................. 4-1
4.1.1 Finisher Assembly ......................................................................................................4-1
4.2 External Covers ................................................................................................. 4-2
4.2.1 Rear Lower Cover ......................................................................................................4-2
4.2.2 Rear Upper Cover ......................................................................................................4-2
4.2.3 Upper Cover Unit .......................................................................................................4-3
4.2.4 Delivery Tray ...............................................................................................................4-4
4.2.5 Stack Wall (Upper) .....................................................................................................4-5
4.2.6 Stack Wall (Lower) .....................................................................................................4-5
4.2.7 Rear Middle Cover .....................................................................................................4-6
4.2.8 Inside Cover (Upper) .................................................................................................4-6
4.2.9 Inside Cover (Lower) .................................................................................................4-7
4.3 Drive System...................................................................................................... 4-7
4.3.1 Staple Unit ...................................................................................................................4-8
4.3.2 Front Alignment Motor ...............................................................................................4-9
4.3.3 Rear Alignment Motor ...............................................................................................4-9
4.3.4 Tray Shift Motor ........................................................................................................4-11
4.3.5 Shift Motor .................................................................................................................4-12
4.3.6 Belt Controller Unit ...................................................................................................4-15
4.4 Document Feeding System ........................................................................... 4-18
4.4.1 Stack Delivery Roller ...............................................................................................4-18
4.4.3 Process Tray .............................................................................................................4-21
4.4.4 Feed Belt ...................................................................................................................4-22
4.4.5 Paddle Unit ................................................................................................................4-24
4.4.6 Paddle ........................................................................................................................4-24
4.4.7 Tray Unit ....................................................................................................................4-24

Chapter 4
4.1 Removing from the Host 3) Remove the rear small cover [1].
- 4 screws [2]
Machine
[2]
4.1.1 Finisher Assembly
4.1.1.1 Disconnecting from the Host
Machine
0015-2102
[1]
Check to make sure that the machine is off and the

power plug is not connected to the power outlet.
1) Detach the shunt cable [1]. [2]

- 2 screws [2]
[1]
F-4-3
4) Remove the screw [1] of the latch base (rear), and

shift the hinge [2] toward the front.
[2] [1]
[2]
F-4-1
2) Free the signal cable [1] from the machine.
[1]
F-4-4
F-4-2
4-1
Chapter 4
5) Open the front cover. 4.2 External Covers

6) Remove the screw [2] from the latch base (front)
[1].
4.2.1 Rear Lower Cover
4.2.1.1 Removing the Low Rear Cover
0015-2104
1) Remove the lower rear cover [1].

- 8 screws [2]
[1]
[2]
[2]
[2]
F-4-5
7) While lifting the latch base (front) [1], disconnect

the finisher from the host machine.
[1]
F-4-7
4.2.2 Rear Upper Cover

4.2.2.1 Removing the Upper Rear Cover
(right)
0015-2105
1) Remove the upper rear cover (right) [1].

- 2 screws [2]
[1]
[1]
F-4-6
[2]
F-4-8
4-2
Chapter 4
4.2.2.2 Before Removing the Upper Rear 4.2.3.2 Removing the Upper Cover Unit
Cover (left) 0015-2110
1) Disconnect the cable [1].

- 4 clamps [1]
0015-2106
1) Remove the upper rear cover (right). (page 4-

2)Reference[Removing the Upper Rear Cover - 1 connector [3]
(right)] - 2 screws [4]
- 1 edge saddle [5]
(left) [5]
0015-2107
1) Remove the upper rear cover (left) [1].

- 4 screws [2] [4]
[2]
[2]
[3] [1]
F-4-10
[2] [1] [2]
2) Open the front cover [1].
F-4-9 3) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the shaft
retaining plate [2].
4.2.3 Upper Cover Unit
4.2.3.1 Before Removing the Upper Cover
Unit
0015-2109

2)Reference[Removing the Upper Rear Cover
(right)]
3) Remove the upper rear cover (left). (page 4-
(left)] [2]
4) Remove the middle rear cover. (page 4-
6)Reference[Removing the Middle Rear Cover]
[1]
F-4-11
4-3
Chapter 4
4) Open the upper cover unit [1].

[1]
[1]
F-4-12 F-4-14
5) Open the upper cover unit so that the damper shaft 4.2.4 Delivery Tray
[1] becomes loose; then, detach it.
4.2.4.1 Position of the Tray B at Power-On
0015-2111
At power-on, the tray B [1] must never be above the

tray B paper sensor [2], which will cause an error
during detection of the tray B position.
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-4-13
F-4-15
6) Slide the upper cover unit [1] in the direction of
the arrow to detach.
Take care not to trap the cable.
4-4
Chapter 4
4.2.5 Stack Wall (Upper) 4.2.6 Stack Wall (Lower)

4.2.5.1 Removing the Stacking Wall 4.2.6.1 Before Removing the Stacking
(upper) Wall (lower)
0015-2112 0015-2113
1) While supporting the tray from below, insert a 1) Remove the stacking wall (upper). (page 4-
screwdriver [2] in the hole [1] of the lower face to 5)Reference[Removing the Stacking Wall
release the roll [3] in the direction of the arrow; (upper)]
then, lower the tray until it is free of the stacking
wall (upper). 4.2.6.2 Removing the Stacking Wall
(lower)
[3] 0015-2114
1) Open the front cover.

2) Remove the stopper (lower) [1].
- Screw [1]
[2]
[1]
[2] [1]
F-4-16 F-4-18
2) Remove the stacking wall (upper) [1]. 3) Move up the tray A and the tray B above the
- 4 screws [2] stacking wall (lower).
4) Lower the shutter [1], and remove the 2 screws
[2].
5) Detach the stacking wall (lower) [3].
- Remove the 4 screws [4].
[4]
[2] [2]
[1]
[3]
F-4-17
[1] [2]
F-4-19
4-5
Chapter 4
4.2.6.3 Mounting the Stacking Wall (lower) 4.2.7 Rear Middle Cover
0015-2115 4.2.7.1 Removing the Middle Rear Cover
1) Turn the shutter drive shaft [2] so that the shutter 0015-2118
drive roll [1] is directly below. 1) Remove the middle rear cover [1].
- 4 screws [2]
[1]
[2]
[2]
[1] [2]
F-4-20
2) Mount the stacking wall (lower) so that the shutter

drive roll [1] is visible through the hole in the
stacking wall. F-4-22
4.2.8 Inside Cover (Upper)

4.2.8.1 Before Removing the Inside Cover
(upper)
0015-2119

2) Open the upper cover unit.
4.2.8.2 Removing the Inside Cover (upper)
0015-2120
1) Remove the inside cover (upper) [1].

- 1 knob [1]
[1] - 8 screws [2]
[3]
F-4-21
[1]
[2]
[3]
F-4-23
4-6
Chapter 4
4.2.9 Inside Cover (Lower) 2) Push in the stapler unit [1] until it is as shown.
4.2.9.1 Removing the Inside Cover (lower)

0015-2122
1) Open the front cover. [1]

2) Remove the inside cover (lower) [1].
- 2 screws [2]
[1]
[2]
F-4-26
3) Remove the stapler unit [1]. (page 5-

12)Reference[Adjusting the Stapler Position]
- 1 connector [2]
F-4-24 - 2 screws [3]
4.3 Drive System

4.3.1 Staple Unit Be sure to take note of the positioning index [4]
before detaching the staple.
4.3.1.1 Before Removing the Stapler
0015-2125

2) Open the upper cover unit.
3) Remove the inside cover (upper). (page 4-
6)Reference[Removing the Inside Cover (upper)]
4) Remove the inside cover (lower). (page 4- [1]
7)Reference[Removing the Inside Cover (lower)]
4.3.1.2 Removing the Stapler [4]
0015-2126
1) Remove the switch PCB [1].

- 2 screws [2]
- 1 connector [3]
- 1 edge saddle [4]
[2] [3] [2]
F-4-27
[3]
[4]
[1]
F-4-25
4-7
Chapter 4
4.3.2 Front Alignment Motor 3) Remove the handling tray plate unit [1].
- 1 screw [2] (loosen)
4.3.2.1 Before Removing the Alignment - 1 belt [3]
- 6 screws [4]
Motor (frontÅj - 2 positioning plates [5]
0015-2128
1) Remove the stacking wall (upper). (page 4- [4]

[4] [3] [5]
5)Reference[Removing the Stacking Wall
(upper)] [2]
2) Remove the stacking wall (lower). (page 4-
(lower)]
3) Remove the handling tray unit. (page 4-
20)Reference[Removing the Handling Tray
Unit]
4.3.2.2 Removing the Alignment Motor
(front)
0015-2129
1) Free the cable [2] from the 3 clamps [1], and

disconnect the connector [3]. [4] [5] [4]
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-4-30
4) Shift the handling tray aligning plate (front) [1] in

[3] the direction of the arrow, and remove the screw
[2] and the claw [3]; then, detach the handling
tray aligning plate (front).
F-4-28
[3] [1] [2]
disconnect the connector [3].
[2]
[1]
F-4-31
[3]
F-4-29
4-8
Chapter 4
5) Remove the handling tray (front) [1].

- 2 screws [2]
[3]
[1] [2]
[2]
[1]
F-4-32
6) Loosen the screw [1], and free the belt [2] from the [4]
gear [3].
F-4-34
[3] [2] [1]
4.3.3 Rear Alignment Motor
4.3.3.1 Before Removing the Alignment
Motor (rear)
0015-2302
1) Remove the stacking wall (upper). (page 4-

(upper)]
(lower)]
F-4-33 20)Reference[Removing the Handling Tray
Unit]
7) Remove the aligning motor (front) [1].
(page 5-11)Reference[Adjusting the Angle of 4.3.3.2 Removing the Alignment Motor
the Aligning Plate (orthogonal)] (rear)
(page 5-13)Reference[Adjusting the Aligning
Plate Width] 0015-2303
- 2 clamps [2] 1) Free the cable [2] from the 3 clamps, and
- 1 connector [3] disconnect the connector [3].
- 2 screws [4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
F-4-35
4-9
Chapter 4
2) Free the cable [2] connected to the 2 clamps [1], 4) Remove the handling tray aligning plate (rear).
and disconnect the connector [3]. - 1 screw [2]
- 1 claw [3]
[2] [1] [3]

[2]
[1]
[3]
F-4-36 F-4-38
3) Remove the handling plate unit [1]. 5) Remove the handling tray (front) [1].
- 1 screw [2] (loosen) - 2 screws [2]
- 1 screw [3]
- 6 screws [4]
- 2 positioning plates [5] [2] [1]
[4] [3] [5] [4]
[2]
F-4-39
6) Loosen the screw [1], and free the belt [2] from the
gear [3].
[4] [5] [4]
[3] [2] [1]
[1]
F-4-37
F-4-40
4-10
Chapter 4
7) Remove the aligning motor (rear) [1]. 2) While supporting the tray from below, release the
(page 5-11)Reference[Adjusting the Angle of roll [1] in the direction of the arrow; then, move it
the Aligning Plate (orthogonal)] down until it stops.
Plate Width]
- 1 clamp [2]
- 2 cable guides [3]
- 1 connector [4]
- 2 screws [5] [1]
[3] [2] [4]
[1] F-4-43
3) Remove the screw [1], and open the connector

cover [2] in the direction of the arrow.
[5]
F-4-41
4.3.4 Tray Shift Motor

4.3.4.1 Removing the Tray A/B Lift Motor
0015-2304
1)Remove the tray A/B cover [1].

- 4 screws [2]
[2]
[1] [2]
F-4-44
4) Disconnect the connector [1], and free the cable

[4] from the edge saddle [2] and the wire saddle
[1] [3].
[3] [2] [4] [1]
F-4-42
F-4-45
4-11
Chapter 4
5) Remove the tray A/B lift motor. 2) Remove the transport stay (upper right) [1].
- 2 screws [2] - 4 screws [2]
- 1 belt [3]
[3]
[1] [2]
[2]
F-4-46
4.3.5 Shift Motor

4.3.5.1 Before Removing the Shift Motor
0015-2305
1) Disconnect the machine from the host machine [1]

side.
2)Reference[Removing the Upper Rear Cover [2]
(right)]
(left)]
6)Reference[Removing the Middle Rear Cover] F-4-48
5) Remove the upper cover unit. (page 4-
3)Reference[Removing the Upper Cover Unit] 3) Remove the fan unit [1].
6) Remove the inside cover (upper). (page 4- - 1 connector [2]
6)Reference[Removing the Inside Cover (upper)] - 2 screws [3]
4.3.5.2 Removing the Shift Motor

0015-2306
1) Remove the latch base support plate [1].

- 2 screws [2]
[2]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-4-49
F-4-47
4-12
Chapter 4
4) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1], and remove the 2 6) Remove the cable retainer [1], and disconnect the
screws [2]. connector [2]; then, free the cable [3] from the
cable guide [4].
[1] [4]
[1]
[2]
[2] [3]
F-4-52
7) Insert a screwdriver [1] into the hole [1].

F-4-50
5) Remove the detection drive assembly [1].

- 2 screws [2]
[1]
[1]
F-4-53
8) Loosen the screw [1], and tighten the screw while

the tension is removed.
[2]
F-4-51
[1] [2]
F-4-54
4-13
Chapter 4
9) Detach the belt [1] from the gear [2].

[1] [2]
[1] [2]
F-4-57
F-4-55
10) Remove the 2 slide shafts [1] in the direction of [2] from the clamp [3] and the 2 edge saddles [4].
the arrow.
- 2 screws [2] [4]
[2]
[1]
F-4-56
[1] [2] [3]
11) Detach the shift assembly [1] in the direction of
the arrow. F-4-58
When detaching the shift assembly, take care not to

hit the clamp [2].
4-14
Chapter 4
13) Remove the shift motor unit [1]. 4.3.6.2 Removing the Belt Controller Unit
- 3 screws [2]
0015-2310
1) Loosen the screw [1].

[1]
[1]
[2]
F-4-61
F-4-59
2) Free the cable from the 4 clamps [1] and the edge
14) Remove the shift motor [1].
- 2 screws [2] saddle [2]; then, disconnect the 3 connectors [3].
[1] [1]
[3]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[2]
F-4-60
[3] [1]
4.3.6 Belt Controller Unit
4.3.6.1 Before Removing the Belt F-4-62
Controller Unit
0015-2309

(upper)]
(lower)]
Unit]
4-15
Chapter 4
3) Remove the 2 screws [1] found at the rear of the

machine.
[1]
[1]
F-4-63
[4]
4) Remove the 2 screws [1] found at the front of the
machine.
[3]
[2]
F-4-65
The belt [4] tends to slip off. Take care not to lose it.
6) Shift the belt variable lever [1] in the direction of

the arrow.
[1]
F-4-64
5) While removing the handling tray upper guide

unit [1], detach the belt [3] [4] from the 2 gears.
[1]
F-4-66
4-16
Chapter 4
7) Release the 2 roll guides [1] in the direction of the 9) Remove the E-ring [1] and the bushing [2].
arrow, and detach the 2 belts [2] from the belt
variable lever [3].
[2]
[3]
[2]
[2] [1]
F-4-69
10) Remove the belt controller unit [1].

[1] - 2 screws [2]
F-4-67
8) Remove the 3 E-rings [1], shift [2], and bushing

[4].
[3] [1]
[2] [1] [2]

F-4-70
[1] [4] [2]

F-4-68
4-17
Chapter 4
4.4 Document Feeding System

4.4.1 Stack Delivery Roller
Unite the guide side [3] of a guide lever (before) [1] 4.4.1.1 Before Removing the Stack
and a guide lever (after) [2]. After that, it is a belt
[4]. Two pieces are attached. Delivery Upper Roller
0015-2163
[1] 1) Remove the stacking wall (upper). (page 4-

[3] (upper)]
(lower)]
[3] 20)Reference[Removing the Handling Tray
[4] Unit]
[2]
4.4.1.2 Removing the Stack Delivery
Upper Roller
0015-2164
1) Remove the tension springs [1].
[2] [1]
[1] [1]
F-4-72
2) Orient the handling tray unit [1] as shown.

F-4-71
[1]
F-4-73
4-18
Chapter 4
3) Remove the belt [1], E-ring [2], gear [3], parallel 5) Remove the ball bearing [1] in downward
pin [4], and plate [5]. direction, detaching the delivery roller [2] at the
same time.
[1] [2]
[3]
[2]
[5] [4]
F-4-74
[1]
4) Remove the ball bearing [1], washer [2]; E-ring F-4-76
[3], and ball bearing [4].
6) Detach the E-ring [2] and the ball bearing [3] from
[1] the stack delivery roller [1].
[2]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[4]
F-4-75
[3]
[2]
F-4-77
4-19
Chapter 4
4.4.2 Process Tray Assembly 2) Turn the knob [1] clockwise so that the rear edge
drop guide [2] is at its lowest position.
4.4.2.1 Before Removing the Handling
Tray Unit
0015-2165

(upper)]
(lower)]
4.4.2.2 Removing the Handling Tray Unit
0015-2166
1) Remove the handling bin (front) [1] and the

handling bin (rear) [2].
- 2 screws [3]
[A]
[2]
[1]
F-4-79
3) Remove the handling tray unit [1].

- 6 connectors [2]
- 4 screws [3]
[1]
[1] [3] [2]
F-4-78
[3] [3]
[2]
F-4-80
4-20
Chapter 4
[3] [1] [2]
A guide [2] is attached so that it may not run aground

on a lever [1].
[2] [1] [2] [1]

F-4-82

- 2 screws [2]
[1] [2]
F-4-81
4.4.3 Process Tray

4.4.3.1 Before Removing the Handling F-4-83
Tray (front/rear)
0015-2167

(upper)]
(lower)]
Unit]
4.4.3.2 Removing the Handling Tray (front)
0015-2168

the direction of the arrow; then, remove the screw
[2] and the claw [3] to detach the handling tray
aligning plate (front).
4-21
Chapter 4
4.4.3.3 Removing the Handling Tray (rear) 4.4.4 Feed Belt

4.4.4.1 Before Removing the Transport
0015-2169
1) Shift the handling tray aligning plate (rear) [1] in

the direction of the arrow; then, remove the screw Belt
aligning plate (rear). 0015-2170

[2] [1] [3] (upper)]
(lower)]
Unit]
4.4.4.2 Removing the Transport Belt
0015-2171
1) Remove the protective cover [1].

- 1 screw [2]
F-4-84
2) Remove the handling tray (rear) [1].

- 2 screws [2]
[2] [1]
[1]
[2]
F-4-86
2) Loosen the screw [1], and shift the coupling (rear)

[2] to the left.
F-4-85
[1] [2]
F-4-87
4-22
Chapter 4
3) Turn the coupling (front) [1] so that the screw is at 5) Release the roll guide [1], and detach the transport
the front; then, loosen the screw, and shift the roll [2] from the shaft together with the belt.
coupling (front) to the right.
[1] [2]
[1] [2]
F-4-88
4) Shift the transport belt release unit [1] toward the

rear so that the transport belt is not engaged.
[1] F-4-90
6) Detach the transport belt (rear) [1] by moving it

through the coupling.
[1]
F-4-89
F-4-91
7) If the transport belt at the front must be detached,

perform steps 8) and 9) at the front. (page 5-
16)Reference[Adjusting the Transport Belt
Position]
4-23
Chapter 4
4.4.5 Paddle Unit 4.4.6.2 Removing the Paddle
4.4.5.1 Before Removing the Paddle Unit

0015-2175
1) Release the 2 claws [1], and detach the paddle

0015-2172
retaining roll [2] to detach the paddle [3].
5)Reference[Removing the Stacking Wall [2]
(upper)]
(lower)]
Unit]
4.4.5.2 Removing the Paddle Unit
0015-2173
1) Remove the 3 paddle units [1]. [1]

- 3 screws [2]
[1] [3]
[1]
F-4-93
4.4.7 Tray Unit

4.4.7.1 Before Removing the Tray A/B Unit
0015-2176

(right)]
(left)]
[2] 4) Open the upper cover unit.
F-4-92
4.4.7.2 Removing the Tray A/B Unit
4.4.6 Paddle 0015-2177
4.4.6.1 Before Removing the Paddle

MEMO:
0015-2174 If the tray B unit must be removed, remove the tray
1) Remove the stacking wall (upper). (page 4- A unit first.
(upper)]
(lower)]
Unit]
4) Remove the paddle unit. (page 4-
24)Reference[Removing the Paddle Unit]
4-24
Chapter 4
3) Remove the stopper[1]

1. Removing the Tray A Unit - screw [2]
1) Remove the support cover [1].
- claw [2]
[2] [1]
[2]
[1]
F-4-96
4) Remove the screw [1], and disconnect the 2

F-4-94 connectors [2].
2) Remove the support plate [1].

- 4 screws [2]
[1]
[2]
[2]
[2]
F-4-95
[1]
F-4-97
4-25
Chapter 4
5) Remove the 2 screws [1], and lead out the cable

[2] in the direction of the arrow. 2. Removing the Tray B Unit
- 1 screw [2]
[2]
[1] [2]
F-4-98 [1]
6) Remove the tray A cover [1]

- 4 screws [2]
[2]
F-4-101
[1] 2) Remove the screw [1], and disconnect the

connector [2].
[2]
F-4-99
7) Lift the tray A unit [1] to detach. (page 5-

10)Reference[Adjusting the Tray A/B Position] [1]
[1]
F-4-102
F-4-100
4-26
Chapter 4
3) Remove the 2 screws [1], and lead out the cable 4.4.7.3 Points to Note About the Tray A/B
[2] in the direction of the arrow. Cable
0015-2178
When mounting the tray A/B unit, take care so that

[2] the cables will not become tangled.
[1]
F-4-103
4) Remove the tray B cover [1].

- 4 screws [2]
[2]
F-4-106
[1] 4.4.7.4 Points to Note When Handling the

Stacking Wall Rail
0015-2179
Take care not to damage the stacking rail [1]. The

presence of scratches or dents can affect stacking
performance. If soiling is found, clean it with
alcohol.
F-4-104
7) Lift the tray B unit [1] to detach. (page 5-

10)Reference[Adjusting the Tray A/B Position]
[1]
[1]
[1]
F-4-107
F-4-105
4-27
Chapter 4
4.5 Electrical System 4.5.2 Static Charge Eliminator

4.5.2.1 Removing the Stack Edging Roller
Static Eliminator
4.5.1.1 Finisher Controller PCB 0015-2194
1) Remove the 2 stack edging roller stack eliminators

4.5.1.1.1 Before Removing the Finisher [1].
Controller PCB - 4 screws [2]
0015-2193
1) Remove the middle rear cover. [2] [1] [2]

2) Remove the lower rear cover.
4.5.1.1.2 Removing the Finisher Controller PCB
0016-3519
1) Remove the finisher controller PCB [1].

(page 5-11)Reference[Adjusting the Angle of
the Aligning Plate (orthogonal)]
(page 5-12)Reference[Adjusting the Speed of
the Swing Guide]
Plate Width]
(page 5-17)Reference[Adjusting the Stapling
Position (rear 1-point)] F-4-109
Position (front 1-point)] 4.5.2.2 Before Removing the Static
Position (2-point)] Eliminator (upper delivery slot)
(page 5-25)Reference[Adjusting the Delivery of 0015-2195
Stapled Stacks (lower delivery)] 1) Remove the upper rear cover (right). (page 4-
(right)]
(left)]
- 24 connectors (all) 6)Reference[Removing the Middle Rear Cover]
- 4 screws [2] 4) Remove the upper cover unit. (page 4-
3)Reference[Removing the Upper Cover Unit]
[1]
[2] [2]
F-4-108
4-28
Chapter 4
4.5.2.3 Removing the Stack Eliminator 3) Remove the handling tray unit. (page 4-
(upper delivery slot) 20)Reference[Removing the Handling Tray
Unit]
0015-2196
1) Remove the buffer upper cover assembly [1]. 4.5.2.5 Removing the Stack Eliminator
- 1 reuse band [2] (inside delivery guide)
- 4 screws [3]
0015-2198
1) Remove the 2 static eliminators (inside delivery

guide) [1].
- 4 screws [2]
[1]
[1]
[3] [3]
[2]
[2]
F-4-112
F-4-110 4.5.2.6 Removing the Static Eliminator

(inside delivery roller)
2) Remove the 2 static eliminators (upper delivery
slot) [1]. 0015-2199
- 4 screws [2] 1) Remove the 2 static eliminators (inside delivery

roller).
[1] - 2 screws [2]
[1] [2] [1]
[2] [2]
F-4-111
F-4-113
4.5.2.4 Before Removing the Stack
Eliminator (inside delivery guide/inside
delivery roller)
0015-2197

(upper)]
(lower)]
4-29
Chapter 4
4.5.2.7 Removing the Static Eliminator 4.5.3 Horizontal Registration Sensor

(T2) Unit
0015-2203
1) Open the front cover. 4.5.3.1 Before Removing the Horizontal

2) Slide out the saddle unit. Registration Sensor Unit
3) Remove the static eliminator (T2) [1]
- 2 screws [2] 0015-2205
1) Separate the machine from the host machine side.

(page 4-1)Reference[Disconnecting from the
[1] Host Machine]
(right)]
(left)]
4) Remove the middle rear cover.
4.5.3.2 Removing the Horizontal
[2] Registration Sensor Unit
F-4-114 0015-2206
1) Remove the fan unit [1].

- 1 connector [2]
- 2 screws [3]
Points to Note When Mounting the Static

Eliminator
Don't mistake how to attach a static eliminator
needle.
[3]
[2]
[1]
F-4-116
F-4-115
4-30
Chapter 4
2) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1], and remove the 2 4) Disconnect the connector [1], and free the cable
screws [2]. [2] from the 3 cable guides [3] and the edge
saddle [4].
5) Remove the 2 screws [5].
[5]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
F-4-117
[4] [3]
- 2 screws [2] F-4-119
6) Remove the horizontal registration sensor unit [1]

in the direction of the arrow. (page 5-
8)Reference[Adjusting the Sensor Intensity]
[1]
[2] [1]
F-4-118
F-4-120
4-31
Chapter 5
MAINTENANCE

Contents
Contents
5.2.2 Durables ......................................................................................................................5-1
5.3 Adjustment ......................................................................................................... 5-3
5.3.1.3 Adjusting the Sensor Intensity............................................................................................ 5-8
27
5.3.2.12 Bufferless mode 1 ............................................................................................................ 5-29
5.3.2.13 Bufferless mode 2 ............................................................................................................ 5-30
5.3.2.14 Assist stopper position adjustment ................................................................................ 5-30
5.3.2.17 Adjustment at poor tray stackability (when the upper curl occurs) .......................... 5-36
5.3.2.20 Tray stacking limit cancellation adjustment.................................................................. 5-41
5.3.2.22 Saddle disengage roller position adjustment ............................................................... 5-46

Contents

5.3.3 Other ......................................................................................................................... 5-53
5.4.1 Malfunction ............................................................................................................... 5-56
5-71
5.6.1 Overview................................................................................................................... 5-71
5.7 Upgrading.......................................................................................................... 5-72
5.7.1 Upgrading ................................................................................................................. 5-72
5.8 Service Tools .................................................................................................... 5-72

Chapter 5
5.1 User Maintenance

5.1.1 User Maintenance Items (finisher)
0015-2208
T-5-1
No. Item Timing

1 staple cartridge (replacement) when prompted (in host machine control panel)
2 waste staple (disposal) when prompted (in host machine control panel)
5.2 Maintenance and Inspection

5.2.1 Periodically Replaced Parts
5.2.1.1 Periodically Replaced Parts in the Finisher
0015-2211
The finisher does not have a part that requires periodical replacement.
5.2.2 Durables
5.2.2.1 Durables in the Finisher
0015-2213
Some parts of the machine may require replacement once or more over the period of product warranty because
of deterioration or damage. Replace them as necessary.
T-5-2
as of November 2005
No. Parts name Parts number Q'ty Life Remarks
1 Stapler FC6-6222-000 500,000 A single cartridge is good
1 times for about 5000 operations.
2 Roller belt FB5-9103-000 1,000,000

2
pages
4 Stack edging roller FC6-6134-000 1,000,000
1
static eliminator pages
5 Static eliminator FC6-6341-000 1,000,000
1
pages
2
pages
1
pages
5-1
Chapter 5
5.2.2.2 Durables in the Saddle Stitcher

0015-2214
T-5-3
as of November 2005
1 Stitcher FM3-1025-000 500,000 times A single cartridge is good for
1 about 5000 operations.
2 Static eliminator (T2) FL2-6408-000 1 1,000,000 pages

3 Flapper static eliminator FC7-5409-000 1 1,000,000 pages
4 Shift roller FL2-6416-000 1 1,000,000 pages
5.2.3 Periodical Servicing

5.2.3.1 Scheduled Servicing for the Finisher
0015-2216
The finisher does not have items that require scheduled servicing.
5.2.3.2 Scheduled Servicing for the Saddle Stitcher
0015-2217
The saddle stitcher does not have items that require scheduled serving.
5-2
Chapter 5
5.3 Adjustment
5.3.1 Basic Adjustment
5.3.1.1 Adjusting the Height
0015-2219
If jams start to occur often, adjust the height of the

machine as follows:
1. Checking the Height
1) Check the height of the finisher and the host [1]
machine. Be sure that the difference in height
between the right top surface [1] of the finisher
and the left top surface [2] of the host machine is
+/-2 mm.
[1] [2]
[1]
F-5-2
2. Adjusting the Height

1) Disconnect the finisher from the host machine.
2) Detach the spanner [1] connected to the front
F-5-1 cover.
- 1 screw [2]
2) If the difference is +/-2 mm or more, adjust the
height.
[1]
In order to adjusting the height, adjust four casters
[1] shown in the figure.
[2]
F-5-3
5-3
Chapter 5
3) In the case of the Finisher-AB1, remove the caster 5) Remove the 2 caster covers [1] from the left side.
cover [1]. (The illustration shows the saddle finisher.)
- 1 screw [2] - 2 screws [2]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[2] F-5-6
F-5-4
6) Measure the height [A] from the caster mounted
4) In the case of the Saddle Finbserh-AB2, detach the surface to the upper surface of bottom plate using
saddle inside cover (lower) [1]. a scale or the like and check if the height is 84.6
- 1 screw [2] +/- 0.5 mm.
- 1 knob [3]
- 3 screws [4]
[1]
[A]
84.6 0.5mm
[4]
F-5-7
[2] [3] [4]
F-5-5
5-4
Chapter 5
7) Loosen the fixing nut [1] of the scanner by turning

the spanner (large) [2] in the direction of [A]. [1]
[1]
[A]
[B]
[A]
[2]
[2] F-5-10
F-5-8 9) Tighten the fixing nut [1] in the direction of [B].
[1]
When loosening the caster fixing nut [1] on the front

of the saddle finisher, be sure to fit the spanner [3] [B]
through the gap below the saddle assembly base
plate [2].
[1]
F-5-11
10) Likewise, adjust the remaining 3 casters.

11) Connect the finisher to the host machine, and
check the height.
[3] If the difference is +/-2 mm, mount the removed
parts such as the cover. Otherwise, repeat the
[2] adjustment procedure.
F-5-9
8) Turn the adjusting bolt [1] with a spanner (small)

[2]. Adjusting the height measured at step 6) so
that it becomes 84.6 +/-0.5 mm.
- to raise, turn in the direction of [A].
- to lower, turn in the direction of [B].
(A single full turn causes a change of about 1.75
mm.)
5-5
Chapter 5
5.3.1.2 Adjusting the Horizontal 4) Set the DIP switch SW382 [1] on the switch PCB
Registration/Angle as shown (1, 4, 6, and 8 at ON), and press the
enter button (SW385) [2]; in response, the LED
0015-2221 [3] will flash '0'.
If the vibration is excessive (i.e., the horizontal
registration unit shifts excessively), or the skew is [3]
excessive on this machine, adjust the horizontal [1]
registration/ skew correction as follows:
SW382
1. Checking the Adjustment Value
DSP381
1) Turn on the finisher and then the host machine.
2) Open the front cover, and insert the door switch
actuator into the door switch [1].
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER

[1]
[2]
F-5-14
5) Place a single sheet of A4/LTR paper, and select

ADF or copyboard mode; then, set '3' as the copy
F-5-12 count, and execute printing.
6) Check the horizontal registration/angle
3) Remove the switch cover [1] of the inside cover adjustment value indicated by the LED [1].
(lower). The indication will be 'A' -> 'horizontal
- 1 screw [2] registration adjustment value' -> 'b' -> 'skew
adjustment value'; take note of the values.
[1] - horizontal registration adjustment value
(reference only): -3 to +3 mm (1 index:
equivalent of 1 mm)
- skew adjustment value (reference only); -2 to +2
mm (1 index: equivalent of 1 mm)
[1]
SW382
DSP381
SW381
[2]
F-5-13
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
F-5-15
5-6
Chapter 5
7) Press the enter button to end adjustment mode. 3. Adjusting the Angle
8) Turn off the host machine and then the finisher in If the angle is as indicated, start with step 7).
sequence. 1) Lift the upper cover [1], and detach the inside
cover (upper) [2].
- 1 knob [3]
2. Adjusting the Horizontal Registration - 8 screws [4]
2) Loosen the 2 screws [2] on the positioning plate [4] [1]
[1] found on the right side.
3) If the value recorded is on the + side, move the
plate in the direction of [A] and tighten the screw
[2].
If the value recorded is on the - side, on the other
hand, move the plate in the direction of [B] and
tighten the screw [2].
[3]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[4]
F-5-17
2) Loosen the 2 screws [2] on the latch base (front)

[B] [A] [1].
base in the direction of [A] and tighten the screw
[2].
F-5-16
hand, move the base in the direction of [B] and
5-7
Chapter 5
5) Loosen the 2 screws [2] on the latch base (rear)

[1].
Make sure that the total of the indexes over which the [2].
latch base (front, rear) is moved is between -2 and +2 If the value recorded is on the - side, on the other
mm. hand, move the base in the direction of [B] and
Make sure that the total of the indexes over which the
latch base (front, rear) has been moved is between -2
and +2 mm.
[2]
[A] [B]
[1]
[A] [B]
[1]
F-5-18
4) Remove the middle rear cover [1]. [2]

- 4 screws [2] F-5-20
[1] 7) Connect the finisher and the host machine.

8) Turn on the finisher and the host machine in
sequence.
9) Check the adjustment values once again.
[2] If the adjustment value indicated by the LED is
[2] within a specific range, press the ENTER key to
end adjustment mode. Otherwise, go through the
steps for a second time; if the result is more or less
the indicated value (reference only), end the
work.
10) Put the DIP switch back to its initial settings, and
attach the covers and parts you have removed.
5.3.1.3 Adjusting the Sensor Intensity
0015-2224
Go through the following steps when installing the

finisher or replacing specific sensor:
F-5-19 sequence.
5-8
Chapter 5
Be sure to lower the tray A/B [2] until it does not

block the tray sensor (front/rear) [1].
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-5-21
[1]
3) Insert a screwdriver [2] through the hole [1] in the
bottom face of the tray; then, disengage the tray in
the direction of [A], and lower the tray A/B in the
direction of [B]. [2]
[1]
F-5-23
[B] 4) Detach the inside cover (lower) and the switch

[A] cover [1].
- 1 screw [2]
[1]
[2]
F-5-22
[2]
F-5-24
5-9
Chapter 5
5) Set the DIP switch SW382 [1] of the switch PCB T-5-4
as shown (1: ON), and press the enter button
(SW385) [2] to start sensor intensity adjustment. Code Sensor Name
1 Buffer path 1 sensor PCB(UN13)
[1]
3 Lower path sensor PCB(UN24)
SW382 4 Horizontal sensor PCB(UN12)
DSP381
Punch chip case full sensor
5 PCB(Panch unit U1)
Tray A paper surface sensor PCB
SW381 6~8 (UN16)
tray B paper surface sensor PCB
9, A, b (UN18)
SW383 SW384 SW385
5.3.2 Adjustment at Time of Parts

(-) (+) ENTER Replacement
[2] 5.3.2.1 Adjusting the Tray A/B Position
0015-2225
F-5-25 Go through the following steps if you have replaced

the tray A or B so that the tray is horizontal:
6) If the LED [1] indicates '0', the adjustment has 1) Holding the tray horizontally, fit it to the support
been successful. Press the enter button (SW385) (left, right).
[2] to end the sensor intensity adjustment. At this time, be sure that distance A (i.e., from
the tip of the support [3] to the tray shaft [4]) is the
[1] same at the front [1] and the rear [2].
[3]
SW382
DSP381
SW381
[4] [A]
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER [2]
[2]
F-5-26
7) If any of the sensors is faulty (i.e., the LED flashes

'0'), press the + (SW384) [1]/- (SW383) [2] button
to find out the code number indicated by the LED [1]
[3], and replace the faulty sensor.
F-5-27
5-10
Chapter 5
5.3.2.2 Adjusting the Angle of the Aligning 3) Place A4 paper [1] in the intermediate handling
Plate (orthogonal) tray in the direction of the arrow. Make adjustments
so that there is no gap between the paper edge [1] and
0015-2226 the aligning plate [2]; then, fix the aligning plate
Go through the following steps if you have replaced using a screw [3].
the alignment motor of the intermediate handling
tray assembly or the EEPROM of the finisher [3]
controller PCB:
1) After mounting the intermediate handling tray
assembly, loosen the 2 screws [2] on the aligning
plate [1] of the assembly.
[1]
Before
adjustment
[2] [1] [2]
F-5-28
[2]
2) Fix the 2 paper edge stoppers [1] in place on the
host machine using 2 screws [2].
[C] [1]
After
adjustment
[2]
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-5-29 F-5-30
5-11
Chapter 5
5.3.2.3 Adjusting the Stapler Position 5.3.2.4 Adjusting the Speed of the Swing
0015-2227
Guide
Go through the following steps if you have replaced
the stapler unit found in the intermediate handling
0015-2229

tray assembly: the swing guide motor or the EEPROM of the
1) Mark the position [1] of the stapler unit before finisher controller PCB:
replacement. 1) Turn on the finisher.
2) Mount the new stapler unit [2] with reference 2) Turn on the host machine so that it will be in a
to the marking [1], fixing it in place using 2 standby state.
screws [3]. 3) Open the front door, and insert the door switch
[1]
[1]
F-5-32
4) Remove the screw [2], and detach the switch

cover [1].
[1]
[3] [2]
F-5-31
[2]
F-5-33
5-12
Chapter 5
5) Set the DIP switch SW382 [1] on the switch PCB 5.3.2.5 Adjusting the Aligning Plate Width
as follows:
0015-2230

[1] the front alignment motor or the rear alignment
motor or the EEPROM of the controller PCB:
1) Turn on the finisher.
2) Turn on the host machine so that it will be in a
SW382 standby state.
3) Open the front door, and insert the door switch
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
[1]
(-) (+) ENTER
F-5-34
6) Press the push switch SW385 [1] to start

adjustment of the swing guide speed.
In a while, press the push switch SW385 [1]; if F-5-36
the LED [2] indicates '0', the adjustment has
ended successfully. 4) Remove the screw [2], and detach the switch
cover [1].
[2]
[1]
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
[2]
(-) (+) ENTER
F-5-37
[1]
F-5-35
7) If the LED indicates other than '0', the result is not

good. Repeat the steps.
5-13
Chapter 5
5) Set the DIP switch SW382 [1] on the switch PCB

as follows:
for A-Series, SW382
DSP381
[1]
SW381
SW382
DSP381
SW383 SW384 SW385
SW381
(-) (+) ENTER
[1]
SW383 SW384 SW385
F-5-40
(-) (+) ENTER 7) Place A4 paper [1] in the intermediate handling

tray. (Be sure to butt the paper against the rear of the
F-5-38 handling tray.)
for L-Series,
[1]
SW382
DSP381
[1]
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385

F-5-41
(-) (+) ENTER
F-5-39

adjustment of the front aligning plate width.
5-14
Chapter 5
8) Press the push switch SW383 [1] or SW384 [2] to 9) Press the push switch SW385 [1] to store the
store the new value. distance of travel of the front aligning plate.
A single press on SW383 will cause the LED [3]
to indicate '-1', moving the front aligning plate [4]
by about 0.2 mm toward the front. On the other SW382
DSP381
hand, a single press on SW384 will cause the
LED [3] to indicate '+1', moving the front
aligning plate [4] by about 0.2 mm toward the
rear.
range of adjustment: +10 to -10 (unit: 0.2 mm)
SW381
[3]
SW383 SW384 SW385

SW382 DSP381
(-) (+) ENTER
SW381 [1]
F-5-43
SW383 SW384 SW385 10) Check that there is no gap between the paper and
the aligning plate as the result of the foregoing
steps. If there still is a gap, go back to step 8).
(-) (+) ENTER
[1]
[1] [2]
[2]
[4]
F-5-44
F-5-42
5-15
Chapter 5
5.3.2.6 Adjusting the Transport Belt 5) Set the DIP switch SW382 [1] on the switch PCB
Position as follows:
0015-2231
[1]
the transport belt of the intermediate tray or there is
displacement among the sheets of a delivered stack:
2) Turn on the host machine so that it will be in a SW382
DSP381
standby state.
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
[1] (-) (+) ENTER
F-5-47

adjustment of the transport belt position.
F-5-45
4) Remove the screw [2], and detach the switch SW382
DSP381
cover [1].
[1]
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[1]
F-5-48
7) Press the push switch SW383 [1] or SW384 [2] to

[2] store the adjustment value.
A single press on SW383 will cause the LED to
F-5-46 indicate '-1', closing up the distance between the
belt [4] and the paper [5] and, thus, increasing the
retention by the belt. On the other hand, a single
press on SW384 will cause the LED to indicate
'+1', distancing the belt [4] and the paper [5] and,
thus, decreasing the retention by the belt. (range:
+4 to -4)
5-16
Chapter 5
Reference:
1. If wear has occurred on the transport belt or [2]
recycled paper (i.e., with high surface resistance)
is used, select a negative adjustment value (-1 to -
4) to increase the retention.
2. If dents have occurred in the edge of paper,
select a positive adjustment value (+1 to +4) to SW382
decrease the retention.
DSP381
[3] SW381
SW382 DSP381
SW383 SW384 SW385
SW381 (-) (+) ENTER
[1]
SW383 SW384 SW385

F-5-50
9) If the LED indicates '0', on the other hand, the

(-) (+) ENTER adjustment has failed. Repeat the foregoing steps.
[1] [2] 5.3.2.7 Adjusting the Stapling Position

(rear 1-point)
0015-2232
Go through the following steps if there is

[4] displacement in the stapling position (rear 1-point)
or if you have replaced the EEPROM of the finisher
controller PCB:
standby state.
[5]
F-5-49
8) Press the push switch SW385 [1] to end [1]

adjustment of the transport belt.
If the LED [2] indicates '0', the adjustment has
ended successfully.
F-5-51
5-17
Chapter 5

cover [1].
SW382
DSP381
[1]
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[1]
[2] F-5-54
F-5-52 for L-Series,

5) Set the DIP switch SW382 [1] of the switch PCB [1]
as follows:
[1]
SW382
DSP381
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
SW383 SW384 SW385

(-) (+) ENTER
F-5-55
(-) (+) ENTER
F-5-53

adjustment of the stapling position (rear 1-point).
for A-Series,
5-18
Chapter 5
7) Press the push switch SW383 [1] or SW384 [2] to execute stapling.
store the adjustment value.
to indicate '-1', moving the stapling position
toward the rear. On the other hand, a single press
on SW384 will cause the LED [3] to indicate '+1',
moving the stapling position toward the front.
[3]
[1]
SW382
DSP381
SW381 F-5-58
10) Check to see that the stapling position is 5 +/-2

mm [1] as a result of the foregoing steps.
Otherwise, go back to step 6).
SW383 SW384 SW385
[1]
(-) (+) ENTER
[2] [1]
F-5-56
8) Press the push switch SW385 [1] to move the

stapler to the rear.
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
F-5-59
(-) (+) ENTER
[1]
F-5-57
9) Place A4 paper [1] in the intermediate handling If the LED indicates a value other than '0', the
tray. (Be sure to butt the paper against the rear of adjustment is likely to have failed. Start over.
the handling tray.)
Thereafter, press the push switch SW385 to
5-19
Chapter 5
5.3.2.8 Adjusting the Stapling Position

(front 1-point) [1]
0015-2233
Go through the following steps if the stapling

position (front 1-point) is displaced or if you have
replaced the EEPROM of the finisher controller SW382
DSP381
PCB:
standby state.
3) Open the front door, and insert the door switch SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
F-5-62
[1]
for L-Series,
[1]
F-5-60
SW382
DSP381
4) Remove the switch [2], and detach the switch
cover [1].
[1]
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
F-5-63
[2]
F-5-61

as follows:
for A-Series,
5-20
Chapter 5
6) Press the push switch SW385 [1] to start 8) Press the push switch SW385 [1] to move the
adjustment of the stapling position (front 1- stapler toward the front.
point).
SW382
DSP381
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385

SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER

(-) (+) ENTER
[1]
[1]
F-5-66
F-5-64
9) Place A4 paper [1] in the intermediate handling
7) Press the push switch SW383 [1] or SW382 [3] to tray. (Be sure to butt the paper against the rear of
store the new adjustment value. the handling tray.)
A press on SW383 causes the LED [3] to
indicate '-1', moving the stapling position (front
1-point) toward the rear. On the other hand, a
press on SW384 causes the LED [3] to indicate
'+1', moving the stapling position toward the
front.
[3]
[1]
SW382
DSP381
SW381 F-5-67
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[1] [2]
F-5-65
5-21
Chapter 5
10) Check to make sure that the stapling position is 5 5.3.2.9 Adjusting the Stapling Position (2-
+/-2 mm [1] as a result of the foregoing steps. point)
0015-2237

[1] displacement in stapling position (2-point) or if you
have replaced the EEPROM of the finisher controller
PCB:
standby state.
[1]
F-5-68
F-5-69

cover [1].
[1]
If the LED indicates other than '0', the adjustment is
likely to have failed. Start over.
[2]
F-5-70
5-22
Chapter 5
5) Set the DIP switch SW382 [1] on the switch PCB 6) Press the push switch SW385 [1] to start
as follows: adjustment of stapling position (2-point).
for A-Series,
[1] SW382
DSP381
SW382 SW381
DSP381
SW383 SW384 SW385
SW381
(-) (+) ENTER
SW383 SW384 SW385 [1]

F-5-73
(-) (+) ENTER
F-5-71
for L-Series,
[1]
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
F-5-72
5-23
Chapter 5
7) Press the push switch SW383 [1] or SW384 [2] to 8) Press the push switch SW385 [1] to move the
store the new adjustment value. stapler to the 2-point stapling position.
to indicate '-1', moving the stapling position (2-
point) upward. On the other hand, a single press SW382
DSP381
moving the stapling position in downward
direction.
SW381
[3]
SW382 SW383 SW384 SW385

DSP381
(-) (+) ENTER

SW381
[1]
F-5-75
SW383 SW384 SW385
handling tray.)
(-) (+) ENTER
[1] [2]
[1]
F-5-74 F-5-76
5-24
Chapter 5
10) Check to see that the stapling position is as

follows [1] as the result of the foregoing steps: for [1]
A-Series, 86.3 +/-4 mm; for L-Series, 73.7 +/-4
mm. Otherwise, go back to step 6).
[1]
F-5-77 [2]
F-5-79

as follows:
[1]
SW382
DSP381
5.3.2.10 Adjusting the Delivery of Stapled
Stacks (lower delivery)
0015-2238
Go through the following steps if there is SW381

displacement among sheets of a stapled stack (lower
delivery; cover, 1st to 3rd sheets) or if you have
replaced the EEPROM of the finisher controller
PCB:
1) Turn on the finisher. SW383 SW384 SW385
standby state.
actuator into the door switch [1]. (-) (+) ENTER
F-5-80
[1]
F-5-78

cover [1].
5-25
Chapter 5
6) Press the push switch SW385 [1] so that the LED

[2] flashes '0', indicating that the machine is ready
for adjustment.
[2]
SW382
DSP381
SW381
[3] [2] [1]

SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[1]
F-5-81
7) Place 3 originals in the ADF, and set as follows on

the control panel: A4, 1 set (staple sort).
8) Press the Start key on the control panel to execute
copying.
9) Open the upper cover, and measure the
displacement (A: between 1st and 2nd sheets; B:
between 2nd and 3rd sheets). F-5-82
Repeat this step 5 times, and see that the average
of A and B is as indicated (2 +/-0.5 mm). If not,
go through the following steps:
[3]
[2]
[1]
[B] [A]
F-5-83
[1] 1st sheet

[2] 2nd sheets
[3] 3rd sheets
5-26
Chapter 5
10) If A (between 1st and 2nd sheets) or B (between

2nd and 3rd sheets) is not as indicated, go through [4]
the following:
Press the push switch SW385 [1] so that the
machine is in adjustment mode for A (between 1st
and 2nd sheets). Press the push switch SW383 [2]
to decrease the displacement, or press SW384 [3] SW382
DSP381
to increase the displacement. (The LED [4]
indicates the correction value.)
[4] SW381
SW382
DSP381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
SW381
[2] [3] [1]
F-5-85
SW383 SW384 SW385
A press on the push switch SW385 while the LED is

(-) (+) ENTER indicating '0' will cause the LED to indicate the A
and B correction values in sequence.
[2] [3] [1] Pay attention so that you remain aware of which
correction value you are working on.
F-5-84
11) If B (between 2nd and 3rd sheets) is not as

indicated, go through the following: 5.3.2.11 Adjustment of EEPROM (IC107)
Press the push switch SW385 [1] so that the on the Finisher Controller PCB After
machine is in adjustment mode for B (between 1st
and 3rd sheets). Replacement
Press the push switch SW382 [2] to decrease 0015-2244
the displacement, or press SW384 [3] to increase Adjustments after replacing the EEPROM (IC107)
the displacement. (The LED [4] will indicate the on the finisher controller PCB
correction value.) These adjustments are performed when the
EEPROM (IC107) on the finisher controller PCB
range of adjustment: +30 to -30 (unit: 0.2 mm) has been replaced.
Another press on SW385 will store the A/B 1) Turn on the finisher.
correction value. 2) Turn on the copier and set the copier in a stand-by
mode.
5-27
Chapter 5
5) Set the DIP SW382 [1] on the Switch PCB as

shown in the figure below. EEPROM is
initialized by pressing the switches in the order of
SW385,SW384,SW383, once for each.
SW382
DSP381
[1]
SW381
F-5-86 SW383 SW384 SW385
4) Detach the switch cover [1] by removing the

screw [2]. (-) (+) ENTER
[1] F-5-88
6) Make the following adjustments:

- Sensor light intensity adjustment
- Swing guide speed adjustment
- Alignment plate width adjustment
- Staple position adjustment (1-point binding at
the rear)
the front)
- Staple position adjustment (2-point binding)
- Stapled stack delivery adjustment (lower
delivery)
- Stapled stack delivery adjustment (saddle
delivery)
- Feed belt position adjustment
- Saddle leading edge stopper position adjustment
[2] - Saddle binding position adjustment
- Saddle folding position adjustment
F-5-87 - Punch hole position adjustment (side
registration direction)
- Punch hole position adjustment (feed direction)
- Bufferless mode 1
- Bufferless mode 2
- Staple inlet guide height adjustment
- Paddle height adjustment
- Adjustment at poor tray stackability (when the
upper curl occurs)
lower curl occurs)
- Adjustment at poor tray stackability (run over
when using thin paper)
- Tray stacking limit cancellation adjustment
5-28
Chapter 5
5.3.2.12 Bufferless mode 1 5) Set the DIP switch SW382 [1] on the switch PCB
as follows:
0016-4794
This mode is selected when the conditions listed

below are satisfied. [1]
- When poor alignment has occurred in cases where
a multiple number of copies has been made
- When the corners of the sheets are creased
- When a buffer path 2 sensor stationary jam (jam SW382
code: 1109) has occurred
DSP381
- When the EEPROM (IC107) on the finisher
controller PCB has been replaced
When this mode is selected, the buffer operation is

not performed regardless of the loading method SW381
(non-staple loading or staple loading).
The procedure for establishing the settings in this
mode is described below.
2) Turn on the host machine so that the machine will SW383 SW384 SW385
be in a standby state.
actuator into the door switch [1]. (-) (+) ENTER
F-5-91
6) The setting preparations are completed by

pressing SW385.
7) Since "1" appears on the LED when SW384 is
pressed once, press SW385 once again.
This now completes the bufferless mode 1 settings.
[1]
F-5-89

cover [1].
[1]
[2]
F-5-90
5-29
Chapter 5

5.3.2.13 Bufferless mode 2 as follows:
0016-4795
This mode is selected when the conditions listed [1]

below are satisfied.
a multiple number of copies has been made using
coated sheets for the originals SW382
DSP381
- When the finisher controller PCB has been replaced
controller PCB has been replaced
not performed during the staple loading.
1) Turn on the finisher. SW381
2) Turn on the host machine so that the machine will
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
F-5-94

pressing SW385.ÅB
7) Since “2” appears on the LED when SW384 is
[1] pressed twice, press SW385 once again.
5.3.2.14 Assist stopper position
adjustment
0016-4797
F-5-92 This adjustment is performed when there are

variations in the position of the topmost sheet of the
4) Remove the screw [2], and detach the switch delivered stack.
cover [1]. The operation procedure is described below.
1) Open the front door.

[1] 2) Pull out the saddle unit [2] by holding the lever
[1]; and then, open the saddle right guide [3].
[2]
[1]
[2]
F-5-93
F-5-95
5-30
Chapter 5
3) Place the A4 or letter size sheets [1] in the 4) Remove the 2 screws [2], and remove the assist
intermediate processing tray in the direction of the stopper [1].
arrow. Then, measure the degree of displacement [A]
between the paper edge stopper [2] and the assist [2] [1] [2]
stopper [3].
If the measured value (+A or -A) is outside of the
reference value (0+0.5 mm), perform the adjustment
to make the degree of displacement falls within the
range of the reference value.
[1]
F-5-97
5) Loosen the screw [1] of the assist stopper, and

adjust it so that the degree of displacement of the
stopper [2] falls within the range of the reference
value [3].
[2]
+A
[1] [2] [3] [2]
[1]
[3]
F-5-98
T-5-5
-A
If the measured value [3] obtained in the step 3

[1] [2] [3] [2] is -A, move the stopper [2] in the direction
of the white arrow, on the other hand, if it is
F-5-96 +A, move in the direction of the black arrow.
5-31
Chapter 5
6) Attach the assist stopper [1] using the 2 screws [2].
[2] [1] [2]
[1]
F-5-101
F-5-99 4) Remove the screw [2], and detach the switch

cover [1].
5.3.2.15 Staple inlet guide height
adjustment [1]
0016-4796
This adjustment is performed either when poor tray

stacking occurs with thin papers shown in the figure
below or when the EEPROM (IC107) on the finisher
controller PCB is replaced.
[2]
F-5-102
F-5-100

5-32
Chapter 5
5) Set the DIP switch SW382 [1] on the switch PCB When the foregoing fault has occurred, it can be
as follows: remedied by changing the adjustment value in the
negative direction.
[1]
[3]
SW382
DSP381
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
SW383 SW384 SW385

(-) (+) ENTER
F-5-103 (-) (+) ENTER
6) The preparations for the staple inlet guide height

adjustment are completed by pressing the push [1] [2]
switch (SW385) [1].
F-5-105
SW382
DSP381
[4] [5]
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
F-5-106
[1]
F-5-104
7) The adjustment amount is determined by pressing

either one of the push switches: SW383 [1] or
SW384 [2].
When SW383 is pressed once, "-1" appears on the
LED [3], and the staple inelt guide height position
[4] is lowered.
On the other hand, when SW384 is pressed once,
"+1" appears on the LED [3], and the staple inlet
guide height position [5] is raised.
Adjustment range: +4 to -4 (Each 1 setting value
change results in the movement of 0.5mm.)
<Reference>
5-33
Chapter 5
8) This adjustment is completed by pressing the push

switch SW385 [1] again.
SW382
DSP381
SW381 [1]
SW383 SW384 SW385

F-5-109
(-) (+) ENTER 4) Remove the screw [2], and detach the switch
cover [1].
[1] [1]
F-5-107
5.3.2.16 Paddle height adjustment

0016-6224

6) The preparations for the paddle height adjustment
are completed by pressing the push switch SW385
[1].
[2]
F-5-110

are completed by pressing the push switch
SW385 [1].
[1]
F-5-108
SW382
DSP381

actuator into the door switch [1]. SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
F-5-111
5-34
Chapter 5

are completed by pressing the push switch
SW385 [1].
[5]
SW382
DSP381
[4]
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385 F-5-114

(-) (+) ENTER either one of the push switches: SW383 [1] or
SW384 [2].
[1] When SW383 is pressed once, "-1" appears on the
F-5-112 [4] is lowered.
7) The adjustment amount is determined by pressing "+1" appears on the LED [3], and the staple inlet
either one of the push switches: SW383 [1] or guide height position [5] is raised.
SW384 [2]. o Adjustment range: +4 to -4 (Each 1 setting
When SW383 is pressed once, "-1" appears on the value change results in the movement of 0.5mm.)
[4] is lowered. <Reference>
On the other hand, when SW384 is pressed once, When the foregoing fault has occurred, it can be
"+1" appears on the LED [3], and the staple inlet remedied by changing the adjustment value in the
guide height position [5] is raised. negative direction.
o Adjustment range: +4 to -4 (Each 1 setting
value change results in the movement of 0.5mm.)
SW382
DSP381
<Reference>
When the foregoing fault has occurred, it can be
remedied by changing the adjustment value in the
negative direction.
SW381
[3]
SW383 SW384 SW385

SW382
DSP381
(-) (+) ENTER
SW381
[1]
F-5-115
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[1] [2]
F-5-113
5-35
Chapter 5
5.3.2.17 Adjustment at poor tray

stackability (when the upper curl [1]
occurs)
0016-6227

stackability occurs (when the upper curl occurs)
shown in the figure below or when the EEPROM
(IC107) on the finisher controller PCB is replaced.
[2]
F-5-116 F-5-118
<Memo> 5) Set the DIP switch SW382 [1] on the switch PCB
By executing this adjustment, the finisher increases as follows:
the feeding speed when the trailing edge of paper
reaches to the delivery roller. The tray stackability is
thereby improved since no sheets are left in place [1]
near the delivery exit.
Details of the adjustment procedure are provided

below. SW382
DSP381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[1] F-5-119
F-5-117

cover [1].
5-36
Chapter 5
6) The preparations for this adjustment are

completed by pressing the push switch SW385
[1]. SW382
DSP381
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
SW383 SW384 SW385 (-) (+) ENTER
[1]
(-) (+) ENTER
F-5-122
[1]
F-5-120
stackability (when the lower curl
7) When the push switch SW384 [1] is pressed once, occurs)
"+1" appears on the LED [2]. 0016-6228

[2] stackability occurs (when the lower curl occurs)
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385 F-5-123
<Memo>
(-) (+) ENTER When delivering sheets while paper stacks with
downward curl are stacked on a tray, the delivered
papers may slide along the tilt of the paper stacks,
[1] causing fall out from the tray.
However, by executing this adjustment, the finisher
F-5-121 reduces the feeding speed when the trailing edge of
paper reaches to the delivery roller. Because the
8) This adjustment is completed when the push degree that the delivered paper goes beyond the
switch SW385 [1] is pressed again. paper stack is reduced, it prevents the paper to be
fallen out from the tray.

below.
5-37
Chapter 5
3) Open the front door, and insert the door switch 5) Set the DIP switch SW382 [1] on the switch PCB
actuator into the door switch [1]. as follows:
[1]
SW382
DSP381
[1]
SW381
F-5-124 SW383 SW384 SW385

cover [1]. (-) (+) ENTER
[1] F-5-126

[1].
SW382
DSP381
SW381
[2]
SW383 SW384 SW385
F-5-125
(-) (+) ENTER
[1]
F-5-127
5-38
Chapter 5
7) When the push switch SW384 [1] is pressed twice,

"+2" appears on the LED [2].
[2]
SW382
DSP381
F-5-130
SW381
<Memo>
By executing this adjustment, the finisher reduces
the feeding speed. As a result, the degree of curl of
SW383 SW384 SW385
thin paper is reduced; thus, the poor tray stackability
mentioned above is reduced.

(-) (+) ENTER below.
[1] be in a standby state.
F-5-128 actuator into the door switch [1].
8) This adjustment is completed when the push
switch SW385 [1] is pressed again.
SW382
DSP381
[1]
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385

F-5-131
(-) (+) ENTER
[1]
F-5-129

stackability (run over when using thin
paper)
0016-6230

stackability occurs with thin papers shown in the
figure below or when the EEPROM (IC107) on the
finisher controller PCB is replaced.
5-39
Chapter 5

cover [1].
SW382
DSP381
[1]
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[1]
[2] F-5-134
F-5-132 7) When the push switch SW384 [1] is pressed once,

as follows: [2]
[1]
SW382
DSP381
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385

SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER

(-) (+) ENTER
F-5-133
[1]
6) The preparations for this adjustment are F-5-135
[1].
5-40
Chapter 5
8) This adjustment is completed when the push T-5-6

Loading capacity
Paper type Under normal When the stacking
SW382 conditions limit is cancelled
DSP381
Plain paper
(extra long 1,000 sheets 1,500 sheets
size)
Coated
SW381 paper (half 1,500 sheets 3,000 sheets
size)
Coated
paper (large 1,000 sheets 1,500 sheets
SW383 SW384 SW385 size)
(-) (+) ENTER
[1] Details of the adjustment procedure are provided

F-5-136 below.
5.3.2.20 Tray stacking limit cancellation 2) Turn on the host machine so that the machine will
adjustment 3) Open the front door, and insert the door switch
0016-6232
This adjustment is performed either when canceling
the tray stacking limit for coated paper and extra long
paper or when replacing the EEPROM (IC107) on
the finisher controller PCB.
[B]
[A]
[1]
F-5-138
F-5-137
[1] Loading under normal conditions

[2] Loading when the stacking limit is cancelled
<Memo>
This adjustment works for the upper tray only. The
stacking limit of the lower tray cannot be cancelled.
The table below shows the loading capacity of the
lower tray when the stacking limit has been
cancelled.
5-41
Chapter 5

cover [1].
SW382
DSP381
[1]
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[1]
[2] F-5-141
F-5-139 7) When the push switch SW384 [1] is pressed once,

as follows: [2]
[1]
SW382
DSP381
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385

SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER

(-) (+) ENTER
F-5-140 [1]
6) The preparations for this adjustment are F-5-142
[1].
5-42
Chapter 5

switch SW385 [1] is pressed again. [2]
SW382
DSP381
[1]
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385 [3]
(-) (+) ENTER
[1]
F-5-143
5.3.2.21 Saddle staple alignment F-5-144

adjustment 3) Detach the saddle inner cover (lower) [1].
0016-4897
- 4 screws [2]
- 1 knob [3]
T-5-7
[3]
Be careful not to touch any of the drive parts [2]

when checking the adjustment since this job
is done with no covers in place and with the [2]
finisher running. [1]
This adjustment is performed either when the saddle

staple unit is replaced or when the staple positions F-5-145
(saddle delivery) at the front and the rear are
misaligned.
The operation procedure is described below.
- 1 knob [2]
- 2 screws [3]
5-43
Chapter 5
4) Turn on the power of the finisher.

5) Turn on the power switch on the host machine to [3]
set the host machine to the standby mode.
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-5-148
F-5-146
9) Place the sheets (A3 or LDR) [1] along the feeding
7) Remove the screw [2] to detach the switch cover guide [2]. (Push the sheets in until they come into
[1]. contact with the positioning plate.)
[1] [2] [1]
[2]
F-5-149
F-5-147
8) Pull out the saddle unit [2] by holding the lever

5-44
Chapter 5
10) Set the DIP SW382 [1] on the switch PCB as

shown in the figure below.
SW382
DSP381
[1]
SW382 SW381
DSP381
SW383 SW384 SW385
SW381
(-) (+) ENTER
SW383 SW384 SW385 [1]

F-5-152
(-) (+) ENTER
13) The sheets are folded and delivered by pressing
F-5-150 the push switch SW383 [1] several times.
11) The preparations for stapling (lower delivery)

DSP381
SW385 [1] once.
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER

SW383 SW384 SW385
[1]
(-) (+) ENTER
F-5-153
[1]
F-5-151
12) Stapling is executed by pressing the push switch

SW384 [1] several times.
5-45
Chapter 5
14) Based on the output results, measure the degree 17) Return the finisher to the operable status by
of misalignment [A] or [B] between the rear following steps 1) to 8) and step 15) but in reverse.
staple position [1] and the front staple position
[2]. 5.3.2.22 Saddle disengage roller position
If the degree is significant, follow the steps below adjustment
to adjust the tilting of the saddle staple unit.
0016-6915
This adjustment is to be carried out when there is a

noticeable misalignment in the folding position or
[1]
[2] stapling position.
[1] <MEMO>
[B] This operation adjusts the size of the gap between the
[A] disengage roller and the paper, and improved paper
feed performance in the saddle assembly.
[2]
F-5-154
15) Loosen the 2 screws [1] used to secure the saddle

staple unit.
[2]
[1]
F-5-155 [1]
M102
16) Adjust the tilting of the saddle staple unit in
accordance with the degree of misalignment in
the staple positions.
- If, as described in step 14), the front staple

position has shifted downward (the degree of
misalignment [A])
Action to take:
Move the staple unit [1] in the direction of the
black arrow [A] by an amount equivalent to the
shift.
- If, as described in step 14), the front staple

position has shifted upward (the degree of
misalignment [B])
Action to take:
Move the staple unit [1] in the direction of the
white arrow [B] by an amount equivalent to the F-5-156
shift.
5-46
Chapter 5
Details of the adjustment method are as described 5) Set dipswitch DIP SW382 [1] on the switch PCB
below. as illustrated below.
1) Turn the finisher power ON.
2) Turn on the host machine power switch and put [1]
the copier in standby.
3) Open the front door and insert the door switch
SW382
DSP381
SW381
[1]
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
F-5-157 F-5-159
4) Remove the screw [2] to detach the switch cover 6) Press switch SW385 [1] to set up for the
[1]. adjustment.
[1]
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[2] [1]
F-5-158 F-5-160
5-47
Chapter 5
7) Press switch SW383 [1] or SW384 [2] to fix the

degree of adjustment.
Press SW383 once and the LED [3]will display "-
1" and the gap between the disengage roller and
the paper will increase. (The disengage roller
moves in the A direction.)
Alternatively, press SW384 once and the LED [3]
will display "+1" and the gap between the
disengage roller and the paper will decrease.
(The disengage roller moves in the B direction.)
- Adjustment range: -5 to +4 (each increment is
0.3mm.)
[3]
SW382
DSP381
SW381
[1]
M102
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[1] [2]
F-5-161
F-5-162
5-48
Chapter 5
8) Press switch SW385 [1] to complete the Details of the adjustment method are as described
adjustment. below.
2) Turn on the copier main unit power switch and put
SW382 the copier in standby.
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
[1]
(-) (+) ENTER
[1]
F-5-163
5.3.2.23 The amount of sending of a F-5-165

saddle disengage roller adjustment 4) Remove the screw [2] to detach the switch cover
0016-7248
[1].
noticeable misalignment in the folding position or [1]
stapling position.
<MEMO>
This operation adjusts the size of the gap between the
disengage roller and the paper, and improved paper
M101
[1]
[2]
F-5-166
F-5-164
5-49
Chapter 5
5) Set dipswitch DIP SW382 [1] on the switch PCB

as illustrated below.
SW382
DSP381
[1]
SW381
SW382
DSP381
SW383 SW384 SW385
SW381
(-) (+) ENTER
[1] [2]
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
F-5-167
6) Press switch SW385 [1] to set up for the

adjustment.
SW382
DSP381
F-5-169
SW381
8) Press switch SW385 [1] to complete the
adjustment.
SW383 SW384 SW385 SW382

DSP381
(-) (+) ENTER
[1] SW381
F-5-168

degree of adjustment. SW383 SW384 SW385
the paper will increase. (The disengage roller (-) (+) ENTER
will display "+1" and the gap between the [1]
disengage roller and the paper will decrease. F-5-170
0.3mm.)
5-50
Chapter 5
5.3.2.24 Saddle staple position adjustment

0016-6929

noticeable misalignment of the folding position with
the stapling position.
<MEMO>
This operation adjusts the length of the paper feed
time just before the folding operation is carried out.
(Adjusts Mxxxx rotation time.)
The adjustment prevents lack of feed caused by [1]
slippage of the disengage roller, so that the defect
described above does not occur.
M101 F-5-172
4) Remove the screw [2] to detach the switch cover

[1].
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-5-173

F-5-171
[1]
Details of the adjustment method are as described
below.
2) Turn on the host machine power switch and put SW382
DSP381

SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
F-5-174
5-51
Chapter 5

adjustment.
M101
SW382
DSP381
[1]
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[1]
F-5-175

1" and the folding position lowers, as illustrated
below. (+ direction.)
will display "+1" and the folding position lowers,
as illustrated below. (- direction.)
- Adjustment range: -20 to +30 (each increment is F-5-177
1mm.)
adjustment.
SW382
DSP381
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[1] [2] SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[1]
F-5-178
F-5-176
5-52
Chapter 5
5.3.3 Other
5.3.3.1 Service Mode (by DIP switch)<Incerter>
0015-2245
The machine is equipped with a set of service mode items used to adjust it or to run checks on operation. The
items may be executed from the machine or from its host machine.
- From the Inserter

See Maintenance>VR, LED, and Check Pins>DIP Switch.
- From the Finisher

1) Open the finisher front cover; then, remove the screw [1] and the cover [2].
2) Make adjustments and checks using the DIP switch [3] (SW382) and the push switch [4] (SW383/SW384/
SW385) found on the service PCB I.
[3]
[2]
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[1]
[4]
F-5-179
5-53
Chapter 5
T-5-8
DIP setting Item Description
SW382 driving the drive switchover Press ENTER to start. A press on + will start tray A,
motor while a press on - will start tray B. Press ENTER to end.
SW382 driving tray pickup motor Press ENTER to start. A press on +/- will switch over the
speed (250, 500, 1100 mm/sec). Press ENTER to end.
SW382 driving the feed motor Press ENTER to start (1100 mm/sec). Press ENTER to
end.
SW382 driving the tray A lift motor Press ENTER to start (1100 mms/sec). Press ENTER to
end.
SW382 driving the tray B lift motor
SW382 driving the tray registration Press ENTER to start. It will stop automatically. (ON for
clutch 500 msec)
SW382 Ageing Press ENTER to start and repeat the following

operations; press ENTER to end:
tray A up>50 sheets in tray A>tray A down>tray B
up>50 sheets in tray B>tray B down
SW382 checking the sensors 1 Press ENTER to start. A press on +/- switches over
sensors. Press ENTER to end.
1. tray A paper placement sensor
2. tray A pickup sensor
3. tray A registration sensor
4. tray A paper sensor
5. tray B paper sensor 1
7. tray B paper placement sensor
8. tray B pickup sensor
9. tray B registration sensor
A press on the + switch to start the sensor in question.
The sensor in question is indicated on the display
(DSP381). If the sensor operation is normal, 1 goes on in
response to the placement of paper, while it flashes when
the paper is removed.
5-54
Chapter 5
1. feed sensor
2. not used
3. feed sensor 2
4. tray A lower limit sensor
5. tray B lower limit sensor
6. drive switchover sensor
7. not used
8. upper cover open/closed sensor
9. inserter open/closed sensor
A press on the + switch moves the sensor in question.
The sensor in question is indicated on the display
(DSP381).
SW382 adjusting the tray A width 1) Set the DIP switch to suit the tray being adjusted and
(A4) the paper configuration.
2) Press ENTER.
3) Place A4 or LTR paper in the upper or lower tray.
(minimum width adjustment)
4) Press the + switch.
SW382 adjusting the tray B width 5) $
(A4) 6) Press the - switch.
7) Press ENTER to end.
SW382 adjusting the tray A width

(LTR)
SW382 adjusting the tray B width

(LTR)
5-55
Chapter 5
5.4 Troubleshooting
5.4.1 Malfunction
5.4.1.1 Malfunction/Faulty Detection
5.4.1.1.1 The output is sent to tray B even when
tray A is selected.
0015-2247
[1]
[Case Study]
Description
Enabling the following in user mode will select tray
B as the destination of output (large-capacity
stacking mode): initial setup/registration>common
spec setup>large-capacity stacking mode. F-5-180
Once the setting has been enabled (ON), th target of 11) Detach the switch cover [1] by removing the
output will be tray B, regardless of the selection screw [2].
made on the control panel.
Field Remedy
Disable (OFF) 'large-capacity stacking mode' in user [1]
mode so that the target of output may freely be
selected on the control panel.
5.4.1.1.2 Remedy for EEPROM Problem on
Finisher Controller PCB
0015-2248
Description
The remedy in case 'E505' is displayed at the time of
Finisher Controller PCB replacement is described
below.
Remedy in the Field
With the following procedure, resolve the
problem.
1) Turning off the copier.
2) Remove the old PCB from the finisher and
mount the new PCB. [2]
3) Remove EEP-ROM (IC107) from the new
PCB. (Do not throw the EEP-ROM away at this F-5-181
point.)
4) Remove EEP-ROM from the old PCB and set 12) Set the DIP SW382 [1] located on switch PCB as
it into the socket (ICS1) on the new PCB. the following:
5) Turn on the copier. If E505 is not displayed on
the copier, it is the end of the procedure (The
memory contents in the old PCB is backupped to SW382
DSP381
the new PCB.)

6) If E505 is displayed, go on to the next step.
(If E505 occurs once again, it is due to EEP-ROM
fault. Memory backup using the old EEP-ROM is
not succeeded.)
7) Turn off the copier, and replace the old EEP- SW381
ROM set into the socket on the new PCB to the
new EEP-ROM.
8) Turn on the finisher once again.
9) Turn on the copier, and make it in the standby
SW383 SW384 SW385
state.
10) Open the front door, and insert a door switch
(-) (+) ENTER
F-5-182
5-56
Chapter 5
13) Execute the following adjustment.

Each press enables to execute initializing EEPROM
from SW385 to SW383 in order.
- Aligning plate width adjustment
- Stapling position adjustment (rear 1-point
binding)
- Stapling position adjustment (front 1-point
binding)
- Stapling position adjustment (2-point binding)
- Stuck stapling delivery adjustment (bottom
delivery)
- Stuck stapling delivery adjustment (saddle
delivery)
- Feeding belt position adjustment
- Saddle lead edge stopper position adjustment
- Saddle binding position adjustment
- Punch hole position adjustment (vertical
- Punch hole position adjustment (feeding
direction)
5-57
Chapter 5
5.5 Outline of Electrical Components

5.5.1 Sensors (Finisher Unit)
0015-2249
PS32
PS34
PS33
PS35
PS5
PS9
PS8
PS3
PS2 PS4
PS24
PS7
PS26
PS6
PS25
PS31
PS29 PS30
PS1
PS28
PS27
PS18
PS21 PS42
PS22
PS12 PS23
PS16
PS17
PS20 PS13
PS15
PS11 PS14
PS19
F-5-183
5-58
Chapter 5
T-5-9
Notation Name Description Parts No. Jam Error

PS1 detects the state (open/closed) of the front FK2-0149
front cover open sensor 1422
cover
PS2 upper cover open/closed detects the state (open/closed) of the FK2-0149
1422
sensor upper cover
PS3 inlet sensor detects paper at the inlet WG8-5736 1002/1103
PS4 shift unit trail edge sensor detects paper in the shift unit WG8-5736 1004/1105
PS5 detects paper in the upper delivery WG8-5736
upper delivery sensor 100A/110B
assembly
PS6 lower delivery sensor detects paper in the lower delivery sensor WG8-5736 100E/110F
PS7 horizontal registration HP detects the home position of the FK2-0149
E566
sensor horizontal registration unit
PS8 detects the home position of the shift FK2-0149
shift roller unit HP sensor E567
roller unit
PS9 detects the home position of the transport FK2-0149
transport roller HP sensor E568
roller
PS11 detects the home position of the front FK2-0149
front alignment HP sensor E537
aligning plate
PS12 detects the home position of the rear FK2-0149
rear alignment HP sensor E530
aligning plate
PS13 detects the home position of the assist FK2-0149
assist HP sensor E514
unit
PS14 stack delivery auxiliary detects the home position of the stack FK2-0149
E583
tray HP sensor delivery auxiliary tray
PS15 paper edge area 1 sensor detects paper in the area FK2-0149 E57A
PS17 handling tray paper sensor detects paper in the handling tray FK2-0149
PS18 swing motor rotation detects the rotation of the swing motor FK2-0149
sensor
PS19 shutter HP sensor detects home position of the shutter FK2-0149 E584
PS20 paddle rotation HP sensor detects the home position of the paddle FK2-0149 E577
rotation
PS21 paddle lifter HP sensor detects the home position of the paddle FK2-0149 E577
lifter operation
PS22 swing guide closed sensor detects the opening operation of the FK2-0149 E535
swing guide
PS23 swing guide open sensor detects closing operation of the swing FK2-0149 E535
guide
PS24 paper trail edge push detects the home position of the paper FK2-0149 E57B
mechanism HP sensor trail edge push mechanism
PS25 transport belt HP sensor detects the home position of the transport FK2-0149 E578
belt
PS26 upper guide HP sensor detects the home position of the upper FK2-0149 E57C
guide
PS27 stapling position HP sensor detects the home position of stapling FK2-0149
5-59
Chapter 5

PS28 stapling position sensor 1 detects stapling position FK2-0149
PS32 tray A paper sensor detects paper in tray A FK2-0149 E540
PS33 tray B paper sensor detects paper in tray B FK2-0149 E542
PS34 tray A lifter motor rotation detects lifter operation of tray A FK2-0149 E540
sensor
PS35 tray B lifer motor rotation detects lifter operation of tray B FK2-0149 E542
sensor
PS42 staple waste case full detects the state (full) of the staple waste FK2-0149
sensor case
T-5-10
Notation Shift relay PCB Transport motor driver PCB Finisher controller PCB
PS1 J117
PS2 J117
PS3 J117
PS4 J463/J461 J278/J271 J118
PS5 J279/J271 J118
PS6 J116
PS7 J116
PS8 J116
PS9 J279/J271 J118
PS11 J257/J252 J104
PS12 J256/J252 J104
PS13 J256/J252 J104
PS14 J253/J252 J104
PS15 J257/J252 J104
PS16 J256/J252 J104
PS17 J256/J252 J104
PS18 J253/J252 J104
5-60
Chapter 5
PS19 J253/J252 J104
PS20 J253/J252 J104
PS21 J253/J252 J104
PS22 J253/J252 J104
PS23 J253/J252 J104
PS24 J116
PS25 J263/J251 J104
PS26 J263/J251 J104
PS27 J114
PS28 J114
PS29 J114
PS30 J114
PS31 J114
PS32 J109
PS33 J108
PS34 J109
PS35 J108
PS42 J121
5-61
Chapter 5
5.5.2 Microswitches (Finisher Unit)

0015-2250
MSW2
MSW4
MSW6
MSW5
MSW3
SW1
MSW7
MSW1
CB1
F-5-184
5-62
Chapter 5
T-5-11
Finisher
controller PCB
MSW1 front door switch detects the state (open/closed) of the WC4-5231 1422 J101
front door
MSW2 tray approach switch detects the approach of the tray WC4-5159 E540 J101
MSW3 tray safety switch detects the tray (front) for safety WC4-5159 J111
(front)
MSW4 tray safety switch detects the tray (rear) for safety WC4-5159 J111
(rear)
MSW5 stapler safety switch detects the stapler (rear) for safety FH7-6336 J101
(front)
MSW6 stapler safety switch detects the stapler (rear) for safety FH7-6336 J101
(rear)
MSW7 swing guide safety detects the swing guide for safety FH7-6336 J113
switch
SW1 main switch FK2-1741 J103
CB1 circuit breaker FH7-7625 J103
5-63
Chapter 5
5.5.3 Solenoids (Finisher Unit)

0015-2251
SL6
SL2
SL5
SL1 SL3
SL8 SL4
F-5-185
5-64
Chapter 5
T-5-12
Notati
Name Parts No. Error
on
SL1 buffer switchover solenoid FK2-1740
SL2 upper path solenoid FK2-1740
SL3 saddle path switchover solenoid FK2-1740
SL4 assist roller 1 shift solenoid FK2-1740
SL8 handling tray solenoid FK2-1782
T-5-13
Notati Transport motor driver PCB Handling tray driver PCB Finisher controller PCB
on
SL1 J117
SL2 J117
SL3 J116
SL4 J117
SL5 J117
SL6 J279/271 J118
SL8 J259/J252 J104
5-65
Chapter 5
5.5.4 Motors (Finisher Unit)

0015-2253
M22
M23
M3
M8
M4
M2
M5 M6
M7
M16
M17
M1
M20
M25
M18
M21
M12
M15
M10
M13
M9
M14
M11
M19
F-5-186
5-66
Chapter 5
T-5-14
Notation Name Parts No. Error

M1 inlet transport motor FK2-1704
M2 shift transport motor FK2-1705
M3 pre-buffer transport motor FK2-1705
M4 buffer motor FK2-1704
M5 delivery motor FK2-1704
M6 horizontal registration detection unit shift motor FK2-1709 E566
M7 horizontal shift motor FK2-1710 E567
M8 transport roller shift motor FK2-1711 E568
M9 front alignment motor FK2-1712 E537
M10 rear alignment motor FK2-1712 E530
M11 paper edge stopper shift motor FK2-1714 E57A
M12 assist motor FK2-1715 E514
M13 stack delivery auxiliary motor FK2-1716 E57B
M14 paddle rotation motor FK2-1717 E577
M15 paddle lifter motor FK2-1718 E577
M16 paper trail edge push motor FK2-1718 E57B
M17 transport belt shift motor FK2-1718 E578
M18 swing guide motor FH6-1644 E535
M19 stack delivery motor FK2-1722
M20 upper guide motor FK2-1718 E57B
M21 stapler shift motor FK2-1724 E532
M22 tray A lifter motor FK2-1725 E540
M23 tray B lifter motor FK2-1725 E542
M25 stapler motor FM2-6541 E531
5-67
Chapter 5
T-5-15
Transport motor Handling tray Stapler driver PCB tray A motor Finisher controller
driver PCB driver PCB driver PCB/tray B PCB
Notation motor driver PCB
M1 J273/J271 J118
M2 J278/J271 J118
M3 J276/J271 J118
M4 J277/J271 J118
M5 J275/J271 J118
M6 J276/J271 J118
M7 J277/J271 J118
M8 J279/J271 J118
M9 J257/J252 J104
M10 J256/J252 J104
M11 J257/J252 J104
M12 J264/J252 J104
M13 J260/J252 J104
M14 J260/J252 J104
M15 J259/J252 J104
M16 J258/J252 J104
M17 J263/J252 J104
M18 J264/J252 J104
M19 J264/J252 J104
M20 J263/J252 J104
M21 J317/J311 J114
M22 J291/J292 J109
M23 J291/J292 J108
M25 J315/J311 J114
5-68
Chapter 5
5.5.5 Fans (Finisher Unit)

0015-2254
FM2
FM3
FM1
F-5-187
T-5-16
Notation Name Parts No. Error Finisher controller PCB
FM1 power supply fan FK2-0636 E551 J103
FM2 transport fan 1 FK2-0636 E551 J116
5-69
Chapter 5
5.5.6 PCBs (Finisher Unit)

0015-2255
UN5
UN2
UN6 UN4
UN9
UN8
UN7
F-5-188
T-5-17
Code Name Parts No. Role

UN2 Finisher controller PCB FM2-5695 Control the finisher
UN4 Intermediate processing tray driver PCB FM2-5697 Control the load on the intermediate processing tray
UN5 Feed motor driver PCB FM2-5698 Control the motor for the feed system
UN6 Staple driver PCB FM2-5699 Control the stapler
UN7 Fuse box PCB FM2-5700 Detect overcurrent
UN8 Transceiver PCB FM2-4858 Control the communication with the host machine
UN9 Optional switch PCB FM2-5719 Control the adjustment switch for service
5-70
Chapter 5
5.6 Variable Resistors (VR), Light-Emitting Diodes (LED), and Check

Pins by PCB
5.6.1 Overview
0015-2261
Of the LEDs and check pins used in the machine, those needed during servicing in the field are discussed.
Do not touch the check pins not found in the list herein. They are exclusively for factory use, and require
special tools and a high degree of accuracy.

0015-2260
F-5-189
T-5-18
Switch Switch function

SW1 Use to the upgrading
5-71
Chapter 5
5.7 Upgrading
5.7.1 Upgrading
0015-2262
Perform upgrade of this machine by connecting a copy machine.

Refer to the service manual of imagePRESS C7000 Series for a detailed procedure.
5.8 Service Tools

5.8.1 Solvents and Oils
0015-2263
T-5-19
No. Name Description Composition Remarks

1 Vic Clean Cleaning: Hydrocarbon(fluorine family) Do not bring near fire.
e.g., glass, Alcohol Procure locally.
plastic, rubber parts, Surface activating agent Isopropyl alcohol may be
external covers Water substituted.
2 Lubricant Sliding units Silicone oil MOLYKOTE EM30-L
5-72
Chapter 6
ERROR CODE

Contents
Contents
6.1 Jam Codes ......................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1.1 Jam Codes .................................................................................................................. 6-1
6.2 Error Codes........................................................................................................ 6-2
6.2.1 Error Codes................................................................................................................... 6-2

Chapter 6
6.1 Jam Codes

6.1.1 Jam Codes
T-6-1
Code Jam type Sensor Jam condition
1002 Inlet sensor delay jam PS3 In a case that the inlet sensor (PS3) does not detect a paper after the specified
time (distance) has been passed from the delivery signal reception from the
connected equipment.
1103 Inlet sensor stationary PS3 In a case that a paper does not pass through the inlet sensor (PS3) even
jam feeding it for the specified time (distance) after the sensor detects it.
1004 Shift unit sensor delay PS4 In a case that the shift unit sensor (PS4) does not detect a paper even feeding
jam it for the specified time (distance) after the inlet sensor (PS3) detects it.
1105 Shift unit sensor PS4 In a case that a paper does not pass through the shift unit sensor (PS4) even
stationary jam feeding it for the specified time (distance) after the inlet sensor (PS3) detects
it.
1006 Buffer path 1 sensor UN13 In a case that the buffer path 1 sensor (UN13) does not detect a paper even
delay jam feeding it for the specified time (distance) after the shift unit sensor (PS4)
detects it.
1107 Buffer path 1 sensor UN13 In a case that a paper does not pass through the buffer path 1 sensor (UN13)
stationary jam even feeding it for the specified time (distance) after the shift unit sensor
(PS4) detects it.
1008 Buffer path 2 sensor UN14 In a case that the buffer path 2 sensor (UN14) does not detect a paper even
delay jam feeding it for the specified time (distance) after the shift unit sensor (PS4)
detects it.
1109 Buffer path 2 sensor UN14 In a case that a paper does not pass through the buffer path 2 sensor (UN14)
stationary jam even feeding it for the specified time (distance) after the shift unit sensor
(PS4) detects it.
100A Upper delivery sensor PS5 In a case that the upper delivery sensor (PS5) does not detect a paper even
delay jam feeding it for the specified time (distance) after the buffer path 2 sensor
(UN14) detects it.
110B Upper delivery sensor PS5 In a case that a paper does not pass through the upper delivery sensor (PS5)
stationary jam even feeding it for the specified time (distance) after the buffer path 2 sensor
(UN14) detects it.
100E Lower delivery sensor PS6 In a case that the lower delivery sensor (PS6) does not detect a paper even
delay jam feeding it for the specified time (distance) after the buffer path 2 sensor
(UN14) detects it.
110F Lower delivery sensor PS6 In a case that a paper does not pass through the lower delivery sensor (PS6)
(UN14) detects it.
100C Lower path sensor UN24 In a case that lower path sensor (UN24) does not detect a paper even feeding
delay jam it for the specified time (distance) after the buffer path 2 sensor (UN14)
detects it.
110D Lower path sensor UN24 In a case that a paper does not pass through the lower path sensor (UN24)
(UN14) detects it.
1320 Residual jam (at In a case that there is a residual paper in the feeding area when turning on
power ON) the power.
1721 Residual jam (at the In a case that there is a residual paper in the feeding area during the initial
initial rotation) rotation of the host machine.
1422 Door open MSW1 In case of detecting cover opening of the front cover switch (MSW1) during
the operation.
6-1
Chapter 6
6.2 Error Codes

6.2.1 Error Codes
T-6-2
Code Detail Occurrence Description Treatment/ detection timing

code classification
- Occurrence classification
02: Finisher (including inserter, puncher, trimmer)
11: POD deck 12: Secondary POD deck
51: Stacker 52: Secondary stacker
- When turning ON the power, be sure to turn ON the power in the following order: pickup/delivery accessories ->
Main Body: Otherwise the pickup/delivery accessories are not recognized.
E500 Communication error between main unit and option
0001 02 Malfunction in communication with Turn power OFF/ ON, re-attach communication
ARCNET network cable/ terminal resistor, replace transceiver PCB.

0001 02 Data communication could not be Check connections of finisher controller PCB and DC
performed properly and failed after controller PCB connectors.
three retries. - Replace finisher controller PCB.
- Replace DC controller PCB.
E503 Communication error between finisher and options

8004 02 No communication between finisher - Check connections of connectors between finisher
and option and trimmer.
- Replace finisher controller PCB.
- Possible trimmer problem (For details, refer to the
trimmer manual.)

and inserter and trimmer.
trimmer manual.)
E505 EEPROM error

0001 02 Data malfunction in EEPROM on - Replace the EEPROM on the finisher controller
finisher controller PCB PCB.
0004 02 Response timed out - Replace finisher controller PCB.
Remove the EEPROM from the old board and mount
it on the new board. If the problem is not solved,
replace with a new EEPROM.
0007 02 Finisher controller PCB malfunction - Replace finisher controller PCB.

replace with a new EEPROM.D45
6-2
Chapter 6

code classification
E509 Software compatibility malfunction
0002 02 Boot ROM malfunction Replace the finisher controller PCB with the correct
one.
it on the new board.
0003 02 Non-supported option (professional Remove professional puncher.
puncher) connected
0004 02 Non-supported option (trimmer B-1) Connect trimmer C-1.
connected
E514 ASSIST operation error
8001 02 ASSIST HP sensor does not come - Check ASSIST HP sensor connectors.
ON within 5 sec. after ASSIST - Check ASSIST motor connectors.
motor operation begins. - Replace ASSIST HP sensor.
- Replace ASSIST motor.
8002 02 ASSIST HP sensor does not go OFF - Check ASSIST HP sensor connectors.
within 5 sec. after ASSIST motor - Check ASSIST motor connectors.
operation begins. - Replace ASSIST HP sensor.
E515 Inserter malfunction or stacker feed motor error

8001 02 Switching gear does not clear drive Check drive switching motor connectors, replace.
(Inserter) switching sensor home position after
the drive switching motor has been
running for the prescribed interval.
8002 Switching gear does not reach drive Check drive switching motor connectors, replace.
switching sensor home position after
8003 Tray A does not clear home position Check tray A lifting motor connectors, replace.
after tray A lifter motor has been
8004 Tray A lifting motor does not reach Check tray A lifting motor connectors, replace.
the home position after the lifting
motor has been running for the
prescribed interval.
8005 Tray B does not clear home position Check tray B lifting motor connectors, replace.
after tray B lifter motor has been
8006 Tray B lifting motor does not reach Check tray B lifting motor connectors, replace.
6-3
Chapter 6

code classification
E515 8007 Improper value detected for tray A Adjust tray width.
(cont width detection sensor or tray B
width detection sensor.
inue)
8010 51, 52 Offset Section DriveMotor M07 An alarm has occurred on the offset section drive
Alarm motor driver PCB A07.
E530 Rear alignment malfunction
8001 02 Rear alignment HP sensor does not - Check rear alignment HP sensor connectors.
come on after the rear alignment - Check rear alignment motor connectors.
motor has been running for 5 sec. - Replace rear alignment HP sensor.
- Replace rear alignment motor.
- Replace finisher controller.
8002 02 Rear alignment sensor does not go - Check rear alignment HP sensor connectors.
OFF within 1 sec. of rear alignment - Check rear alignment motor connectors.
motor operation starting. - Replace rear alignment HP sensor.
E531 Staple malfunction

8001 02 Staple position HP sensor does not - Check the staple unit connectors.
come ON within 500 msec. after - Replace the staple unit.
staple motor operation begins. - Check the staple unit HP sensor connectors.
- Replace the staple unit HP sensor.
- Replace the finisher unit controller PCB.E89
8002 02 Staple HP sensor does not go OFF - Check the staple unit connectors.
within 500 msec. after staple motor - Replace the staple unit.
operation begins. - Check the staple unit HP sensor connectors.
- Replace the finisher unit controller PCB.
E532 Staple slide malfunction

8001 02 Staple HP sensor does not come ON - Check the staple shift motor connectors.
within 500 msec. after staple shift - Replace the staple shift motor..
motor operation begins. - Check the staple unit HP sensor connectors.
6-4
Chapter 6

code classification
E532 8002 02 Staple HP sensor does not go OFF - Check the staple shift motor connectors.
(cont within 500 msec. after staple shift - Replace the staple shift motor..
inue) - Replace the staple unit HP sensor.
E535 Swing guide malfunction

8001 02 Swing guide open detection sensor - Check the swing guide motor connectors.
does not come ON within 2 sec. after - Replace the swing guide motor.
the swing guide motor operation - Check the swing guide open detection sensor.
begins. - Replace the swing guide open detection sensor.
- Replace the finisher controller PCB.
does not go OFF within 2 sec. after - Replace the swing guide motor.
E537 Front alignment malfunction

8001 02 Front alignment HP sensor does not - Check front alignment HP sensor connectors.
come on after the front alignment - Check front alignment motor connectors.
motor has been running for 5 sec. - Replace front alignment HP sensor.
- Replace front alignment motor.
8002 02 Front alignment sensor does not go - Check front alignment HP sensor connectors.
OFF within 5 sec. of front alignment - Check front alignment motor connectors.
motor operation starting. - Replace front alignment HP sensor.
E540 Tray A (upper tray) malfunction
8001 02 Tray A rotation detection sensor does - Check tray A rotation detection sensor connectors.
not come ON within 300ms after the - Check tray A lifter motor connectors.
tray A lifter motor operation begins. - Replace tray A rotation detection sensor.
- Replace tray A lifter motor.
8002 02 Tray A is detected at a lower position - Check tray A area sensor connectors.
than tray B. - Replace tray A area sensor.
6-5
Chapter 6

code classification
E540 8003 02 Tray approach switch faulty - Check the tray approach switch connectors.
(cont operation.. - Replace the tray approach switch.
- Replace the finisher approach PCB.
inue)
80FF 02 Tray lifting operation does not - Check the tray A rotation detection sensor
complete within 25 sec. after the tray connectors.
lifter motor operation has started. - Check the tray A lifter motor connectors.
- Replace the tray A rotation detection sensor.
- Replace the tray A lifter motor.
E542 Tray B (lower tray) malfunction
8001 02 Tray B rotation detection sensor does - Check the tray B rotation detection sensor
not come ON within 300ms after the connectors.
tray B lifter motor operation begins. - Check the tray B lifter motor connectors.
- Replace the tray B rotation detection sensor.
- Replace the tray B lifter motor.
8002 02 Tray B is detected at a higher - Check tray B area sensor connectors.
position than the intermediate - Replace tray B area sensor.
processing delivery guide. - Replace the finisher controller PCB.
80FF 02 Tray B lifting operation does not - Check the tray B rotation detection sensor
B lifter motor operation has started. - Check the tray B lifter motor connectors.
E551 Fan malfunction
8001 02 Lock signal detected after power - Check the power supply fan connectors.
supply fan has been operating for 2 - Faulty power supply fan.
sec. or longer. -Replace the finisher controller PCB.
8002 02 Lock signal detected after paper feed - Check the paper feed fan connectors.
fan has been operating for 2 sec. or - Faulty paper feed fan.
longer. -Replace the finisher controller PCB.
E566 Horizontal registration detection malfunction

8001 02 Horizontal registration sensor does - Check the side registration detection unit shift motor
not come ON within 5 sec. after side and side registration sensor connectors.
registration detection unit shift motor - Replace the side registration detection unit shift
operation has started. motor and side registration sensor.
-Replace the finisher controller PCB.
not go OFF within 5 sec. after side and side registration sensor connectors.
6-6
Chapter 6

code classification
E567 Shift roller operation malfunction
8001 02 Shift roller unit HP sensor does not - Check the side registration shift motor and shift
come ON within 5 sec. after side roller unit HP sensor connectors.
registration shift motor operation - Replace the side registration shift motor and the shift
begins. roller unit HP sensor.
go OFF within 5 sec. after side roller unit HP sensor connectors.
E568 Feed roller disengage operation malfunction

8001 02 Feed roller HP sensor does not come - Check the feed roller disengage motor and feed
ON within 5 sec. after feed roller roller HP sensor connectors.
disengage motor operation begins. - Replace the feed roller disengage motor and the feed
roller HP sensor connectors.
8002 02 Feed roller HP sensor does not go - Check the feed roller disengage motor and feed
OFF within 5 sec. after feed roller roller HP sensor connectors.
E577 Paddle rotation/ lifting operation malfunction
8001 02 Paddle rotation HP sensor does not - Check the paddle rotation motor and paddle rotation
come ON within 5 sec. after paddle HP sensor connectors.
rotation motor operation begins. - Replace the paddle rotation motor and the paddle
rotation HP sensor.
go OFF within 5 sec. after paddle HP sensor connectors.
rotation HP sensor.
8003 02 Paddle lifter HP sensor does not -Check the paddle lifter motor and paddle lifter HP
come ON within 5 sec. after the sensor connectors.
paddle lifter motor operation begins. - Replace the paddle lifter motor and the paddle lifter
HP sensor.
8004 02 Paddle lifter HP sensor does not go -Check the paddle lifter motor and paddle lifter HP
OFF within 5 sec. after the paddle sensor connectors.
lifter motor operation begins. - Replace the paddle lifter motor and the paddle lifter
HP sensor.
6-7
Chapter 6

code classification
E578 Rollette malfunction
8001 02 Feed belt HP sensor does not come - Check feed belt shift motor and feed belt HP sensor
ON within 5 sec. after feed belt shift connectors.
motor operation begins. - Replace feed belt shift motor and feed belt HP
sensor.
8002 02 Feed belt HP sensor does not go OFF - Check feed belt shift motor and feed belt HP sensor
within 5 sec. after feed belt shift connectors.
sensor.
E57A Paper edge stopper operation malfunction
8001 02 Paper edge area HP sensor does not - Check the paper edge stopper shift motor and paper
come ON within 5 sec. after paper edge area HP sensor connectors.
edge stopper motor operation begins. - Replace the paper edge stopper shift motor and
paper edge area HP sensor.
go OFF within 5 sec. after paper edge edge area HP sensor connectors.
stopper motor operation begins. - Replace the paper edge stopper shift motor and
8003 02 Paper edge stopper is obstructed by - Check paper edge stopper shift motor connectors.
stapler and cannot operate. - Replace paper edge stopper shift motor.
E57B Paper trailing edge retainer operation malfunction
8001 02 Paper trailing edge retainer HP -Check paper trailing edge retainer motor and paper
sensor does not come ON within 5 trailing edge retainer HP sensor connectors.
sec. after paper trailing edge motor -Replace paper trailing edge retainer motor and paper
operation begins trailing edge retainer HP sensor.
sensor does not come OFF within 5 trailing edge retainer HP sensor connectors.
E57C Upper guide operation malfunction

8001 02 Upper guide HP sensor does not - Check upper guide motor and upper guide HP sensor
come ON within 5 sec. after upper connectors.
guide motor operation begins. . - Replace upper guide motor and upper guide HP
sensor.
8002 02 Upper guide HP sensor does not go - Check upper guide motor and upper guide HP sensor
OFF within 5 sec. after upper guide connectors.
motor operation begins. . - Replace upper guide motor and upper guide HP
sensor.
6-8
Chapter 6

code classification
E583 Bundle delivery auxiliary tray operation malfunction
8001 02 Bundle delivery auxiliary tray HP -Check bundle delivery auxiliary tray motor and
sensor does not come ON within 5 bundle delivery auxiliary tray HP sensor connectors
sec. after bundle delivery auxiliary bundle delivery auxiliary tray motor
tray motor operation begins. -Replace bundle delivery auxiliary tray motor and
bundle delivery auxiliary tray HP sensor.
sensor does not go OFF within 5 sec. bundle delivery auxiliary tray HP sensor connectors
after bundle delivery auxiliary tray bundle delivery auxiliary tray motor
motor operation begins. -Replace bundle delivery auxiliary tray motor and
E584 Shutter malfunction

8001 02 Shutter HP sensor does not come ON -Check paddle rotation motor and shutter HP sensor
within 5 sec. after paddle rotation connectors.
motor operation begins. -Replace paddle rotation motor and shutter HP sensor
connectors.
8002 02 Shutter HP sensor does not go OFF -Check paddle rotation motor and shutter HP sensor
connectors.
E5F0 Saddle positioning plate malfunction
8001 02 Stopper HP sensor does not come - Check stopper motor and stopper HP sensor
(Saddle) ON within 5 sec. after stopper motor connectors.
operation begins. - Replace stopper motor and stopper HP sensor.
-Replace saddle stitcher controller PCB.
8002 Stopper HP sensor does not go OFF - Check stopper motor and stopper HP sensor
within 5 sec. after stopper motor connectors.
8010 51, 52 Stack tray overflow Stack tray overflow

The tray lower dead center sensor is activated during
the stack delivery.
E5F1 Saddle folding malfunction

8001 02 Fold/ feed motor rotation detection -Check fold/ feed motor and fold/ feed motor rotation
(Saddle) sensor does not come ON within 5 detection sensor connectors.
sec. after fold/ feed motor operation -Replace fold/ feed motor and fold/ feed motor
begins. rotation detection sensor.
6-9
Chapter 6

code classification
E5F2 Saddle roller guide HP sensor malfunction or saddle guide motor malfunction
8001 02 Saddle roller guide HP sensor does -Check saddle guide motor and saddle roller guide HP
not come ON within 5 sec. after sensor connectors.
saddle guide motor operation begins. -Replace saddle guide motor and saddle roller guide
HP sensor.
not go OFF within 5 sec. after saddle sensor connectors.
guide motor operation begins. -Replace saddle guide motor and saddle roller guide
HP sensor.
E5F3 Saddle alignment guide
8001 02 Saddle alignment plate HP sensor -Check saddle alignment motor and saddle alignment
does not come ON within 5 sec. after plate HP sensor connectors.
saddle alignment motor operation -Replace s saddle alignment motor and saddle
begins. alignment plate HP sensor.
does not go OFF within 5 sec. after plate HP sensor connectors.
E5F4 Saddle staple malfunction
8001 02 Saddle unit not detected in home -Check stitcher unit connectors.
position within 500 ms after saddle -Replace stitcher unit.
unit operation begins. -Replace saddle stitcher controller PCB.
8002 02 Saddle unit does not leave home -Check stitcher unit connectors.
E5F6 Saddle paper strike plate operation malfunction
8001 02 Saddle paper strike plate HP sensor -Check saddle paper strike plate motor and saddle
does not come ON within 800ms. paper strike plate HP sensor connectors.
after saddle paper strike plate motor -Replace saddle paper strike plate motor and saddle
operation begins. paper strike plate HP sensor.
does not go OFF within 300ms. after paper strike plate HP sensor connectors.
saddle paper strike plate motor -Replace saddle paper strike plate motor and saddle
6-10
Chapter 6

code classification
E5FA Saddle press malfunction
8000 02 Saddle press position sensor does not -Check saddle press motor and saddle press position
come ON within 200ms. after saddle sensor connectors.
press motor operation begins. -Replace saddle press motor and saddle press position
sensor.
-Replace stitcher controller PCB.
8001 02 Saddle press HP sensor does not -Check saddle press motor and saddle press HP sensor
come ON within 1 sec. after saddle connectors.
press motor operation begins. -Replace saddle press motor and saddle press HP
sensor.
8002 02 Saddle press HP sensor does not go -Check saddle press motor and saddle press HP sensor
OFF within 1 sec. after saddle press connectors.
motor operation begins. -Replace saddle press motor and saddle press HP
sensor.
E5FB Saddle disengage operation malfunction
8001 02 Saddle pull-in roller HP sensor does -Check saddle pull-in roller and saddle pull-in roller
not come ON within 3 sec. after HP sensor connectors.
saddle pull-in roller disengage motor -Replace saddle pull-in roller and saddle pull-in roller
operation begins. HP sensor.
not go OFF within 3 sec. after saddle HP sensor connectors.
pull-in roller disengage motor -Replace saddle pull-in roller and saddle pull-in roller
6-11
APPENDIX

1 General Circuit Diagram
List Of Signals(finisher)
T-1-1
Notation Signal name Notation Signal name Notation Signal name

ASSIST-HP-SEN assist motor home position detection signal BTRY-P-SEN tray B paper sensor detection signal FRONT-BIN-M-IHA* front door open detection signal
ASSIST-M-8FG* assist motor rotation detection signal BTRY-SHIMEN-SEN* tray B paper surface sensor detection signal FRONT-SW-OPEN staple waste case full detection signal 1
ASSIST-M-CLK assist motor clock signal BTRY-SL-ON* auxiliary tray solenoid signal HOOK-FULL-SEN inlet transport motor clock signal
ASSIST-M-CW* assist motor drive signal BUFF2-SEN* buffer No. 2 sensor detection signal INPASS-M-Clk inlet transport motor drive signal
ASSIST-M-IHA assist motor current switch signal 1 BUFF-M-Clk buffer motor clock signal INPASS-M-CW front alignment motor clock signal
ASSIST-M-ILB assist motor current switch signal 2 BUFF-M-CW buffer motor drive signal INPASS-M-IHA inlet transport motor ON signal
ASSIST-R-SL1 assist roller shift solenoid signal 1 BUFF-M-IA buffer motor current switch signal 1 INPASS-M-IHB inlet transport motor current switch signal
ATRY-M-Clk tray A lift motor clock signal BUFF-M-IB buffer motor current switch signal 2 IRIGUCHI-SEN inlet sensor detection signal
ATRY-M-CW tray A lift motor drive signal BUFF-PASS-SEN* buffer path sensor detection signal ISA-SEL paper surface sensor AD input selector signal 3
ATRY-M-IA tray A lift motor current switch signal 1 BUFF-SL-ON buffer path switch solenoid signal KOUTAN-HP-SEN trail edge pushing home position detection signal
ATRY-M-IB tray A lift motor current switch signal 2 BUNDLE-M-8FG* stack delivery motor rotation detection signal KOUTAN-M-A paper trail edge pushing motor drive signal A
ATRY-POSS-SEN1 tray A area sensor detection signal 1 BUNDLE-M-CLK stack delivery motor clock signal KOUTAN-M-B paper trail edge pushing motor drive signal B
ATRY-POSS-SEN2 tray A area sensor detection signal 2 BUNDLE-M-CW* stack delivery motor drive signal KOUTAN-M-IHA* paper trail edge pushing motor current switch signal
ATRY-POSS-SEN3 tray A area sensor detection signal 3 BUNDLE-M-IHA stack delivery motor current switch signal 1 MOTARE-SEL paper surface sensor AD input selector signal 1
ATRY-POSS-SEN4 tray A area motor detection signal 4 BUNDLE-M-IHB stack delivery motor current switch signal 2 OTRY-HP-SEN stack delivery auxiliary tray home position detection signal
ATRY-P-SEN tray A paper sensor detection signal DN-SORT-SEN lower delivery sensor detection signal OTRY-M-A stack delivery auxiliary tray motor drive signal A
ATRY-SHIMEN-SEN* tray A paper surface sensor detection signal EXP-M-CLK delivery motor clock signal OTRY-M-B stack delivery auxiliary tray motor drive signal B
BIN-DETECT-SEN1 paper edge sensor detection signal 1 EXP-M-CW delivery motor rotation direction switch signal OTRY-M-IHA* stack delivery auxiliary tray motor start-up signal
BIN-DETECT-SEN2 paper edge sensor detection signal 2 EXP-M-IHA delivery motor current switch signal 1 PASS-M-Clk pre-buffer transport motor clock signal
BJOG-HP-SEN rear alignment motor home position detection signal EXP-M-ILB delivery motor current switch signal 2 PASS-M-CW pre-buffer transport motor drive signal
BJOG-M-Clk rear alignment motor clock signal FAN-ERR power supply fan error detection signal PASS-M-FG* pre-buffer transport rotation detection signal
BJOG-M-CW* rear alignment motor drive signal FEEDROLLER-PARTM-A transport roller shift motor drive signal A PASS-M-IA pre-buffer transport motor current switch signal 1
BJOG-M-IHA* rear alignment motor current switch signal FEEDROLLER-PARTM-B transport roller shift motor drive signal B PASS-M-IB pre-buffer transport motor current switch signal 2
BTRY-ISA-SEN* tray bias sensor detection signal FEEDROLLER-PARTM-IA transport roller shift motor current switch signal 1 PDL-M-Clk paddle rotation motor clock signal
BTRY-KILL tray B disengagement signal FEEDROLLER-PARTM-IB transport roller shift motor current switch signal 2 PDL-M-CW* paddle rotation motor drive signal
BTRY-M-Clk tray B lift motor clock signal FF-M-4FG* folding/transport motor rotation detection signal PDL-M-IHA* paddle rotation motor current switch signal
BTRY-M-CW tray B lift motor drive signal FJOG-HP-SEN front alignment motor home position detection signal PDL-ROTATE-HP-SEN paddle rotation home position detection signal
BTRY-M-IA tray B lift motor current switch signal 1 FJOG-HP-SEN front alignment motor clock signal PDL-UPDOWN-HP-SEN paddle lift home position detection signal
BTRY-M-IB tray B lift motor current switch signal 2 FJOG-M-Clk front alignment motor drive signal PDL-UP-M-A paddle lift motor drive signal A
BTRY-POSS-SEN1 tray B position sensor detection signal 1 FJOG-M-CW* front alignment motor current switch signal PDL-UP-M-B paddle lift motor drive signal B
BTRY-POSS-SEN2 tray B position sensor detection signal 2 FJOG-M-IHA* paper edge stopper shift motor drive signal A PDL-UP-M-IHA* paddle lift motor current switch signal
BTRY-POSS-SEN3 tray B position sensor detection signal 3 FRONT-BIN-M-A paper edge stopper shift motor drive signal B RLT-HP-SEN transport belt shift home position detection signal
BTRY-POSS-SEN4 tray B position sensor detection signal 4 FRONT-BIN-M-B paper edge stopper shift motor current switch signal RLT-M-A transport belt shift motor drive signal A
RLT-M-B transport belt shift motor drive signal B STP-SLDM-IA stapler shift motor current switch signal

RLT-M-IHA* transport belt shift motor current switch signal STP-SLDM-IB stapler shift motor current switch signal
ROLLER-HP transport roller home position detection signal STRY-P-SEN handling tray paper detection signal
SDL-SL-ON saddle path switch solenoid signal STRY-SL-ON handling tray solenoid drive signal
SHIFT-FEED-M-CW shift transport motor drive signal SUDDLE-SUBTRAY-SEN saddle sub tray sensor detection signal
SHIFT-FEED-M-IA shift transport motor current switch signal 1 TRY-MSW* tray approach detecting switch detection signal
SHIFT-FEED-M-IB shift transport motor current switch signal 2 UP-DOOR-OPEN upper cover open detection signal
SHIFTÅ[FEED-M-CLK shift transport motor clock signal UPPASS-SL-ON* upper path switch solenoid signal
SHIFTUNIT-HP-SEN shift roller unit home position detection signal UPPERGUIDE-HP-SEN upper guide home position sensor signal
SHIFTUNIT-POST-SEN shift unit trail edge sensor detection signal UPPERGUIDE-M-A upper guide motor drive signal A
SHIMENN-SEL paper surface sensor AD input selector signal 2 UPPERGUIDE-M-B upper guide motor drive signal B
SHITAPASU-SEN lower path sensor detection signal UPPERGUIDE-M-IHA* upper guide motor current switch signal
SHUTTER-HP-SEN shutter position detection signal UP-SORT-SEN upper delivery sensor detection signal
SIDEREJI-HP horizontal registration detection unit home position de- YDG-CLS-SEN* swing guide closed detection signal
tection signal
SIDEREJI-M-A horizontal registration detection unit shift motor drive YDG-HP-SEN swing guide open detection signal
signal A
SIDEREJI-M-A* horizontal registration detection unit shift motor drive YDM-H-SPEED swing guide motor high-speed setting signal
signal A*
SIDEREJI-M-B horizontal registration detection unit shift motor drive YDM-L-SPEED swing guide motor low-speed setting signal
signal B
SIDEREJI-M-B* horizontal registration detection unit shift motor drive YDM-M-SPEED swing guide motor middle-speed setting mode
signal B*
SIDEREJI-M-IHA horizontal registration detection unit shift motor current YDM-ON* swing guide motor drive signal
switch signal 1
SIDEREJI-M-ILB horizontal registration detection unit shift motor current

switch signal 2
SIDEREJI-SEN* horizontal registration sensor detection signal
SIDEREJI-SHIFT-M-CLK horizontal registration shift motor clock signal
SIDEREJI-SHIFT-M-CW horizontal registration shift motor rotation direction

switch signal
SIDEREJI-SHIFT-M-IA horizontal registration shift motor current switch signal

1
SIDEREJI-SHIFT-M-IB horizontal registration shift motor current switch signal

2
STP-HP-SEN* stapler home position detection signal
STP-M-CCW* stapler motor direction switch signal
STP-M-CW* stapler motor drive signal
STP-SLDM-CLK stapler shift motor clock signal
STP-SLDM-CW stapler shift motor drive signal

General Circuit Diagram
General Circuit Diagram(Finisher1)
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
CB1 Leakage breaker
F F
Stapler
Transport motor driver
Power supply driver PCB PCB
SW1
Main switch
Power supply fan

E FM1 E
D D
Fuse box PCB
C C
B B
Transceiver PCB
MSW1
Front door switch
Accessories switch PCB
MSW4 MSW4
A Tray safety Tray safety A
switch (rear) switch (front)
MSW7 MSW6 MSW5
Paper folding Stapler safety Stapler safety
unit safety switch (rear) switch (front)
switch (rear) F26-7101-A501 (1/7)
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
F-1-1 3

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
F F
Finisher connector PCB
E E
D D
C C
B PS3 PS6 UN14 B

PS1 PS2 UN16 Lower delivery UN24 FM2 FM3
UN13 Inlet sensor PS8 Buffer path 2
Front door Upper cover Tray A paper Lower path transport transport
Buffer path 1 sensor
open sensor open sensor surface sensor Shift roller unit sensor sensor fan 1 fan 2
sensor (light-receiving) home position SL3
SL5 SL5 SL2 sensor saddle path
Assist roller 2 Assist roller 1 Upper path PS24 PS7 switch solenoid
shift solenoid shift solenoid switch solenoid Paper surface Horizontal
SL1
Buffer path trail edge pushing registration UN15
switch solenoid home position detection home Tray A paper
sensor position sensor surface sensor
(light-emitting)
A A
F26-7101-A502 (2/7)
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
4 F-1-2

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Inlet transport motor Delivery motor

F M1 M5 F
E E
D D
Transport motor driver PCB
C C
B UN28 B
Shift relay
PCB
PS5 PS9
Upper Transport
M8 delivery roller home
Transport sensor position
SL6
roller shift sensor
Assist 3 shift
UN26 motor
solenoid
Horizontal sensor
PS4
A M2 Shift unit trail A
M3 M6 M4
Shift edge sensor
Pre-buffer Horizontal M7 Buffer motor
transport
transport motor registration Horizontal motor
detection unit registration
shift motor shift motor
F26-7101-A503 (3/7)
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
F-1-3

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
F F
Intermediary tray driver PCB
E E
D D
C C
B B
PS14
PS21 PS22
Paddle lift Stack delivery
PS11 PS16 PS13 Swing guide
Paper edge home position auxiliary tray
Front alignment M11 Assist home closed sensor
area detection sensor home position PS20
home position Paper edge position sensor
2 sensor sensor Paddle motor
sensor stopper
PS19 home position
shift motor
Shutter home sensor
PS17 position sensor
PS15 PS12 PS23 PS18
A
Paper edge Handling tray M10 A
Rear alignment Swing guide Swing motor
Rear alignment motor
detection 1 home position paper sensor
M9 open sensor rotation sensor
sensor sensor
Front alignment motor
F26-7101-A504 (4/7)
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
F-1-4

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
F F
To INSERTER
E E
D D
C C
PCH-PEPERCOMACK
PCH-PAPEREXITACK
PCH-PANCHENABLE
TRIM-CONNECT
PCH-PAPERENTRY
PCH-CONNECTION
PCH-PAPERLATCH
TRIM-REMOTE
PCH-MACHINEON
PCH-DOOROPEN
PCH-ABNORMAL
PCH-PAPEREXIT
TRIM-OUT2
B B
TRIM-RXD
PCH-STANBY
TRIM-TXD
TRIM-IN2
PCH-RXD
PCH-TXD
GND
GND
GND
GND
+5R
M12
M18 To TRIMMER To Professional Puncher
SL8 Assist motor
Swing guide
Handling tray M15 M19 motor
solenoid M14 M13
motor Paddle rotation Stack delivery
motor auxiliary motor motor
A A
F26-7101-A505 (5/7)
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
F-1-5
7

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
F F
E E
D D
PS42
Stapler waste
case full sensor
Stapler driver PCB
C C
PS30 PS28
B Stapler Stapler B
Stapler unit position position
sensor 3 sensor 1
PS31 PS29 PS27
UN17 UN18 M25 Stapler stapler
Stapler motor Stapler
Tray B paper tray B paper position position home position
M21
surface sensor surface sensor sensor 4 sensor 2 sensor
(light-emitting) (light-receiving) Stapler shift
motor
PS26
A Upper guide A
home position
sensor PS25
M16
Paper trail Transport belt M17 M20
edge retaining Transport belt Upper guide
home position
motor shift motor motor
sensor F26-7101-A506 (6/7)
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
F-1-6
8

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
F F
E E
D D
Tray A motor Tray B motor

driver PCB driver PCB
C C
PS33 PS35
MSW2 PS32 PS34 Tray B Tray B
Tray approach Tray A paper tray A lift lift motor lift motor SL9
switch sensor motor rotation rotation Auxiliary tray
sensor sensor solenoid
M23
M22
Tray B
Tray A
B lift motor B
lift motor Tray A area
sensor PCB Tray A area
sensor PCB
A A
F26-7101-A507 (7/7)
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
F-1-7
9

Saddle
Finisher-AB2
SERVICE
MANUAL
MAY 2007
REV. 0
COPYRIGHT 2007 CANON INC. CANON Saddle Finisher-AB2 REV. 0 PRINTED IN U.S.A.

Application
This manual has been issued by Canon Inc. for qualified persons to learn technical theory, installation,
maintenance, and repair of products. This manual covers all localities where the products are sold. For this reason,
there may be information in this manual that does not apply to your locality.
Corrections
This manual may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors due to improvements or changes in
products. When changes occur in applicable products or in the contents of this manual, Canon will release technical
information as the need arises. In the event of major changes in the contents of this manual over a long or short
period, Canon will issue a new edition of this manual.
The following paragraph does not apply to any countries where such provisions are inconsistent with local law.
Trademarks
The product names and company names used in this manual are the registered trademarks of the individual
companies.
Copyright
This manual is copyrighted with all rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this manual may not be copied,
reproduced or translated into another language, in whole or in part, without the written consent of Canon Inc.
COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC.

Printed in Japan
Caution
Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to avoid disclosure of confidential information.

Introduction
Symbols Used
This documentation uses the following symbols to indicate special information:
Symbol Description
Indicates an item of a non-specific nature, possibly classified as Note, Caution, or

Warning.
Indicates an item requiring care to avoid electric shocks.
Indicates an item requiring care to avoid combustion (fire).
Indicates an item prohibiting disassembly to avoid electric shocks or problems.
Indicates an item requiring disconnection of the power plug from the electric outlet.
Indicates an item intended to provide notes assisting the understanding of the topic in
question.
Memo
Indicates an item of reference assisting the understanding of the topic in question.

REF.
Provides a description of a service mode.
Provides a description of the nature of an error indication.

Introduction
The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual:

1. Each chapter contains sections explaining the purpose of specific functions and the relationship between elec-
trical and mechanical systems with reference to the timing of operation.
In the diagrams, represents the path of mechanical drive; where a signal name accompanies the
symbol, the arrow indicates the direction of the electric signal.
The expression "turn on the power" means flipping on the power switch, closing the front door, and closing
the delivery unit door, which results in supplying the machine with power.
2. In the digital circuits, '1'is used to indicate that the voltage level of a given signal is "High", while '0' is used
to indicate "Low".(The voltage value, however, differs from circuit to circuit.) In addition, the asterisk (*) as
in "DRMD*" indicates that the DRMD signal goes on when '0'.
In practically all cases, the internal mechanisms of a microprocessor cannot be checked in the field.
Therefore, the operations of the microprocessors used in the machines are not discussed: they are explained
in terms of from sensors to the input of the DC controller PCB and from the output of the DC controller PCB
to the loads.
The descriptions in this Service Manual are subject to change without notice for product improvement or other
purposes, and major changes will be communicated in the form of Service Information bulletins.
All service persons are expected to have a good understanding of the contents of this Service Manual and all
relevant Service Information bulletins and be able to identify and isolate faults in the machine."

Contents
Contents
Chapter 1 Specifications
1.1 Product Specifications...................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.1 Specifications (finisher) ............................................................................................. 1-1
1.1.2 Specifications (saddle finisher) ................................................................................ 1-4
1.2 Names of Parts.................................................................................................. 1-5
1.2.1 External View.............................................................................................................. 1-5
1.2.2 Cross Section ............................................................................................................. 1-6
Chapter 2 Installation
2.2.5 After Installation.......................................................................................................... 2-8
2.4.1 Affixing Labels .......................................................................................................... 2-14
Chapter 3 Functions
3.1.1 Overview...................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.2.1 Overview...................................................................................................................... 3-2
3.2.3 Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB ............................................................................... 3-4
3.3 Stacking Unit...................................................................................................... 3-5
3.3.1 Overview...................................................................................................................... 3-5

Contents
3.3.4 Tray Paper Surface Detection................................................................................. 3-8

3.4 Feeding Unit ....................................................................................................... 3-9
3.4.1 Overview..................................................................................................................... 3-9
3.4.3 Horizontal Registration Detection ......................................................................... 3-13
3.4.4 Horizontal Registration Correction/Alignment Operation .................................. 3-15
3.4.5 Buffer Operation ...................................................................................................... 3-18
3.4.6 Switching Over the Paper Path............................................................................. 3-20
3.5 Intermediate Process Tray Assembly........................................................... 3-21
3.5.1 Overview................................................................................................................... 3-21
3.5.3 Stacking Operation ................................................................................................. 3-25
3.5.4 Alignment.................................................................................................................. 3-29
3.5.5 Stapling Operation .................................................................................................. 3-31
3.5.6 Delivery Operation .................................................................................................. 3-33
3.6 Saddle Stitcher Unit......................................................................................... 3-34
3.6.1 Overview................................................................................................................... 3-34
3.6.3 Transport .................................................................................................................. 3-38
3.6.4 Alignment.................................................................................................................. 3-40
3.6.5 Stitching .................................................................................................................... 3-43
3.6.6 Folding/Delivery....................................................................................................... 3-44
3.7 Detecting Jams................................................................................................. 3-47
3.7.1 Jam Detection in the Finisher Assembly ............................................................. 3-47
3.7.2 Jam Detection in the Stitcher Assembly .............................................................. 3-49
3.8 Power Supply ................................................................................................... 3-51
3.8.1 Overview................................................................................................................... 3-51
Chapter 4 Parts Replacement Procedure

4.1 Removing from the Host Machine................................................................... 4-1
4.1.1 Finisher Assembly ..................................................................................................... 4-1
4.2 External Covers.................................................................................................. 4-2
4.2.1 Rear Lower Cover ..................................................................................................... 4-2
4.2.2 Rear Upper Cover ..................................................................................................... 4-2
4.2.3 Upper Cover Unit ...................................................................................................... 4-3
4.2.4 Delivery Tray .............................................................................................................. 4-4
4.2.5 Stack Wall (Upper) .................................................................................................... 4-5
4.2.6 Stack Wall (Lower) .................................................................................................... 4-5
4.2.7 Saddle Inside Cover ................................................................................................. 4-6
4.2.8 Rear Middle Cover .................................................................................................... 4-7

Contents

4.2.10 Inside Cover (Lower) ...............................................................................................4-7
4.3 Drive System...................................................................................................... 4-8
4.3.1 Staple Unit ...................................................................................................................4-8
4.3.2 Saddle Staple Unit .....................................................................................................4-8
4.3.4 Rear Alignment Motor .............................................................................................4-10
4.3.5 Tray Shift Motor ........................................................................................................4-12
4.3.6 Shift Motor .................................................................................................................4-13
4.3.7 Positioning Plate Unit ..............................................................................................4-17
4.4.1 Engaging Roller ........................................................................................................4-20
4.4.4 Process Tray .............................................................................................................4-24
4.4.5 Feed Belt ...................................................................................................................4-25
4.4.6 Paddle Unit ................................................................................................................4-27
4.4.7 Paddle ........................................................................................................................4-27
4.4.8 Tray Unit ....................................................................................................................4-27
4.4.9 Saddle Unit ................................................................................................................4-31
4.4.10 No.1 Flapper ...........................................................................................................4-33
4.4.11 No.2 Flapper ...........................................................................................................4-35
4.4.12 Thrust Unit ...............................................................................................................4-35
4.4.13 Thrust Plate .............................................................................................................4-36
4.4.14 Pressing Unit ..........................................................................................................4-37
4.4.15 Pressing Roller Unit ...............................................................................................4-40
4.4.16 Folding Roller ..........................................................................................................4-43
Chapter 5 Maintenance
5.1.2 User Maintenance Item (saddle stitcher) ............................................................... 5-1

Contents
5.2.1.2 Periodically Replaced Parts in the Saddle Finisher........................................................ 5-2

5.2.2 Durables ..................................................................................................................... 5-2
5.2.2.2 Durables in the Saddle Stitcher ......................................................................................... 5-3
5.2.3 Periodical Servicing .................................................................................................. 5-3
5.2.3.2 Scheduled Servicing for the Saddle Stitcher ................................................................... 5-3
5.3 Adjustment .......................................................................................................... 5-4
5.3.1 Basic Adjustment ...................................................................................................... 5-4
5.3.1.1 Adjusting the Height............................................................................................................. 5-4
5.3.1.2 Adjusting the Horizontal Registration/Angle .................................................................... 5-7
5.3.1.3 Adjusting the Sensor Intensity ......................................................................................... 5-10
5.3.2 Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement ......................................................... 5-11
5.3.2.1 Adjusting the Tray A/B Position ....................................................................................... 5-11
5.3.2.2 Adjusting the Angle of the Aligning Plate (orthogonal)................................................. 5-12
5.3.2.4 Adjusting the Speed of the Swing Guide........................................................................ 5-14
5.3.2.5 Adjusting the Aligning Plate Width .................................................................................. 5-15
5.3.2.6 Adjusting the Transport Belt Position.............................................................................. 5-17
5.3.2.8 Adjusting the Stapling Position (front 1-point) ............................................................... 5-21
5.3.2.9 Adjusting the Stapling Position (2-point) ........................................................................ 5-24
5.3.2.10 Adjusting the Delivery of Stapled Stacks (lower delivery) ......................................... 5-26
5.3.2.11 Adjusting the Delivery of Stapled Stacks (saddle delivery) ....................................... 5-29
5.3.2.12 Adjusting the Saddle Binding Position .......................................................................... 5-32
5.3.2.13 Adjusting the Saddle Folding Position .......................................................................... 5-34
5.3.2.14 Adjusting the Saddle Lead Edge Stopper Position..................................................... 5-36
5.3.2.15 Adjusting the Saddle Alignment Reference ................................................................. 5-36
38
5.3.2.17 Bufferless mode 1 ............................................................................................................ 5-39
5.3.2.18 Bufferless mode 2 ............................................................................................................ 5-40
5.3.2.19 Assist stopper position adjustment................................................................................ 5-41
5.3.3 Other ......................................................................................................................... 5-63

Contents
5.4 Troubleshooting............................................................................................... 5-66

5.4.1 Malfunction ................................................................................................................5-66
5.5 Outline of Electrical Components ................................................................. 5-68
5.5.1 Sensors (Finisher Unit) ........................................................................................... 5-68
5.5.2 Microswitches (Finisher Unit) ................................................................................. 5-72
5.5.3 Solenoids (Finisher Unit)......................................................................................... 5-74
5.5.4 Motors (Finisher Unit).............................................................................................. 5-76
5.5.5 Fans (Finisher Unit) ................................................................................................. 5-79
5.5.6 PCBs (Finisher Unit)................................................................................................ 5-80
5.5.7 Sensors (Saddle Stitcher Unit)............................................................................... 5-81
5.5.8 Motors (Saddle Stitcher Unit) ................................................................................. 5-84
5.5.9 Solenoids(Saddle Stitcher Unit)............................................................................. 5-86
5.5.10 PCBs (Saddle Stitcher Unit) ................................................................................. 5-87
5-88
5.6.1 Overview.................................................................................................................... 5-88
5.6.2 Finisher Controller PCB .......................................................................................... 5-88
5.7 Upgrading ......................................................................................................... 5-88
5.7.1 Upgrading.................................................................................................................. 5-88
5.8 Service Tools ................................................................................................... 5-89
5.8.1 Solvents and Oils ..................................................................................................... 5-89
Chapter 6 Error Code

6.1 Jam Codes ......................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1.1 Jam Codes .................................................................................................................. 6-1
6.2 Error Codes........................................................................................................ 6-2
6.2.1 Error Codes................................................................................................................... 6-2

Chapter 1
SPECIFICATIONS

Contents
Contents
1.1 Product Specifications .......................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.1 Specifications (finisher).................................................................................................1-1
1.1.2 Specifications (saddle finisher)......................................................................................1-4
1.2 Names of Parts ...................................................................................................... 1-5
1.2.1 External View ................................................................................................................1-5
1.2.2 Cross Section .................................................................................................................1-6

Chapter 1
1.1 Product Specifications

1.1.1 Specifications (finisher)
0015-2057
T-1-1
Stacking mechanism tray A/B by tray lift
Stacking orientation tray A face-down/face-up
tray B face-down
Stack size tray A A3,A4,A4R,A5R,B4,B5,B5R,Jpn postcard in feed direction, 182 to

R,279.4mmx432.8mm(11x17),LGL,LTR,EXE,LTRR,S 487.7 mm; in cross-
TMTR,EXER feed direction,139.7 to
320.2 mm
tray B A3,A4,A4R,B4,B5,B5R,279.4mmx432.8mm(11x17),L in feed direction, 182 to
GL,LTR,EXE,LTRR,EXER 457.2 mm; in cross-
feed direction, 182 to
304.8mm
Types of Paper Plain paper (64g/m2 to 90g/m2), Heavy paper (91 g/m2 to 200 g/m2),
Recycled paper, Colored paper, Postcard, Label, Index paper, Tracing
paper, 3-hole paper.
Number of trays 2
Mode type non-staple, staple
Number of sheets (Note 1) non-staple tray A: if small-/large-size, equivalent of 1000 in multiple mode, the
sort sheets(147 mm in height) number of sheets are as
follows:
if small-size,
equivalent of 3000
sheets (423 mm in
height); if large-size,
1500 sheets (216 mm in
height)
tray B: if small-size, equivalent of 2000 sheets (285mm
in height),if large-size, equivalent of 1000 sheets(147
mm in height)
staple sort tray A: if small-/large-size, equivalent of 1000 sheets
(147 mm in height), or 100 sets
tray B: if small-size, equivalent of 2000 sheets (285 mm
in height), or 100 sets; if large-size, equivalent of 1000
sheets (147 mm in height), or 100 sets
Staple/non-staple mix (Note if small-size, equivalent of 200 sets (285 m in height), or 100 sets; if applicable to tray B
1) large-size, equivalent of 100 sheets(9147 mm in height), or 100 sets only
Folded sheet mix (Note 1) tray A: 10 folded sheets max. per set/20 folded sheets max. per job
tray B: 10 folded sheets max. per set/30 folded sheets max. per job
1-1
Chapter 1
Stapling method stapling by rotating cam
Stapled stack if small-size, 100 sheets as converted with

reference to paper of
if large-size, 50 sheets 80g/m2
1: The number of sheets refers to the result of conversion based on paper of 80g/m2
2: A sheet of paper may be grouped into the following:
-large-size; A3,B4,279.4mmx432.8mm(11x17),LGL
-small-size; A4,A5,B5,EXE,LTR,STMT,postcard,A4R,B5R,LTRR
T-1-2
Staple accommodation in special staple cartridge (5000 staples)
Detection of staples yes an alert condition

identified at 0 to 40
staples
Manual stapling no
Stack size front 1-point
A3,A4,A4R,B4,B5,279.4mmx432.8mm(11x17),EXE,
LGL,LTR,LTRR
rear 1-point
LGL,LTR,LTRR
2-point
LGL,LTR,LTRR
Paper detection yes
Control panel no
Display no
1-2
Chapter 1
Dimensions W:800xD:786xH:1180mm
Power supply 100V,200-240V
Maximum power consumption 360 W or less
Staple Position
1-Point Stapling (front)
45 30
5 2.0 5 2.0
5 2.0
5 2.0
1-Point Stapling (rear)
45 30
5 2.0 5 2.0
5 2.0
5 2.0
2-Point Stapling
A3, A4 B4, B5 11"x17", LTR
82.7 4.0 62.7 4.0 73.7 4.0

5 2.0
5 2.0
5 2.0
202.7 4.0 182.7 4.0 193.7 4.0
1-3
Chapter 1
1.1.2 Specifications (saddle finisher)

0015-2059
T-1-3
Item Specifications Remarks
Stapling method middle stapling, double-folding
Paper size A3/A4R/B4/279.4mmx432.8mm/11×17/LGL/LTRR
Stack 2 to 20 sheets including 1 cover
Types of Paper Plain paper ((64g/m2 to 90g/m2), Heavy paper (91 g/m2 to 105
g/m2), Recycled paper, Colored paper.
Number of sets no limit (free fall)
Stapling position 2 points (middle-side adjusted; fixed interval)
Cartridge capacity 2000 staples
Staple replenishment Special cartridge
Staple type special staple
Folding method by roller (under pressure)
Folding mode in half
Folding position middle
Staple detection yes
Dimensions W:800×D:786×H:1180mm
Power supply from finisher
Staple and Folding Positions
Paper Size L1 L2 L3
A3 88.5 208.5 210
B4 68.5 188.5 182
Stample position
A4R 45 165 148.5
11"x17" 79.7 199.7 216
Folding position
L3 1.0mm
LGL 48 168 177.8

LTRR 48 168 139.7
L1 2.0mm
L2 2.0mm
Stack front edge
1-4
Chapter 1
1.2 Names of Parts

1.2.1 External View
0015-2061
[6]
[2] [3]
[1]
[4]
[8]
[5]
[7]
F-1-1
[1]Tray B [5]Saddle delivery belt
[2]Tray A [6]Upper cover
[3]Top delivery outlet [7]Inlet transport unit
[4]Bottom delivery outlet [8]Front cover
1-5
Chapter 1
1.2.2 Cross Section

0015-2063
[7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[5]
[6] [16]
[4] [17]
[3] [18]
[2]
[1] [19]
[20]
[28]
[21]
[22]
[27] [26] [25] [24] [23]
F-1-2
[1]Transport belt [11]Buffer roller 3 [20]Stapler

[2]Stack delivery roller [12]Transport roller [21]Stitcher
[3]Swing guide [13]Buffer roller 1 [22]Paper retaining plate
[4]Paddle [14]Assist roller 2 [23]Folding roller
[5]Tray B [15]Shift roller 2 [24]Stack transport roller
[6]Stack transport roller [16]Shift roller 1 [25]Pressing front roller
[7]Tray A [17]Assist roller 1 [26]Pressing unit
[8]Delivery roller [18]Inlet transport roller [27]Saddle delivery belt
[9]Buffer roller 2 [19]Saddle inlet transport roller [28]Waste staple case
[10]Assist roller 3
1-6
Chapter 2
INSTALLATION

Contents
Contents
2.2.5 After Installation.......................................................................................................... 2-8
2.4.1 Affixing Labels .......................................................................................................... 2-14

Chapter 2
2.1 Making Pre-Checks

2.1.1 Checking the Contents
0016-0898
[5] [6] [7] [9] [10]
[3]
[9]
[1] 1
[8]
[4]
[2] [9]
[9]
M_ _ ________ ___ _________ ___________ __ _____ ____________. M_ _ ________ ___ _________ ___________ __ _____ ____________.
P_ _ ______ ___ __________ _____ ____________ ___ _____________. P_ _ ______ ___ __________ _____ ____________ ___ _____________.
J_ ____ ____________ ___ ________ _____ ___ _______ _____________ _________. J_ ____ ____________ ___ ________ _____ ___ _______ _____________ _________.
P____ ___ ________ __ __ _________ _____ ___ ___________ ___ __________. P____ ___ ________ __ __ _________ _____ ___ ___________ ___ __________.
P_______ _______ ____ _____ _ ________ ____ ______________. P_______ _______ ____ _____ _ ________ ____ ______________.
P___ ___ ________ __ _____ ___________ ___ _____ __ _____________. P___ ___ ________ __ _____ ___________ ___ _____ __ _____________.
_______________________________. _______________________________.
_______________________________. _______________________________.
_____________________________________. _____________________________________.
___________________________________________. ___________________________________________.
FU5-8941 FU5-8941
[11] 2 [12] 3 [13] [14] 3 [15]
[17] [18] 3
[16] 4 [19] 5
F-2-1
2-1
Chapter 2
[1]*1 Finisher 1pc [2] Latch plate (for front) 1pc

[3] Latch plate (for rear) 1pc [4] Positioning Pin 1pc
[5] ARCNET cable 1pc [6] coaxial connector 1pc
[7] Shunt Cable 1pc [8] Wire Saddle 1pc
[9] Screws (RS tight; M4X10) 10pc [10] Screw (Bind; M4X8) 1pc
[11]*2 Guide map label 1pc [12]*3 Guide map label 1pc
[13] Staple label 1pc [14]*3 LED Lamp Label 1pc

(products for China, Korea
and Taiwan)
[15] jam removal label 1pc [16]*4 Power Cable 3pc
[17] Staple cartridge 3pc [18]*3 Saddle staple cartridge 2pc
[19]*5 Sheet, FCC Class A 1pc
*1: The figure shows Saddle Finisher AB2.

*2: Included only for Finisher AB1.
*3: Included only for Saddle Finisher AB2.
*4: Perform only for EUR. Use the appropriate power code for relevant country/area. Bring back unused
power codes.
*5: Included only for UL.
2-2
Chapter 2
2.2 Installation Procedure 2.2.2 Before Installing Finisher

0016-0901
2.2.1 Points to Note When Turning 1) Open the front cover of the finisher.
2) Remove 1 screw [2] from the front latch retainer
ON/OFF the power of Host [1].
Machine
0016-5236

are Connected
Be sure to turn on the power in the correct order [1]
otherwise it may cause an error because the host
machine fails to recognize accessories
including this equipment.
[2]
<Power-On Order>
1) Accessories (accessories including this F-2-2
equipment)
3) Detach the rear small cover [1].
2) Host machine - 4 screws [2]
MEMO:
There is no power-on order among accessories [2]

Main Power of the Host Machine
Be sure to turn off the main power in the [1]
following order to protect hard disk of the
host machine.
1) Press the power switch on control panel for
3 sec or more. [2]
4) Disconnect the power plug. F-2-3
2-3
Chapter 2
4) Remove 1 screw [1] on the rear latch retainer and

pull the hinge [2] forward and downward.
R
[2] [1]
[2] [1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
[3]
F-2-5
2) Fit the positioning pin [1].

F-2-4 - 2 screws (RS tight; M4X10) [2]
2.2.3 Connecting with Machine
0016-0903
Check the power on the host machine is surely [1]

turned off and the power supply cable is [2]
unplugged.
1) Sub-Station Upper Left Cover [1] and rear [2]

latch plates.
F-2-6
- 4 screws (RS tight; M4X10) [3]

when attaching.
Front [1]: F
Rear [2]: R
2-4
Chapter 2
3) While lifting up the front latch plate [1], fit the

positioning pin on the machine side [2] to the
finisher's positioning hole [3]. Connect the
finisher with the machine.
<Front side>
[1]
[2]
[1] F-2-9
F-2-7
5) Shut the front cover of the finisher.
<Rear side> it.
[1] [2]
[2] [3]
F-2-8
4) Fix the front latch retainer.

F-2-10
2-5
Chapter 2
7) Attach the rear small cover. 1) Attach the front [1] and rear [2] latch plates to the
8) Remove 1 screw [1] on the rear lower cover of the left side of the high-capacity stacker.
finisher. - 4 screws (RS tight; M4X10)
Confirm the mark engraved on each latch

plate when attaching.
Front [1]: F
Rear [2]: R
[1]
F-2-11
9) Connect the shunt cable [1]. R

- 1 screw (User the ones removed in step 8).
- 1 screw (Use the included screw for the
finisher.)
[2] [1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
[2]
F-2-12
2.2.4 Connecting with High-Capacity [3] [1]

Stacker F-2-13
0016-0904
Check the power on the host machine is surely

turned off and the power supply cable is
unplugged.
2-6
Chapter 2
2) Fit the positioning pin [1] of the high-capacity <Rear side>

stacker to the position [A].
- 2 screws [2]
[A]
[2] [3]
[1] F-2-16
[2]
4) Fix the front latch plate (front) [1].
F-2-14
3) While lifting up the front latch support [1], fit the

positioning pin [2] of the high-capacity stacker to
the positioning plate hole [3] on the finisher for
connection.
<Front side>
[1]
[2]
F-2-17
[1]
F-2-15
2-7
Chapter 2

it.
[1] [2]
[1]
[3] [2]
F-2-20
10) See "After Installation" to connect the ARCNET

cable to the high-capacity stacker and the
finisher.
2.2.5 After Installation
0016-0907
1) Free the terminal connector [1] from the sub

F-2-18 station.
7) Attach the rear small cover.

8) Remove 1 screw [1] on the rear lower cover of the [1]
finisher.
F-2-21
[1]
F-2-19
9) Connect the shunt cable [1].

- 1 screw (Use the ones removed in step 8.)
- 1 screw (Use the included screw for the high-
capacity stacker.)
2-8
Chapter 2

at sub station, and then turn the finger grip [3] in
the direction of the arrow to connect.
Be sure to turn off the host machine and unplug the

[3] power supply cable when connecting the ARCNET
[1] cable.
[2]
[2]
[3]
[1]
F-2-22
Rotate the ARCNET cable until they are fully

fixed, or the electrical contact can be unstable.
3) Put the end terminal connector [2] and the

ARCNET cable [3] to the coaxial connector [1], F-2-24
and turn each of then in the direction of the arrow
to connect. 5) Attach the wire saddle [1] to the rear lower cover
of the finisher to bundle the signal cable [2] on it.
[1]
[2] [1]
[3]
[2]
F-2-23

at finisher, and then turn the finger grip [3] in the
direction of the arrow to connect.
F-2-25
2-9
Chapter 2
6) Connect the power supply plug of the finisher.

(Perform only for EUR)
[1]
After setting the connection sequence, the host
machine should be turned off and on to enable the
setting.
F-2-26 Power-On Order for Turning On the

7) For Finisher /Saddle Finisher , connect the power
supply cable to the host machine. (Perform only are Connected
for EUR) Be sure to turn on the power in the correct
- 1 screw (bind; M4X8) [2]
order otherwise it may cause an error because
[2] the host machine fails to recognize accessories
including this equipment.
[1]
<Power-On Order>
1) Accessories (accessories including this
equipment)
2) Host machine
MEMO:
There is no power-on order among accessories
F-2-27
8) Plug the power supply cable of the machine in the

power outlet.
9) Turn on the power switch on the finisher, and then
turn on the host machine. Points to Note When Turning Off the
10) Enter the service mode and set the connection Main Power of the Host Machine
sequence. Be sure to turn off the main power in the
Choose the item with "Finisher" displayed from
COPIER>OPTION>ACCPST-D>ACC1 to 8 to following order to protect hard disk of the
enter the connection sequence of the finisher. host machine.
1) Press the power switch on control panel
MEMO: for 3 sec or more.
When connecting to the host machine directly, enter 2) Follow the instruction on the shutdown
"1" and press "OK". sequence screen (the main power switch will
11) Follow the shutdown sequence to turn off the

power switch of the host machine/finisher.
12) Turn on the power switch of the finisher and then
that of the host machine.
2-10
Chapter 2
2.3 Making Adjustments 2) If the difference exceeds 2mm, adjust the height.
2.3.1 Height Adjustment

0016-1444
Depending on the floor condition of an installation Adjust the height with 4 casters [1] as shown
site, you should adjust the height of the finisher. If in the figure.
not properly adjusted, paper might be jammed more
frequently in the feeder assembly. Follow the steps
below to adjust the height when it is necessary.
1. 1. Checking the height

1) Check the height of the finisher and the main
station. The height difference between the right
top of the finisher [1] and the left top of the main
station [2] should be within 2mm.
[1]
[1] [2]
[1]
F-2-28 2. Height adjustment

1) Disconnect the finisher from the main station.
2) Remove the wrench [1] from the finisher front
cover.
- 1 screw [2]
[1]
[2]
F-2-29
2-11
Chapter 2
3) For Finisher AB1, detach the caster front cover.

- 1 screw [2] [1]
[1]
[2]
F-2-32
[2]
6) Measure the height [A] from the floor to the
F-2-30 bottom of the machine to check the figure is in the
range of 84.6+ -0.5mm.
4) For Saddle Finisher, detach the saddle inner cover
(lower) [1].
- 1 screw [2]
- 1 knob [3]
- 3 screws [4]
[A]
84.6 0.5mm
[1]
F-2-33
[4] 7) Loosen the fixing nut [1] with the wrench [2] in
[2] [3] [4]
F-2-31 [1]
5) Detach 2 caster covers [1] on the left side of the

equipment. (Figure shows Saddle Finisher.)
- 2 screws [2]
[A]
[2]
F-2-34
2-12
Chapter 2
9) Tighten the fixing nut [1] in the direction of [B].
[1]
When loosening the fixing nut on the front
caster of the saddle finisher, insert the wrench
[B]
[3] into the opening just below the saddle
bottom plate [2].
[1]
F-2-36
10) Repeat the steps above to adjust the height of

other 3 casters.
11) Connect the finisher to the host machine again to
[3] check the height.
Attach the cover and other parts removed in the
previous steps if the height difference is in the
tolerable range. If not, repeat the steps above to
[2] readjust the height.
8) Rotate the adjusting bolt [1] with the wrench

(small) [2] to adjust the height in the range of
84.6+ -0.5mm.
- To increase the height: rotate in the direction of
[A]
- To lower the height: rotate in the direction of [B]
(Height change per rotation: approx. 1.75 mm)
[1]
[A]
[B]
[2]
F-2-35
2-13
Chapter 2
2.4 Attaching the Labels etc.

2.4.1 Affixing Labels
0016-1445
1) Open the front cover of the finisher.

2) Affix the Guide map label [1] to the inside of the
front cover. (Figure shows the saddle finisher).
[1]
[2]
F-2-39
M_ _ ________ ___ _________ ___________ __ _____ ____________. 5) Open the upper cover to pull the shift guide [1] to
P_ _ ______ ___ __________ _____ ____________ ___ _____________.
J_ ____ ____________ ___ ________ _____ ___ _______ _____________ _________.
P____ ___ ________ __ __ _________ _____ ___ ___________ ___ __________.
P_______ _______ ____ _____ _ ________ ____ ______________.
P___ ___ ________ __ _____ ___________ ___ _____ __ _____________.
_______________________________.
_______________________________.
_____________________________________.
___________________________________________.
FU5-8941
[1]
F-2-37
[A]
3) Affix the Staple label [1] to the inside of the front
cover.
[1]
F-2-40
[1]
F-2-38
4) For Saddle Finisher AB2 (product for China,

Korea and Taiwan), affix the LED lamp label [2]
on the label [1] found in the saddle lower inner
cover.
2-14
Chapter 2
6) Affix the jam removal label [2] in the local

language on the position of [A] on the shift guide.
[1]
[2]
[2]
[A]
F-2-41
7) Attach the parts removed in the previous steps in

the following order.
- The shift guide
- upper cover
2-15
Chapter 3
FUNCTIONS

Contents
Contents
3.1.1 Overview...................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.2.1 Overview...................................................................................................................... 3-2
3.2.3 Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB ............................................................................... 3-4
3.3 Stacking Unit...................................................................................................... 3-5
3.3.1 Overview...................................................................................................................... 3-5
3.4 Feeding Unit....................................................................................................... 3-9
3.4.1 Overview...................................................................................................................... 3-9
3.4.3 Horizontal Registration Detection.......................................................................... 3-13
3.4.4 Horizontal Registration Correction/Alignment Operation................................... 3-15
3.4.5 Buffer Operation ....................................................................................................... 3-18
3.4.6 Switching Over the Paper Path.............................................................................. 3-20
3.5 Intermediate Process Tray Assembly .......................................................... 3-21
3.5.1 Overview.................................................................................................................... 3-21
3.5.3 Stacking Operation .................................................................................................. 3-25
3.5.4 Alignment................................................................................................................... 3-29
3.5.5 Stapling Operation ................................................................................................... 3-31
3.5.6 Delivery Operation ................................................................................................... 3-33
3.6 Saddle Stitcher Unit ........................................................................................ 3-34
3.6.1 Overview.................................................................................................................... 3-34
3.6.3 Transport ................................................................................................................... 3-38
3.6.4 Alignment................................................................................................................... 3-40
3.6.5 Stitching ..................................................................................................................... 3-43
3.6.6 Folding/Delivery........................................................................................................ 3-44
3.7 Detecting Jams................................................................................................ 3-47
3.7.1 Jam Detection in the Finisher Assembly .............................................................. 3-47
3.7.2 Jam Detection in the Stitcher Assembly............................................................... 3-49
3.8 Power Supply................................................................................................... 3-51

Contents
3.8.1 Overview................................................................................................................... 3-51


Chapter 3
3.1 Basic Construction

3.1.1 Overview
0015-2067
The machine consists of the following 5 blocks: electrical control block, stacking block, transport block,
intermediary tray, and saddle stitcher block (Note).
Electrical control block
Transport
Stacking block block
To host machine
Intermediary
tray block
Saddle stitcher block
F-3-1
The descriptions on the saddle stitcher block apply to the Saddle Finisher AB2.
3-1
Chapter 3
3.2 Electrical Control Unit

3.2.1 Overview
0015-2068
The electrical control block governs all the control mechanisms of the machine, i.e., stacking block, transport
block, intermediary tray block, and saddle stitcher block.
The electrical control block consists of 2 entities: finisher controller PCB and saddle stitcher controller PCB
(Note). The following is a block diagram of the machine's electrical control block, each serving the functions
described:
Electrical
control block Stacking block
Finisher
controller PCB Transport block
To host machine
Intermediary
Saddle stitcher tray block
controller PCB
Saddle stitcher
block
F-3-2
The descriptions on the saddle stitcher controller PCB apply to the Saddle Finisher AB2.
3-2
Chapter 3

0015-2069
The finisher controller PCB drives the various loads (motors, solenoids) of the machine in response to the
commands from the host machine (copier), and indicates the states of the sensors and switches to the host
machine.
It also serves to control the punch unit and the saddle finisher controller PCB.
Finisher
controller PCB
Saddle stitcher Motor,

controller PCB CPU Solenoid
Intermediate
tray driver
PCB
Punch unit ASIC1 Switch,
(accessory) Sensor
ASIC2
Motor,
ROM Solenoid
Switch,
To host machine EEPROM
Sensor
F-3-3
The machine uses the following ICs, each possessing specific functions:
IC Description
CPU Controls the communications with the host machine; controls ASIC1/ASIC2.
ASIC1 Controls the communications with accessories; controls the drive to various loads.
ASIC2 Controls the drive to various loads.
ROM Stores the firmware used to operate the machine.
EEPROM Stores counter readings and adjustment values.
3-3
Chapter 3
3.2.3 Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB

0015-2070
The saddle stitcher controller PCB drives the machine’s various loads (motors, solenoids) in response to the
commands from the finisher controller, and indicates the states of sensors and switches to the host machine.
Saddle stitcher
controller PCB
Motor
Finisher ASIC1 Solenoid

Controller PCB
Sensor
F-3-4
The machine uses the following major ICs possessing specific functions:
IC Description
ASIC1 Controls the communications with the finisher controller; controls the drive to various loads.
3-4
Chapter 3
3.3 Stacking Unit

3.3.1 Overview
0015-2072
The stacking block moves up and down the 2 delivery trays according to the instructions from the finisher
controller PCB.
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11]
UN15
Tray A UN16
PS32
M22
UN17 PS34
UN18
Tray B
PS33
SL9
M23
PS35
F-3-5
[1]Tray B paper detection signal [7]Tray A lift motor drive single

[2]Tray B paper surface detection light-emitting signal [8]Tray A lift motor rotation detection signal
[3]Tray B paper surface detection light-receiving signal [9]Auxiliary tray solenoid drive signal
[4]Tray A paper detection signal [10]Tray B lift motor drive signal
[5]Tray A paper surface detection light-emitting signal [11]Tray B lift motor rotation detection signal
[6]Tray A paper surface detection light-receiving signal
M22:tray A lift motor PS35:tray B lift motor rotation sensor

M23:tray B lift motor UN15:tray A paper surface sensor (light-emitting)
SL9:auxiliary tray solenoid UN16:tray A paper surface sensor (light-receiving)
PS32:tray A paper sensor UN17:tray B paper surface sensor (light-emitting)
PS33:tray B paper sensor UN18:tray B paper surface sensor (light-receiving)
PS34:tray A lift motor rotation sensor
3-5
Chapter 3
3.3.2 Tray Ascent/Descent Control

0015-2073
The tray A/B is moved up or down by controlling 2 motors (M22, M23) in response to the instructions from the
finisher controller.
The machine uses 2 sensors (PS34, PS35) to check for faults in these motors.
The sensor monitors the rotation of the motors; when any of the following occurs, the finisher controller PCB
will stop the drive to the motor and, at the same time, will communicate the fact to the host machine:
Related Error Code

While the tray A motor (M22) is rotating, the tray A lift motor rotation detection signal is absent for 250 msec
or more.
While the tray B motor (M23) is rotating, the tray B lift motor rotation detection signal is absent for 250 msec
or more.
[1] [2] [3] [4]
Tray A
M22
PS34
Tray B
M23
PS35
F-3-6
[1]Tray A lift motor drive signal [3]Tray B lift motor drive signal
[2]Tray A lift motor rotation detection signal [4]Tray B lift motor rotation detection signal
M22:tray A lift motor PS34:tray A lift motor rotation sensor

M23:tray B lift motor PS35:tray B lift motor rotation sensor
3-6
Chapter 3
3.3.3 Auxiliary Tray Lift Control

0015-2074
In response to an increase in the number of folded sheets in the tray, the auxiliary tray is moved up to prevent a
delivery jam associated with the tray B (memo) by making sure that the lead and trail edges of the stacks
deposited in the tray will be even.
The auxiliary tray is moved by operating the solenoid (SL9) according to the instructions from the finisher
controller PCB.
[1]
Tray A
Auxiliary tray
Tray B
SL9
M23
F-3-7
[1]Auxiliary tray solenoid drive signal
SL9:Auxiliary tray solenoid
MEMO:
A stack with a folded sheet tends to be higher along its lead edge than its trail edge, blocking the discharge slot
when it contains multiple folded sheets. (A subsequent sheet will likely hit the preceding sheet, causing a jam.)
3-7
Chapter 3
3.3.4 Tray Paper Surface Detection

0015-2075
The machine is equipped with a mechanism to detect the position of the top of the stack deposited in its 2 trays.
The trays are each fitted with a sensor PCB that consists of a light-emitting segment (UN15, UN17) and a light-
receiving segment (UN16, UN18).
The light-emitting segment is arranged at the rear of the machine, and is a LED. The light-receiving segment,
on the other hand, is found at the front of the machine, and it consists of 3 photosensors.
When the power is turned on or a jam has been removed, the finisher controller PCB checks the 3 photosensors
(light-receiving segment) as soon as the LED (light-emitting segment) goes on.
As more and more sheets are deposited in the tray, the light reaching the light-receiving segments will be
blocked, causing the finisher controller PCB to move down the tray to keep the top of the stack at a specific level.
When the tray becomes full of paper (i.e., light blocked, not reaching any of the 3 photosensors), the finisher
controller PCB switches over to a different tray for subsequent delivery. If the newly selected tray is full, it will
stop the operation of the machine, and will indicate the fact to the host machine.
UN15
[4]
[6]
[1]
UN16
UN16 3
[1] 2
[2] 1
[2]
UN17
[5]
UN16
3
2
1
[1]
[2]
[1]
UN18
[3]
F-3-8
[1]Paper [5]Stack delivery roller

[2]Tray A [6]Tray descent movement (sample)
[3]Tray B
[4]Non-sort delivery roller
UN15:tray A paper surface sensor (light-emitting) UN17:tray B paper surface sensor (light-emitting)
UN16:tray A paper surface sensor (light-receiving) UN18:tray B paper surface sensor (light-receiving)
3-8
Chapter 3
3.4 Feeding Unit

3.4.1 Overview
0015-2076
The machine's transport block serves to move paper to the stacking block or the saddle stitcher block according
to the instructions from the finisher controller PCB. It also is used in conjunction with horizontal registration
adjustment and alignment operation.
The machine uses 6 sensors to check for jams in the paper path.
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14]
SL3 M5 SL2 M4 SL6 SL1 M8 M3 SL5 M7 M2 SL4 M6 M1
From
inserter
To tray A
Shift unit
Horizontal
registration
detection unit
To tray B
From host machine
F-3-9
3-9
Chapter 3
[1]Saddle path switch solenoid drive signal [9]Assist roller 2 shift solenoid drive signal
[2]Delivery motor drive signal [10]Horizontal registration motor drive signal
[3]Upper path switch solenoid drive signal [11]Shift transport motor drive signal
[4]Buffer motor drive signal [12]Assist roller 1 shift solenoid drive signal
[5]Assist roller 3 shift solenoid drive signal [13]Horizontal registration detection unit shift motor drive signal
[6]Buffer path switch solenoid [14]Inlet transport motor drive signal
[7]Transport roller shift motor drive signal
[8]Buffer front transport motor drive signal
M1:inlet transport motor SL1:buffer path switch solenoid
M2:shift transport motor SL2:upper path switch solenoid
M3:buffer front transport motor SL3:saddle path switch solenoid
M4:buffer motor SL4:assist roller 1 shift solenoid
M5:delivery motor SL5:assist roller 2 shift solenoid
M6:horizontal registration detection unit shift motor SL6:assist roller 3 shift solenoid
M7:horizontal registration shift motor
M8:transport roller shift motor
3-10
Chapter 3
[1] [2] [3] [4] From inserter [5] [6]
PS5
To tray A
UN13
UN14
UN24
PS3
To tray B
PS6
From host machine
From saddle stitcher unit
F-3-10
[1]Lower delivery sensor signal [5]Buffer path 1 sensor signal
[2]Lower path sensor signal [6]Inlet sensor signal
[3]Upper delivery sensor signal
[4]Buffer path 2 sensor signal
PS3:inlet sensor UN13:buffer path 1 sensor
PS5:upper delivery sensor UN14:buffer path 2 sensor
PS6:lower delivery sensor UN24:lower path sensor
3-11
Chapter 3

0015-2077
The transport block uses a sequence of operations that consists of the following 5:
1. Horizontal Registration Detection [1]

Detects the position of the paper.
2. Horizontal Registration Correction [2]

Corrects the position of the paper with reference to the result of horizontal registration detection.
3. Alignment [3]
Switches the position of the stack with reference to the result of horizontal registration detection. (only in shift
mode)
4. Buffer Operation [4]

Keeps the sheet stationary inside the transport block; thereafter, joins it with the subsequent sheet for forward
movement.
5. Movement Switch-Over [5]

Moves the paper to the stacking block or the saddle stitcher block.
The particulars of individual operations are as follows:
[4]
From inserter
To stacking block
[2] [3]
[1]
[5]
From host machine

To stacking block
F-3-11
3-12
Chapter 3
3.4.3 Horizontal Registration Detection

0015-2078
1) About 150 msec after the lead edge of paper has moved past the inlet sensor (PS3), the finisher controller
PCB causes the horizontal registration detection unit shift motor (M6) to rotate clockwise so that the horizontal
registration sensor (UN12) moves to its standby position (paper edge) from home position.
[4] [5]
[1]
[2]
M6
M6 [3]
UN12
PS3
PS3
F-3-12
[1]Shift roller unit [4]Standby position
[2]Horizontal registration detection unit [5]Home position
[3]Paper
2)The finisher controller PCB causes M6 to rotate clockwise so that UN12 moves to horizontal registration
detection position (11 mm toward the inside from standby position), during which UN12 detects the edge of
paper to be moved. The finisher controller PCB uses the results of the detection to compute the horizontal
registration value.
3-13
Chapter 3
[4] [5]
[1]
[2]
M6
M6 [3]
UN12
PS3
PS3
F-3-13
[1]Shift roller unit [4]Horizontal registration detection position
[2]Horizontal detection unit [5]Standby position
[3]Paper
3)The finisher controller PCB causes M6 to rotate counterclockwise to move PS5 to standby position.
3-14
Chapter 3
3.4.4 Horizontal Registration Correction/Alignment Operation

0015-2079
1) About 200 msec after the inlet sensor (PS3) detects the lead edge of paper, the finisher controller PCB causes
the transport motor (M2) to rotate clockwise, thereby causing the roller inside the shift roller unit to rotate.
2) The finisher controller PCB computes the horizontal registration correction value with reference to the result
of horizontal registration detection. Thereafter, when the lead edge of paper reaches the buffer path 1 sensor
(UN13), the PCB causes the horizontal registration shift motor (M7) to rotate clockwise or counterclockwise in
keeping with the horizontal registration correction value so that the shift roller unit moves to the front or the
rear, causing the paper clamped by the shift roller to move to the front or to the rear. All this serve to correct the
horizontal registration of the paper to an appropriate value.
UN13
UN13
M7 M7
[1]
M2 M2
[2]
[3]
PS3
PS3
F-3-14
[2]Horizontal registration detection unit
[3]Paper
3-15
Chapter 3
Before Correction After Correction

[1] [1]
UN13 UN13
[2]
[3]
F-3-15
[1]Correct position
[2]Paper
3-16
Chapter 3
3) If the machine is in job offset mode, the shift roller unit is moved to the front or the rear as in the case of
horizontal registration correction operation (Note), thereby offsetting the stacks of sheets discharged to the
delivery tray.
[1] [1]
[2] [2]
F-3-16
This time, the degree of shift is determined with the horizontal registration correction taken into account.
3-17
Chapter 3
3.4.5 Buffer Operation

0015-2080
The finisher controller PCB keeps a sheet of paper in the paper path and forwards it together with the subsequent
sheet of paper using the buffer motor (M4) and the buffer path switching solenoid (SL1) with the help of the
buffer path 1 sensor and the buffer path 2 sensor (UN13,UN14).
M4 SL1
UN13
UN14
Buffer path
F-3-17
M4:buffer motor UN14:buffer path 2 sensor
SL1:buffer path switching solenoid
UN13:buffer path 1 sensor
The buffer operation takes place as follows when 3 sheets of paper are moved:
3-18
Chapter 3
[1] [2]
UN13 UN13 UN13
UN14 UN14 UN14
[1]
[1]
[2]
[1]
UN13 UN13
[3]
UN13
UN14 UN14 UN14
[1] [2]
[1]
[2]
[3]
UN13
UN14
[1] [2]
F-3-18
3-19
Chapter 3
3.4.6 Switching Over the Paper Path

0015-2081
1) The finisher controller PCB turns off or on the2 flappers (upper delivery flapper, lower delivery flapper) to
switch over the destination of paper.
[2]
[3] [1]
[4]
[5]
[6] [7]
F-3-19
[1]From the host machine [5]Lower delivery flapper
[2]Paper [6]To tray B
[3]To tray A [7]To saddle delivery belt
[4]Upper delivery flapper
3-20
Chapter 3
3.5 Intermediate Process Tray Assembly

3.5.1 Overview
0015-2083
The intermediary tray block serves to shift or staple a stack of sheets in response to the instructions from the
finisher controller PCB, and then sends the result to the stacking block. The paper path is fitted with 2 sensors
for detection of a jam.
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12]
M9
M10 M13 M19 M18 M15 M14 M16 M5 M17 M12 M25 M21
F-3-20
3-21
Chapter 3
[1]Front alignment motor drive signal/rear alignment motor [7]Paper trail edge retaining motor drive signal
signal
[2]Stack delivery auxiliary motor drive signal [8]Delivery motor drive signal
[3]Stack delivery motor drive signal [9]Transport belt motor drive signal
[4]Swing guide motor drive signal [10]Assist motor drive signal
[5]Paddle rotation motor drive signal [11]Staple motor drive signal
[6]Paddle lift motor drive signal [12]Staple motor shift drive signal
M5:delivery motor M17:transport belt shift motor
M9:front alignment motor M18:swing guide motor
M10:rear delivery auxiliary motor M19:stack delivery motor
M12:assist motor M21:staple shift motor
M13:stack delivery auxiliary motor M25:staple motor
M14:paddle rotation motor
M15:paddle lift motor
M16:paper trail edge retaining motor
3-22
Chapter 3
[1] [2]
PS6
PS17
F-3-21
[1]Lower delivery sensor signal [2]Handling tray sensor signal
PS6:lower delivery sensor PS17:processing tray sensor
3-23
Chapter 3

0015-2085
The intermediary tray block uses the following 4 sequences of operations:
1.Stacking Operation [1]

Deposits sheets coming front the transport block in the intermediary tray.
2.Aligning Operation [2]

Switches over the point of depositing stacks between the front and the rear of the tray. (in shift mode)
3.Stapling Operation [3]

Staples a stack of sheets at a specific point. (in staple mode)
4.Delivery Operation [4]

Discharges the sheets deposited in the intermediary tray to the tray A or the tray B.
The following are the particulars of the individual operations:
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
F-3-22
3-24
Chapter 3
3.5.3 Stacking Operation

0015-2086
1) When the sheet coming from the transport block reaches the lower delivery sensor (PS6), the machine moves
the transport belt in the direction of the arrow, and rotates the delivery roller in the direction of the arrow. As a
result, the transport belt rotates to move the paper in the direction of the tray. At the same time, the stack delivery
roller is rotated to discharge the paper to the outside of the machine. The machine's stack delivery auxiliary
mechanism (Note) causes the stack delivery tray to extend outside the machine to support the paper.
[1] [3]
PS6
[2]
[4] [5]
F-3-23
[1]Paper [4]Sort delivery roller
[2]Stack delivery auxiliary tray [5]Transport belt
3-25
Chapter 3
2) When the trail edge of paper moves past PS6, the stack delivery roller and the paddle rotate in the direction
of the arrow, thereby pulling the paper back into the machine.
[1]
[6]
[5]
PS6
[2]
[3]
[4]
F-3-24
[1]Paper [4]Assist stopper
[2]Stack delivery roller [5]Transport belt
[3]Sort delivery roller [6]Paddle
3-26
Chapter 3
3)When the trail edge of paper reaches the process stopper, the machine stops the rotation of the stack delivery
roller and the paddle. The swing guide [7] is moved up.
[7]
[1] [6]
[5]
PS6
[2]
[3]
[4]
F-3-25
[1]Paper [5]Transport belt
[2]Stack delivery roller [6]Paddle
[3]Sort delivery roller [7]Swing guide
3-27
Chapter 3
Stack Delivery Auxiliary Function

This machine is equipped with the stack delivery auxiliary mechanism as a means of preventing misalignment
of extra-length paper.
Misalignment occurs when the trail edge of paper hangs down on its own weight at the stack delivery operation.
The paper is then pulled back in the direction of the arrow, causing its lead edge to move away from the stopper.
The tray auxiliary plate is pushed outside the machine before delivery occurs to hold the lead edge of paper. This
prevents misalignment. The tray auxiliary plate is pulled inside the machine at the end of the delivery operation.
Stacks Subject to Misalignment
[1]
[4]
Tray
[2]
[3]
Stacks Free of Misalignment
[1]
[5]
Tray
[2]
[3]
F-3-26
[1]Stack [4]Variation present among lead edges of sheets
[2]Tray auxiliary plate [5]Variation absent among trail edges of sheets
3-28
Chapter 3
3.5.4 Alignment
0015-2087
1) At the end of stacking, the swing guide is moved up, and then the aligning plate is operated as part of an
alignment operation (Note), causing the stack of sheets to move to the rear or to the front.
The foregoing sequence of operations applies only to the Tray B. A sequence of alignment operations is
executed for the tray A while paper is in the paper path.
[2] [3]
[1]
F-3-27
[1]Aligning plate
[2]Stack
[3]Swing guide
3-29
Chapter 3
lignment Mechanism (shift)

The machine’s alignment mechanism operates either of its 2 aligning plates to switch over (offset) the point of
depositing individual stacks of sheets.
Shifting to the Front Shifting to the Rear

[4]
[4]
[5] [5]
[3] [3]
[1] [2] [1] [2]

F-3-28
[1]Tray [4]Rear aligning plate
[2]Front aligning plate [5]Existing stacks
[3]Paper
3-30
Chapter 3
3.5.5 Stapling Operation

0015-2088
1)At the end of alignment operation, the machine moves down the swing guide and performs stapling (Note).
[1]
[2]
[5]
[4]
[3]
F-3-29
[1]Swing guide [4]Stapler
[2]Stapled stack of sheets [5]Aligning plate
3-31
Chapter 3
2) As needed, the staple unit is moved to empty itself of the waste staples in the waste staple case.
The machine's stapling sequence consists of the following operations: driving a staple, cutting the staple
tips, clinching the staple.
F-3-30
[1]Stack of sheets [4]Cutting the staple tips
[2]Staple [5]Clinching the staple
[3]Driving a staple
3-32
Chapter 3
3.5.6 Delivery Operation

0015-2089
1) The machine starts delivery of the stack at the end of alignment or stapling by rotating the delivery roller in
the direction of the arrow.
2) When a stack has 11 or more sheets, the assist stopper moves in the direction of the arrow in synchronization
with the stack delivery roller so that the paper delivery operation is smoothly performed.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
F-3-31
[1]Swing guide
[2]Stapled stack of sheets
[4]Assist stopper
3-33
Chapter 3
3.6 Saddle Stitcher Unit

3.6.1 Overview
0015-2091
The saddle stitcher block serves to staple a stack of sheets according to the instructions from the saddle stitcher
controller PCB, and moves the stack to the saddle delivery belt.
The paper path is fitted with 8 sensors to check for a jam.
Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12]
M108 M104 M109 M107 M110 SL102 SL101 M102 M101 M106 M103 M105
F-3-32
[1]Delivery belt motor drive signal [7]Saddle flapper solenoid 1 signal
[2]Saddle guide motor drive signal [8]Saddle pull-in shift motor drive signal
[3]Saddle pressing motor drive signal [9]Saddle transport motor drive signal
[4]Paper folding/transport motor drive signal [10]Saddle paper butting plate signal
[5]Stitcher motor drive signal [11]Saddle alignment motor drive signal
[6]Saddle flapper solenoid 2 signal [12]Saddle lead edge stopper motor drive signal
3-34
Chapter 3
M101:saddle transport motor M107:saddle paper folding/transport motor
M102:saddle pull-in roller shift motor M108:saddle delivery belt motor
M103:saddle alignment motor M109:saddle pressing motor
M104:saddle guide motor M110:stitcher motor
M105:saddle lead edge stopper motor SL101:saddle flapper solenoid 1
M106:saddle paper butting plate motor SL102:saddle flapper solenoid 2
Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7]
PS101
PS103
PS105
PS113
PS106
PS111
PS116
F-3-33
3-35
Chapter 3
[1]Saddle pressing home position sensor signal [5]Saddle inlet sensor signal
[2]Saddle pressing front sensor signal [6]Saddle small sensor signal
[3]Saddle vertical path sensor signal [7]Saddle paper butting plate home position sensor signal
[4]Saddle stitcher detection signal [8] Saddle pressing positioning signal
PS103: saddle small sensor PS121: saddle pressing positioning sensor
PS105: saddle vertical path sensor SU: saddle stitcher sensor (in saddle stitcher unit)
PS110: saddle paper butting plate home position sensor
PS111: saddle pressing front sensor
PS113: saddle pressing home position sensor
3-36
Chapter 3

0015-2093
The saddle stitcher block uses the following sequence of operations:
1.Transport [1]
Moves the paper from the transport block to the vertical path assembly.
2.Alignment [2]
Aligns the edges of sheets of paper coming to the transport block.
3.Stitching [3]
Uses the stitcher to staple the middle of the stack.
4.Folding/Delivery [4]
Folds the sheet in half, and sends the result to the saddle delivery tray.
The particulars of the individual operations are as follows:
[1]
[3]
[4]
[2]
F-3-34
3-37
Chapter 3
3.6.3 Transport
0015-2094
1) The inlet transport roller rotates clockwise to move the paper to the stitcher block. At this time, the 2 flappers
are operated to suit the size of the paper, making sure that the order of stacking the preceding sheet and the
subsequent sheet will not be reversed.
[1]
[2]
[3]
F-3-35
[1]Inlet transport roller
[2]Flapper
[3]Paper
3-38
Chapter 3
For instance, 3 sheets of A4R/LRR will be moved as follows:
[1]
[2]
[3] [4]
F-3-36
[1]Flapper [3]Paper (2nd sheet)
[2]Paper (1st sheet) [4]Paper (3rd sheet)
3-39
Chapter 3
3.6.4 Alignment
0015-2095
1) The pull-in roller is rotated clockwise to move the paper to the vertical path assembly. At the same time, the
paper positioning plate is moved to a point suited to the size of the paper.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
F-3-37
[1]Paper [4]Paper positioning plate
[2]Pull-in roller [5]Vertical path assembly
[3]Aligning plate
3-40
Chapter 3
2) Thereafter, the lead edge of the paper is held down by the paper positioning plate. At the same time, the pull-
in roller stops to rotate and moves away.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
F-3-38
[3]Aligning plate
3-41
Chapter 3
3) The aligning plate is moved to a point suited to the size of the paper.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
F-3-39
[3]Alignment plate
4) The foregoing operations put the stack of sheets in order.
3-42
Chapter 3
3.6.5 Stitching
0015-2096
1) A stitcher unit is found at both front and rear of the machine (1 unit each). The stitcher unit staples the stack
of sheets at the end of alignment.
[2]
[1]
[3]
F-3-40
[1]Stitcher unit
[2]Paper
[3]Staple
3-43
Chapter 3
3.6.6 Folding/Delivery
0015-2097
1)The paper positioning plate [1] is moved down to move the paper stack [2] in the direction of the arrow so that
the stitching position [3] matches the folding position [4].
[3] [4]
[2]
[1]
F-3-41
T-3-1
[1] Paper positioning plate [3] Stitching position
[2] Stack [4] Folding position
3-44
Chapter 3
2) After the paper folding roller starts rotating in the direction of the arrow, the paper butting plate moves in the
direction of the arrow, thereby starting the folding operation for stacks. After that, the paper butting plate is
moved back to the original position and stops.
[1]
[2]
[3]
F-3-42
[1]Stack of sheets [2]Paper butting plate [3]Paper folding roller
3)The paper transport roller and the pressing front roller rotate clockwise to move the stack of sheets as far as
the pressing unit.
[2]
[1]
[3]
[4]
F-3-43
[1]Paper butting plate [4]Stack transport roller

[2]Paper folding roller [5]Pressing front roller
[3]Stack of sheets [6]Pressing unit
3-45
Chapter 3
4) Rotation of the stack delivery roller and pressing front roller stops. Then, a press unit moves in the direction
of the arrow. At this time, the press roller in a press unit applies pressure to stack of sheets so as to securely fold
the stack of sheets.
[4] [3] [2] [1]
F-3-44
[1]Stack transport roller [3]Pressing front roller

5) The pressing unit is moved in the direction of the arrow, and the pressing front roller is rotated once again,
thereby discharging the stack of sheets to the saddle delivery belt.
[3] [2] [1]
F-3-45

[2]Pressing front roller
3-46
Chapter 3
3.7 Detecting Jams

3.7.1 Jam Detection in the Finisher Assembly
0015-2098
is moving properly:
- inlet sensor
- shift unit sensor
- upper delivery sensor
- lower delivery sensor
- lower path sensor
PS5 UN14 UN13
PS4
UN24
PS6
PS3
F-3-46
3-47
Chapter 3
The presence of a jam, on the other hand, is checked by the finisher controller PCB, running a check at such
times as programmed in advance.
When the finisher controller PCB finds a jam, it will cause the stitcher controller PCB to suspend the ongoing
transport/delivery operation and communicate the presence of a jam to the host machine.
T-3-2
Inlet sensor delay PS3 The inlet sensor (PS3) does not detect paper within a specific period 1002
of time (distance) after the delivery signal from the host machine
has been received.
Inlet sensor stationary PS3 The paper does not leave the inlet sensor (PS3) within a specific 1103
period of time after it has detected paper.
Shift unit sensor delay PS4 The shift unit sensor (PS4) does not detect paper within a specific 1004
period of time (distance) after the inlet sensor (PS3) has detected
paper.
Shift unit sensor PS4 The paper does not leave the shift unit sensor (PS4) within a specific 1105
stationary period of time (distance) after the inlet sensor (PS3) has detected
paper.
delay specific period of time (distance) after the shift unit sensor (PS4)
has detected paper.
stationary specific period of time (distance) after the shift unit sensor (PS4)
has detected paper.
delay specific period of time (distance) after the shift unit sensor (PS4)
has detected paper.
stationary specific period of time (distance) after the shift unit sensor (PS4)
has detected paper.
Upper delivery sensor PS5 The upper delivery sensor (PS5) does not detect paper within a 100A
delay specific period of time (distance) after the buffer path 2 sensor
(UN14) has detected paper.
Upper delivery sensor PS5 The paper does not leave the upper delivery sensor (PS5) within a 110B
stationary specific period of time (distance) after the buffer path 2 sensor
Lower delivery sensor PS6 The lower delivery sensor (PS6) does not detect paper within a 100E
delay specific period of time after the buffer path 2 sensor (UN14) has
detected paper.
Lower delivery sensor PS6 The paper does not leave the lower delivery sensor (PS6) within a 110F
Lower path sensor delay UN24 The lower path sensor (UN24) does not detect paper within a 100C
specific period of time (distance) after the buffer path 2 sensor
Lower path sensor UN24 The paper does not leave the lower path sensor (UN24) within a 110D
Residual (at power-on) Paper exists within the transport path at power-on. 1320
Residual (during initial Paper exists in the path during initial rotation of the host machine. 1721
rotation)
Door open MSW1 The front cover switch (MSW1) has identified the front cover as 1422
being open during machine operation.
3-48
Chapter 3
3.7.2 Jam Detection in the Stitcher Assembly

0015-2099
is moving properly:
- saddle inlet sensor
- saddle small sensor
- saddle vertical path sensor
- saddle lead edge path sensor
- saddle pre-pressing sensor
- saddle stitcher sensor
PS101
PS103
PS111
SU
PS110
PS105
PS113
F-3-47
The presence/absence of a jam is checked by the finisher controller PCB at such times as programmed in
advance. When the finisher controller PCB detects a jam, it suspends the ongoing transport/delivery operation
and communicates the presence of a jam to the host machine.
3-49
Chapter 3
T-3-3
Saddle inlet sensor delay PS101 The saddle inlet sensor (PS101) does not detect paper within a 1042
specific period of time (distance) after the lower path sensor
Saddle inlet sensor PS101 The paper does not leave the saddle inlet sensor (PS101) within a 1143
stationary specific period of time (distance) after the lower path sensor
Saddle small sensor PS103 The saddle small sensor (PS103) does not detect paper within a 1044
delay specific period of time (distance) after the saddle inlet sensor
(PS101) has detected paper.
Saddle small sensor PS103 The paper does not leave the saddle small sensor (PS103) within a 1145
stationary specific period of time (distance) after the saddle inlet sensor
(PS101) has detected paper.
Saddle vertical path PS105 The paper does not detect the saddle vertical path sensor (PS105) 1046
sensor delay within a specific period of time after the saddle stop plate operation
has been ended.
Saddle vertical path PS105 The paper does not leave the saddle vertical path sensor (PS105) 1147
sensor stationary within a specific period of time after the saddle stop plate operation
has been started.
Saddle pre-pressing PS111 The saddle pre-pressing sensor (PS111) does not detect paper 104A
sensor delay within a specific period of time after the saddle stop plate operation
has been ended.
Saddle pre-pressing PS111 The paper does not leave the saddle pre-pressing sensor (PS111) 114B
sensor stationary within a specific period of time after the end of saddle stop plate
operation.
stitcher staple SU The saddle stitcher unit does not detect the start-up of the stitcher 1550
motor (M110) within a specific period of time.
Saddle stop plate PS110 The saddle stop plate sensor (PS110) does not detect the start-up of 1F52
the saddle motor stop plate motor (M106) within a specific period
of time.
Saddle pressing home PS113 The saddle pressing home position sensor (PS113) does not detect 1054
position sensor delay the home position within a specific period of time after the start of
saddle stack delivery operation.
Saddle pressing home PS113 The saddle home position sensor (PS113) remains on (detects the 1155
position sensor home position) at the start of saddle pressing operation.
stationary
3-50
Chapter 3
3.8 Power Supply

3.8.1 Overview
0015-2100
The machine's power supply mechanism converts the AC power from the power outlet into DC for supply to its
various loads.
The AC power is supplied to the circuit when the power switch (SW1) is turned on. It is then converted by the
circuit into the following DC power supplies; +24 V, +5 V, and +3.3 V. Both +36 V and +24 V are used to drive
the various motors; +24 V is also used to drive solenoids and clutches, while +3.3 V is also used to the ICs on
the PCBs.
MSW1
Other
Fuse box accessories
Leakage
PCB
breaker
SW1
(main switch)
Stitching +3.3V
Intermediate Motor
circuit
+5V tray driver Solenoid
+24V PCB
Over-current/ Sensor
over-voltage
detection +3.3V
Motor
circuit Finisher Transport
+5V
controller motor driver Solenoid
PCB +24V PCB
+3.3V +3.3V Sensor
+3.3V
Motor
Saddle stitcher
AC/DC +5V +5V +5V
controller Solenoid
converter +24V +24V PCB
Sensor
MSW5 MSW6
+24V
M21
M25
MSW3 MSW4 MSW2
+36V
M22
Power supply PCB
M23
F-3-48
T-3-4
MSW1:front door switch M21:stapler shift motor
MSW2:tray approach switch M22:tray A motor
MSW3:tray safety switch (front) M23:tray B motor
MSW4:tray safety switch (rear) M25:stapler motor
MSW5:staple safety switch (front)
MSW6:staple safety switch (rear)
3-51
Chapter 3
3.8.2 Protective Mechanism

0015-2101
The machine is equipped with protective mechanisms that will automatically shut off the output voltage to
prevent damage to the power supply circuit in the event of over-current or over-voltage caused, for example, by
a short-circuit in any of its loads.
If DC output is absent in the power supply circuit, suspect that the over-current or over-voltage protective
mechanism has gone on. Turn off the power switch (SW301), remove the cause of the fault, and turn the power
back on.
In addition to the foregoing mechanism, the machine uses the following:

- fuse
The power supply circuit is fitted with 2 fuses which blow to shut off the power in response to over-current in
the AC line.
- Interlock Switch
The machine's external covers and safety levers are fitted with a total of 7 microswitches which go off to cut off
the power supply when a specific cover is opened or a specific lever is operated.
3-52
Chapter 4
PARTS REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

Contents
Contents
4.1 Removing from the Host Machine .................................................................. 4-1
4.1.1 Finisher Assembly ......................................................................................................4-1
4.2 External Covers ................................................................................................. 4-2
4.2.1 Rear Lower Cover ......................................................................................................4-2
4.2.2 Rear Upper Cover ......................................................................................................4-2
4.2.3 Upper Cover Unit .......................................................................................................4-3
4.2.4 Delivery Tray ...............................................................................................................4-4
4.2.5 Stack Wall (Upper) .....................................................................................................4-5
4.2.6 Stack Wall (Lower) .....................................................................................................4-5
4.2.7 Saddle Inside Cover ..................................................................................................4-6
4.2.8 Rear Middle Cover .....................................................................................................4-7
4.2.10 Inside Cover (Lower) ...............................................................................................4-7
4.3 Drive System...................................................................................................... 4-8
4.3.1 Staple Unit ...................................................................................................................4-8
4.3.2 Saddle Staple Unit .....................................................................................................4-8
4.3.4 Rear Alignment Motor .............................................................................................4-10
4.3.5 Tray Shift Motor ........................................................................................................4-12
4.3.6 Shift Motor .................................................................................................................4-13
4.3.7 Positioning Plate Unit ..............................................................................................4-17
4.4.1 Engaging Roller ........................................................................................................4-20
4.4.4 Process Tray .............................................................................................................4-24
4.4.5 Feed Belt ...................................................................................................................4-25
4.4.6 Paddle Unit ................................................................................................................4-27
4.4.7 Paddle ........................................................................................................................4-27
4.4.8 Tray Unit ....................................................................................................................4-27
4.4.9 Saddle Unit ................................................................................................................4-31
4.4.10 No.1 Flapper ...........................................................................................................4-33
4.4.11 No.2 Flapper ...........................................................................................................4-35
4.4.12 Thrust Unit ...............................................................................................................4-35
4.4.13 Thrust Plate .............................................................................................................4-36
4.4.14 Pressing Unit ..........................................................................................................4-37

Contents
4.4.15 Pressing Roller Unit .............................................................................................. 4-40

4.4.16 Folding Roller ......................................................................................................... 4-43
4.5 Electrical System ............................................................................................. 4-47
4.5.2 Static Charge Eliminator ........................................................................................ 4-47
4.5.3 Horizontal Registration Sensor Unit ..................................................................... 4-50

Chapter 4
4.1 Removing from the Host 3) Remove the rear small cover [1].
- 4 screws [2]
Machine
[2]
4.1.1 Finisher Assembly
4.1.1.1 Disconnecting from the Host
Machine
0015-2102
[1]
Check to make sure that the machine is off and the

power plug is not connected to the power outlet.
1) Detach the shunt cable [1]. [2]

- 2 screws [2]
[1]
F-4-3
4) Remove the screw [1] of the latch base (rear), and

shift the hinge [2] toward the front.
[2] [1]
[2]
F-4-1
2) Free the signal cable [1] from the machine.
[1]
F-4-4
F-4-2
4-1
Chapter 4
5) Open the front cover. 4.2 External Covers

6) Remove the screw [2] from the latch base (front)
[1].
4.2.1 Rear Lower Cover
4.2.1.1 Removing the Low Rear Cover
0015-2104
1) Remove the lower rear cover [1].

- 8 screws [2]
[1]
[2]
[2]
[2]
F-4-5
7) While lifting the latch base (front) [1], disconnect

the finisher from the host machine.
[1]
F-4-7
4.2.2 Rear Upper Cover

(right)
0015-2105
1) Remove the upper rear cover (right) [1].

- 2 screws [2]
[1]
[1]
F-4-6
[2]
F-4-8
4-2
Chapter 4
4.2.2.2 Before Removing the Upper Rear 4.2.3.2 Removing the Upper Cover Unit
Cover (left) 0015-2110
1) Disconnect the cable [1].

- 4 clamps [1]
0015-2106

2)Reference[Removing the Upper Rear Cover - 1 connector [3]
(right)] - 2 screws [4]
- 1 edge saddle [5]
(left) [5]
0015-2107
1) Remove the upper rear cover (left) [1].

- 4 screws [2] [4]
[2]
[2]
[3] [1]
F-4-10
[2] [1] [2]
2) Open the front cover [1].
F-4-9 3) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the shaft
retaining plate [2].
4.2.3 Upper Cover Unit
4.2.3.1 Before Removing the Upper Cover
Unit
0015-2109

(right)]
(left)] [2]
[1]
F-4-11
4-3
Chapter 4
4) Open the upper cover unit [1].

[1]
[1]
F-4-12 F-4-14
5) Open the upper cover unit so that the damper shaft 4.2.4 Delivery Tray
[1] becomes loose; then, detach it.
4.2.4.1 Position of the Tray B at Power-On
0015-2111
At power-on, the tray B [1] must never be above the

tray B paper sensor [2], which will cause an error
during detection of the tray B position.
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-4-13
F-4-15
6) Slide the upper cover unit [1] in the direction of
the arrow to detach.
Take care not to trap the cable.
4-4
Chapter 4
4.2.5 Stack Wall (Upper) 4.2.6 Stack Wall (Lower)

4.2.5.1 Removing the Stacking Wall 4.2.6.1 Before Removing the Stacking
(upper) Wall (lower)
0015-2112 0015-2113
1) While supporting the tray from below, insert a 1) Remove the stacking wall (upper). (page 4-
screwdriver [2] in the hole [1] of the lower face to 5)Reference[Removing the Stacking Wall
release the roll [3] in the direction of the arrow; (upper)]
then, lower the tray until it is free of the stacking
wall (upper). 4.2.6.2 Removing the Stacking Wall
(lower)
[3] 0015-2114

- Screw [1]
[2]
[1]
[2] [1]
F-4-16 F-4-18
2) Remove the stacking wall (upper) [1]. 3) Move up the tray A and the tray B above the
- 4 screws [2] stacking wall (lower).
4) Lower the shutter [1], and remove the 2 screws
[2].
5) Detach the stacking wall (lower) [3].
- Remove the 4 screws [4].
[4]
[2] [2]
[1]
[3]
F-4-17
[1] [2]
F-4-19
4-5
Chapter 4
4.2.6.3 Mounting the Stacking Wall (lower) 4.2.7 Saddle Inside Cover
4.2.7.1 Removing the Side Inside Cover
0015-2115
1) Turn the shutter drive shaft [2] so that the shutter

drive roll [1] is directly below. (upper)
0015-2116

2) Remove the saddle inside cover (upper) [1].
- 2 knobs [2]
- 2 screws [3]
[2]
[1] [2] [1]

F-4-20
2) Mount the stacking wall (lower) so that the shutter

drive roll [1] is visible through the hole in the
stacking wall. [3]
F-4-22
4.2.7.2 Removing the Saddle Inside Cover

[1] (lower)
0015-2117
1) Remove the front cover.

2) Remove the saddle inside cover (lower) [1].
- 4 screws [2]
- 1 knob [3]
F-4-21
[3]
[2]
[2]
[1]
F-4-23
4-6
Chapter 4
4.2.8 Rear Middle Cover

[3]
4.2.8.1 Removing the Middle Rear Cover
0015-2118
1) Remove the middle rear cover [1].

- 4 screws [2]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
[2]
[3]
F-4-24 F-4-25
4.2.9 Inside Cover (Upper) 4.2.10 Inside Cover (Lower)

4.2.9.1 Before Removing the Inside Cover 4.2.10.1 Removing the Inside Cover
(upper) (lower)
0015-2122

0015-2119

2) Open the upper cover unit. 2) Remove the inside cover (lower) [1].
- 2 screws [2]
4.2.9.2 Removing the Inside Cover (upper)
0015-2120
1) Remove the inside cover (upper) [1].

- 1 knob [1]
- 8 screws [2] [1]
[2]
F-4-26
4-7
Chapter 4
4.3 Drive System 3) Remove the stapler unit [1]. (page 5-

13)Reference[Adjusting the Stapler Position]
- 1 connector [2]
4.3.1 Staple Unit - 2 screws [3]
4.3.1.1 Before Removing the Stapler

0015-2125
1) Open the front cover. Be sure to take note of the positioning index [4]
2) Open the upper cover unit. before detaching the staple.
4) Remove the inside cover (lower). (page 4-
7)Reference[Removing the Inside Cover (lower)]
4.3.1.2 Removing the Stapler
0015-2126
1) Remove the switch PCB [1]. [1]

- 2 screws [2]
- 1 connector [3]
- 1 edge saddle [4] [4]
[2]
[3]
[4] [3] [2]
F-4-29
[1] 4.3.2 Saddle Staple Unit

4.3.2.1 Removing the Saddle Stapler Unit
F-4-27 0015-2127

2) Push in the stapler unit [1] until it is as shown. 2) Slide out the saddle unit.
3) Open the saddle stack guide[1].
[1]
[1]
F-4-28
F-4-30
4-8
Chapter 4
4) Remove the harness cover [1].

- 1 screw [2]
[2] [1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
F-4-33

F-4-31
5) Remove the saddle stapler unit [1].

- 1 connector [2] [2]
- 2 screws [3]
[2] [1] [1]
[3]
F-4-34
3) Remove the handling tray plate unit [1].

- 1 belt [3]
[3]
- 6 screws [4]
F-4-32 - 2 positioning plates [5]
4.3.3 Front Alignment Motor [4] [3] [5] [4]
4.3.3.1 Before Removing the Alignment [2]
Motor (frontÅj
0015-2128

(upper)]
(lower)]
Unit]
[4] [5] [4]
(front) [1]
0015-2129

F-4-35
4-9
Chapter 4
4) Shift the handling tray aligning plate (front) [1] in Plate Width]
the direction of the arrow, and remove the screw - 2 clamps [2]
[2] and the claw [3]; then, detach the handling - 1 connector [3]
tray aligning plate (front). - 2 screws [4]
[3] [1] [2] [3]
[2]
F-4-36
[1]
- 2 screws [2]
[1] [2] [4]
F-4-39
4.3.4 Rear Alignment Motor

4.3.4.1 Before Removing the Alignment
Motor (rear)
0015-2302

(upper)]
F-4-37 5)Reference[Removing the Stacking Wall
(lower)]
6) Loosen the screw [1], and free the belt [2] from the 3) Remove the handling tray unit. (page 4-
gear [3]. 23)Reference[Removing the Handling Tray
Unit]
[3] [2] [1]
F-4-38
7) Remove the aligning motor (front) [1].

4-10
Chapter 4

(rear) [4] [3] [5] [4]
0015-2303
[2]
1) Free the cable [2] from the 3 clamps, and
[1]
[2]
[3] [4] [5] [4]
[1]
F-4-40
2) Free the cable [2] connected to the 2 clamps [1],

and disconnect the connector [3].
F-4-42
4) Remove the handling tray aligning plate (rear).

[2] - 1 screw [2]
- 1 claw [3]
[2] [1] [3]

[1]
[3]
F-4-41
3) Remove the handling plate unit [1].

- 1 screw [3]
- 6 screws [4]
- 2 positioning plates [5] F-4-43

- 2 screws [2]
[2] [1]
F-4-44
4-11
Chapter 4
6) Loosen the screw [1], and free the belt [2] from the 4.3.5 Tray Shift Motor
gear [3].
4.3.5.1 Removing the Tray A/B Lift Motor
[3] [2] [1]
0015-2304
1)Remove the tray A/B cover [1].

- 4 screws [2]
[2]
[1]
F-4-45
7) Remove the aligning motor (rear) [1].

Plate Width]
- 1 clamp [2]
- 2 cable guides [3]
- 1 connector [4]
- 2 screws [5] F-4-47
[3] [2] [4] 2) While supporting the tray from below, release the
roll [1] in the direction of the arrow; then, move it
down until it stops.
[1] [1]
[5]
F-4-48
F-4-46
4-12
Chapter 4
3) Remove the screw [1], and open the connector 4.3.6 Shift Motor
cover [2] in the direction of the arrow.
4.3.6.1 Before Removing the Shift Motor
0015-2305
1) Disconnect the machine from the host machine

side.
(right)]
(left)]
[1] [2]
4.3.6.2 Removing the Shift Motor
F-4-49
0015-2306
1) Remove the latch base support plate [1].

4) Disconnect the connector [1], and free the cable - 2 screws [2]
[4] from the edge saddle [2] and the wire saddle
[3].
[2]
[3] [2] [4] [1]
[1]
F-4-50 F-4-52
5) Remove the tray A/B lift motor.
- 2 screws [2]
- 1 belt [3]
[3]
[1]
[2]
F-4-51
4-13
Chapter 4
2) Remove the transport stay (upper right) [1]. 4) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1], and remove the 2
- 4 screws [2] screws [2].
[1]
[2]
[2]
F-4-55
[1] 5) Remove the detection drive assembly [1].

- 2 screws [2]
[2]
F-4-53 [1]

- 1 connector [2]
- 2 screws [3]
[2]
F-4-56
[3]
[2]
[1]
F-4-54
4-14
Chapter 4
6) Remove the cable retainer [1], and disconnect the 9) Detach the belt [1] from the gear [2].
connector [2]; then, free the cable [3] from the
cable guide [4].
[1] [4]
[2]
[3]
F-4-57
[1] [2]
7) Insert a screwdriver [1] into the hole [1]. F-4-60
10) Remove the 2 slide shafts [1] in the direction of

the arrow.
- 2 screws [2]
[1]
F-4-58
8) Loosen the screw [1], and tighten the screw while

the tension is removed. [2]
[1]
F-4-61
11) Detach the shift assembly [1] in the direction of

the arrow.
When detaching the shift assembly, take care not to

hit the clamp [2].
[1] [2]
F-4-59
4-15
Chapter 4
13) Remove the shift motor unit [1].

[1] [2] - 3 screws [2]
[1]
[2]
F-4-62
F-4-64
[2] from the clamp [3] and the 2 edge saddles [4]. 14) Remove the shift motor [1].
- 2 screws [2]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[1] [2] [3] F-4-65
F-4-63
4-16
Chapter 4
4.3.7 Positioning Plate Unit 5)Reference[Removing the Stacking Wall

(upper)]
4.3.7.1 Before Removing the Positioning 2) Remove the stacking wall (lower). (page 4-
Plate Unit (lower)]
0015-2307
1) Remove the stop unit. (page 4- 23)Reference[Removing the Handling Tray
35)Reference[Removing the Stop Unit] Unit]
4.3.7.2 Removing the Positioning Plate 7)Reference[Removing the Middle Rear Cover]
Unit 4.3.8.2 Removing the Belt Controller Unit
0015-2308
1) Disconnect the cable [1]. 0015-2310
1) Loosen the screw [1].

- 3 connectors [2]
- 2 clamps [3]
- 2 reuse band [4] [1]
[1] [3]
[2]
[4]
F-4-68
2) Free the cable from the 4 clamps [1] and the edge
saddle [2]; then, disconnect the 3 connectors [3].
[2]
[1] [1]
F-4-66
2) Remove the positioning plate unit [1].

- 2 screws [2]
[3]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[2]
[3] [1]
F-4-67
4.3.8 Belt Controller Unit

F-4-69
4.3.8.1 Before Removing the Belt
Controller Unit
0015-2309
4-17
Chapter 4
3) Remove the 2 screws [1] found at the rear of the

machine.
[1]
[1]
F-4-70
[4]
4) Remove the 2 screws [1] found at the front of the
machine.
[3]
[2]
F-4-72
The belt [4] tends to slip off. Take care not to lose it.
6) Shift the belt variable lever [1] in the direction of

the arrow.
[1]
F-4-71
5) While removing the handling tray upper guide

unit [1], detach the belt [3] [4] from the 2 gears.
[1]
F-4-73
4-18
Chapter 4
7) Release the 2 roll guides [1] in the direction of the 9) Remove the E-ring [1] and the bushing [2].
arrow, and detach the 2 belts [2] from the belt
variable lever [3].
[2]
[3]
[2]
[2] [1]
F-4-76
10) Remove the belt controller unit [1].

[1] - 2 screws [2]
F-4-74
8) Remove the 3 E-rings [1], shift [2], and bushing

[4].
[3] [1]
[2] [1] [2]

F-4-77
[1] [4] [2]

F-4-75
4-19
Chapter 4
Unite the guide side [3] of a guide lever (before) [1] 4.4 Document Feeding System
and a guide lever (after) [2]. After that, it is a belt
[4]. Two pieces are attached.
4.4.1 Engaging Roller
[1] 4.4.1.1 Before Removing the Shift Roller
[3] 0015-2161
1) Remove the saddle stapler unit. (page 4-

8)Reference[Removing the Saddle Stapler Unit]
2) Remove the saddle inside cover (lower). (page 4-
6)Reference[Removing the Saddle Inside Cover
[3] (lower)]
[4]
[2] 4.4.1.2 Removing the Shift Roller
0015-2162
1) Remove the resin ring [1] and the ball bearing [2].
[1]
[2] [1]
[2]
F-4-79
2) Detach the belt [1] found at the rear of the saddle

assembly from the gear [2].
F-4-78
[1]
[2]
F-4-80
4-20
Chapter 4
3) While releasing the claw [1], remove the gear [2], 4.4.2.2 Removing the Stack Delivery
E-ring [3], and ball bearing [4]. Upper Roller
[1] 0015-2164
1) Remove the tension springs [1].
[1] [1]
F-4-81
4) Remove the separation roller shaft [1] in the F-4-83

direction of the arrow.
- Screw[2] 2) Orient the handling tray unit [1] as shown.
[2] [1]
[1]
F-4-82
5) After the engaging roller (front) is removed, the

engaging roller (rear) is similarly removed.
4.4.2 Stack Delivery Roller
F-4-84
Delivery Upper Roller
0015-2163

(upper)]
(lower)]
Unit]
4-21
Chapter 4
3) Remove the belt [1], E-ring [2], gear [3], parallel

pin [4], and plate [5].
[1] [2]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[5] [4]
F-4-87
F-4-85
6) Detach the E-ring [2] and the ball bearing [3] from
4) Remove the ball bearing [1], washer [2]; E-ring
[3], and ball bearing [4]. the stack delivery roller [1].
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]
[2]
F-4-86 F-4-88
5) Remove the ball bearing [1] in downward

direction, detaching the delivery roller [2] at the
same time.
4-22
Chapter 4
4.4.3 Process Tray Assembly

4.4.3.1 Before Removing the Handling
Tray Unit
0015-2165

(upper)]
(lower)]
4.4.3.2 Removing the Handling Tray Unit
0015-2166
1) Remove the handling bin (front) [1] and the

handling bin (rear) [2].
- 2 screws [3]
[A]
[2]
[1]
F-4-90
3) Remove the handling tray unit [1].

- 6 connectors [2]
- 4 screws [3]
[1]
[1] [3] [2]

[3] [3]
F-4-89
2) Turn the knob [1] clockwise so that the rear edge

drop guide [2] is at its lowest position.
[2]
F-4-91
4-23
Chapter 4
[3] [1] [2]
A guide [2] is attached so that it may not run aground

on a lever [1].
[2] [1] [2] [1]

F-4-93

- 2 screws [2]
[1] [2]
F-4-92
4.4.4 Process Tray

4.4.4.1 Before Removing the Handling F-4-94
Tray (front/rear)
0015-2167

(upper)]
(lower)]
Unit]
4.4.4.2 Removing the Handling Tray (front)
0015-2168

the direction of the arrow; then, remove the screw
aligning plate (front).
4-24
Chapter 4
4.4.4.3 Removing the Handling Tray (rear) 4.4.5 Feed Belt

4.4.5.1 Before Removing the Transport
0015-2169
1) Shift the handling tray aligning plate (rear) [1] in

the direction of the arrow; then, remove the screw Belt
aligning plate (rear). 0015-2170

[2] [1] [3] (upper)]
(lower)]
Unit]
4.4.5.2 Removing the Transport Belt
0015-2171
1) Remove the protective cover [1].

- 1 screw [2]
F-4-95
2) Remove the handling tray (rear) [1].

- 2 screws [2]
[2] [1]
[1]
[2]
F-4-97
2) Loosen the screw [1], and shift the coupling (rear)

[2] to the left.
F-4-96
[1] [2]
F-4-98
4-25
Chapter 4
3) Turn the coupling (front) [1] so that the screw is at 5) Release the roll guide [1], and detach the transport
the front; then, loosen the screw, and shift the roll [2] from the shaft together with the belt.
coupling (front) to the right.
[1] [2]
[1] [2]
F-4-99
4) Shift the transport belt release unit [1] toward the

rear so that the transport belt is not engaged.
[1] F-4-101
6) Detach the transport belt (rear) [1] by moving it

through the coupling.
[1]
F-4-100
F-4-102
7) If the transport belt at the front must be detached,

perform steps 8) and 9) at the front. (page 5-
17)Reference[Adjusting the Transport Belt
Position]
4-26
Chapter 4
4.4.6 Paddle Unit 4.4.7.2 Removing the Paddle
4.4.6.1 Before Removing the Paddle Unit

0015-2175
1) Release the 2 claws [1], and detach the paddle

0015-2172
retaining roll [2] to detach the paddle [3].
5)Reference[Removing the Stacking Wall [2]
(upper)]
(lower)]
Unit]
4.4.6.2 Removing the Paddle Unit
0015-2173
1) Remove the 3 paddle units [1]. [1]

- 3 screws [2]
[1] [3]
[1]
F-4-104
4.4.8 Tray Unit

4.4.8.1 Before Removing the Tray A/B Unit
0015-2176

(right)]
(left)]
[2] 4) Open the upper cover unit.
F-4-103
4.4.8.2 Removing the Tray A/B Unit
4.4.7 Paddle 0015-2177
4.4.7.1 Before Removing the Paddle

MEMO:
0015-2174 If the tray B unit must be removed, remove the tray
1) Remove the stacking wall (upper). (page 4- A unit first.
(upper)]
(lower)]
Unit]
4) Remove the paddle unit. (page 4-
27)Reference[Removing the Paddle Unit]
4-27
Chapter 4
3) Remove the stopper[1]

1. Removing the Tray A Unit - screw [2]
1) Remove the support cover [1].
- claw [2]
[2] [1]
[2]
[1]
F-4-107
4) Remove the screw [1], and disconnect the 2

F-4-105 connectors [2].
2) Remove the support plate [1].

- 4 screws [2]
[1]
[2]
[2]
[2]
F-4-106 [1]
F-4-108
4-28
Chapter 4
5) Remove the 2 screws [1], and lead out the cable 7) Lift the tray A unit [1] to detach. (page 5-
[2] in the direction of the arrow. 11)Reference[Adjusting the Tray A/B Position]
[1]
[1] [2]
F-4-109
6) Remove the tray A cover [1]

- 4 screws [2] F-4-111
[2] 2. Removing the Tray B Unit

- 1 screw [2]
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-4-110
F-4-112
4-29
Chapter 4
2) Remove the screw [1], and disconnect the

connector [2]. [2]
[2]
[1]
[1] F-4-115
7) Lift the tray B unit [1] to detach. (page 5-

11)Reference[Adjusting the Tray A/B Position]
F-4-113
3) Remove the 2 screws [1], and lead out the cable

[2] in the direction of the arrow. [1]
[2]
[1]
F-4-116
F-4-114
4) Remove the tray B cover [1].

- 4 screws [2]
4-30
Chapter 4
4.4.8.3 Points to Note About the Tray A/B 4.4.9 Saddle Unit
Cable
4.4.9.1 Removing the Saddle Unit
0015-2178
When mounting the tray A/B unit, take care so that 0015-2180
the cables will not become tangled. 1) Open the front cover.
2) Slide out the saddle unit [1] about 20 cm.
F-4-117
[1]
4.4.8.4 Points to Note When Handling the
F-4-119
Stacking Wall Rail
0015-2179 3) Pull out the auxiliary caster [1] in the direction of
Take care not to damage the stacking rail [1]. The the arrow [A], and slide out the saddle unit in the
presence of scratches or dents can affect stacking direction of the arrow [B].
performance. If soiling is found, clean it with
alcohol.
[B]
[A] [1]
[1]
F-4-120
[1]
F-4-118
4-31
Chapter 4
4) Release the stopper [1] of the rail, and pull it out 6) Move the saddle unit in the direction of the arrow
about 5 cm. until the screw [1] is visible through the hole [2];
then, remove the screws [1] [3].
[1] [2]
[1]
[3]
[1]
F-4-121
5) Disconnect the 3 connectors [1], and remove the

screw [2]; then, slide out the saddle unit in the
F-4-123
7) Push in the rail [1] inside the machine.
[1]
F-4-124
[1]
[2]
[3]
F-4-122
4-32
Chapter 4
8) Remove the 2 screws [1]. 4.4.10 No.1 Flapper

4.4.10.1 Removing the No. 1 Paper
Deflecting Plate
0015-2181

2) Slide out the saddle unit [1] about 20 cm.
[1]
[1]
F-4-125
9) Hold the saddle unit [1] as shown, and move it in

the direction of the arrow. Before carrying it
away, be sure it is free from the rail.
[1]
F-4-127
3) Slide out the auxiliary caster [1] in the direction of

the arrow [A], and slide out the saddle unit in the
direction of the arrow [B].
[1]
F-4-126
[B]
[A] [1]
F-4-128
4-33
Chapter 4
4) Release the stopper [1] of the rail, and slide it out 6) Open the saddle stack guide assembly [1].
about 5 cm.
[1]
F-4-131
7) Remove the tension spring [1] found at the rear of

the saddle unit; then, while releasing the claw [2],
push in the shaft [3] slightly.
[1]
F-4-129
5) Disconnect the 3 connectors [1], and remove the

[1]
[3] [2]
F-4-132
8) Move the No. 1 paper deflecting plate [1] in the

direction of the arrow [A] [B] to free it from the
hole [2].
[1] [2]
[1] [A]
[2]
[B]
[3]
F-4-130 F-4-133
4-34
Chapter 4
9) Free the arm [1] from the hole [1]; then, shift it 11) Remove the No. 1 paper deflecting plate [1] in
away in the direction of the arrow. the direction of the arrow.
[1] [2] [1]
F-4-136
4.4.11 No.2 Flapper

F-4-134
4.4.11.1 Removing the No. 2 Paper
10) Fit the No. 1 paper deflecting plate [1] into the
hole [2]. Deflecting Plate
0015-2182
[1] [2] Remove the No. 2 paper deflecting plate in the same
way you removed the No.1 paper deflecting plate.
(page 4-33)Reference[Removing the No. 1 Paper
Deflecting Plate]
4.4.12 Thrust Unit
4.4.12.1 Removing the Stop Unit
0015-2183

2) Slide out the saddle unit.
3) Remove the saddle stitcher controller PCB cover
[1].
- 6 screws [2]
[1]
F-4-135
[2] [2]
F-4-137
4-35
Chapter 4
4) Disconnect the 11 connector [1], and detach the 7) Remove the stop unit [1].
cable from the guide. - 4 screws [2]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
[1]
F-4-141
F-4-138
4.4.13 Thrust Plate
5) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1], and free the cable
from the 3 clamps [2] and the 3 edge saddles [3]. 4.4.13.1 Before Removing the Stop Plate
0015-2184
[3] 1) Remove the stop unit. (page 4-

35)Reference[Removing the Stop Unit]
[2]
[3] [1] 4.4.13.2 Removing the Stop Plate
[2] [3] 0015-2185
1) Turn the gear [1] in the direction of the arrow [A]

[2]
so that the stop plate [2] is extended as far as
F-4-139 possible.
6) Remove the 2 clamps [1], and disconnect the

connector [2].
[2]
[2]
[A]
[1]
[1]
F-4-142
F-4-140
4-36
Chapter 4
2) Mark the current position [1] before detaching the 4.4.14 Pressing Unit
stop plate.
4.4.14.1 Before Removing the Press Unit
0015-2186

[1] [1]
F-4-143
3) Remove the stop plate [1].

- 3 screws [2]
- 1 stop plate fixing plate [3]
[1] [3]
[1]
F-4-145
3) Pull out an auxiliary caster [1] in the direction of

an arrow [A]. Then, a saddle unit is pulled out in
the direction of an arrow [B].
[2]
F-4-144
4) When fitting a new stop plate, secure it in place in

keeping with the marking made in step 2).
[B]
[A] [1]
F-4-146
4-37
Chapter 4
4) Pull out the rail stopper[1]. 6) Remove rhe sadddle inside cover (lower). (page
4-6)Reference[Removing the Saddle Inside
Cover (lower)]
4.4.14.2 Removing the Press Unit
0015-2187
1) Remove the 2 roller fixing plates (front) [1].

- 4 screws [2]
[1]
[1]
F-4-147
5) Remove a cable guide [1] from a saddle unit.

Then, a saddle unit [2] is pulled out.
- 3 conectors [2]
- screw [3] [2]
F-4-149
2) Remove the 2 roller fixing plates (rear) [1].

- 4 screws [2]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
F-4-150
[3]
F-4-148
4-38
Chapter 4
3) Disconnect the 4 connectors [1], and free the cable 5) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1], and free the cable
from the 2 edge saddles [2] and the 2 clamps [3]. from the edge saddle [2] and the clamp [3].
[3] [2] [1]

[2]
[3]
[1]
F-4-151
F-4-153
4) Remove the fixing plate (front) [1].
6) Remove the fixing plate (rear) [1].
- 1 belt [2] - 2 screws
- 4 screws [3]
[3] [2]
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-4-154
[3]
F-4-152
4-39
Chapter 4
7) Remove the press roller unit [1]. 3) Pull out the auxiliary caster [1] in the direction of
- 2 screws the arrow [A], and slide out the saddle unit in the
direction of the arrow [B].
[2]
[B]
[2]
[A] [1]
F-4-157
[1]
4) Release the stopper [1] of the rail, and pull it out
about 5 cm.
F-4-155
4.4.15 Pressing Roller Unit

4.4.15.1 Before Removing the Press
Roller Unit
0015-2188

[1]
F-4-158
[1]
F-4-156
4-40
Chapter 4
5) Disconnect the 3 connectors [1], and remove the 4.4.15.2 Removing the Press Roller Unit
direction of the arrow. 0015-2189
1) Remove the delivery guide (upper) [1].

- 4 screws [2]
[2]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
F-4-160
2) Remove the handle cover [1].

- 1 screw [2]
[3]
F-4-159

(lower)]
4) Remove the press unit. (page 4-
38)Reference[Removing the Press Unit]
[2]
[1]
F-4-161
4-41
Chapter 4
3) Remove the handle unit [1]. 5) Remove the belt support plate [1].
- 4 screws [2] - 1 screw [2]
[2]
[1]
[1] [2]
F-4-164
[2] 6) Remove the slide shaft (lower) [1] in the direction

of the arrow.
F-4-162 - E-ring [2]
4) Remove the delivery guide (lower) [1].

- 4 screws [2]
[1]
[2]
[2]
[1]
F-4-165
[2]
F-4-163
4-42
Chapter 4
8) Detach the shaft [2] from the press roller unit [1].
Then mounting the slide shaft (lower), be sure that

the hole [1] of the press roller unit cover and the hole [2]
[2] of the knob are matched while the press roller
unit is in its rearmost position.
[1] [2]
[1]
F-4-168
4.4.16 Folding Roller

F-4-166 4.4.16.1 Before Removing the Folding
Roller
0015-2190
7) While opening the side plate [1] in the direction of 1) Open the front cover.
the arrow, remove the press roller unit [2] 2) Slide out the saddle unit.
together with the slide shaft (upper) [3].
[1]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-4-169
F-4-167
4-43
Chapter 4
3) Pull out an auxiliary caster [1] in the direction of

an arrow [A]. Then, a saddle unit is pulled out in
the direction of an arrow [B].
[B]
[A] [1]
[1]
F-4-170 [2]
4) Pull out the rail stopper[1].
[3]
F-4-172

(lower)]
7) Remove the press unit. (page 4-
38)Reference[Removing the Press Unit]
4.4.16.2 Removing the Folding Roller
0015-2191
1) Remove the transport roller guide [1].

- 1 screw [2]
[1]
F-4-171
5) Remove a cable guide [1] from a saddle unit.

Then, a saddle unit [2] is pulled out.
- 3 conectors [2]
- screw [3]
[2] [1]
F-4-173
4-44
Chapter 4
2) Remove the tension arm plate [1]. 4) Remove the C-ring [1], gear [2], and ball bearing
- 1 tension spring [2] [3].
[1] [2] [3]
[2]
[1]
F-4-176
F-4-174
5) Remove the C-ring [1] and the ball bearing [2]
3) Remove the roller arm plate [1]. found at the rear of the saddle unit.
- 1 tension spring [2]
- 1 E-ring [3]
- 2 screws [4] [1] [2]
[3]
[4]
[1]
[2]
F-4-175 F-4-177
4-45
Chapter 4
6) Slide the folding roller (upper) [1] in the direction 9) Remove the C-ring [1] and the ball bearing [2]
of the arrow. found at the rear of the saddle unit.
[1]
[2]
[1] F-4-181
F-4-178
10) Shift the shaft [1] found at the front of the folding
7) Remove the folding roller (upper) [1] in the roller (lower) to the hole above.
[1]
F-4-182
[1]
11) Remove the folding roller (lower) [1] in the
F-4-179 direction of the arrow.
8) Remove the C-ring [1] and the gear [2].
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-4-180 F-4-183
4-46
Chapter 4
4.5 Electrical System 4.5.2 Static Charge Eliminator

4.5.2.1 Removing the Stack Edging Roller
Static Eliminator
4.5.1.1 Finisher Controller PCB 0015-2194
1) Remove the 2 stack edging roller stack eliminators

4.5.1.1.1 Before Removing the Finisher [1].
Controller PCB - 4 screws [2]
0015-2193
1) Remove the middle rear cover. [2] [1] [2]

2) Remove the lower rear cover.
4.5.1.1.2 Removing the Finisher Controller PCB
0016-3519
1) Remove the finisher controller PCB [1].

(page 5-14)Reference[Adjusting the Speed of
the Swing Guide]
Plate Width]
Position (rear 1-point)] F-4-185
Position (front 1-point)] 4.5.2.2 Before Removing the Static
Position (2-point)] Eliminator (upper delivery slot)
(page 5-26)Reference[Adjusting the Delivery of 0015-2195
Stapled Stacks (lower delivery)] 1) Remove the upper rear cover (right). (page 4-
(right)]
(left)]
- 24 connectors (all) 7)Reference[Removing the Middle Rear Cover]
- 4 screws [2] 4) Remove the upper cover unit. (page 4-
[1]
4.5.2.3 Removing the Stack Eliminator
(upper delivery slot)
0015-2196
1) Remove the buffer upper cover assembly [1].

- 1 reuse band [2]
- 4 screws [3]
[2] [2]
F-4-184
4-47
Chapter 4
4.5.2.5 Removing the Stack Eliminator

(inside delivery guide)
0015-2198
[1] 1) Remove the 2 static eliminators (inside delivery
guide) [1].
- 4 screws [2]
[3] [3]
[1]
[2]
F-4-186 [2]
F-4-188
2) Remove the 2 static eliminators (upper delivery
slot) [1]. 4.5.2.6 Removing the Static Eliminator
- 4 screws [2]
(inside delivery roller)
[1] 0015-2199
1) Remove the 2 static eliminators (inside delivery

roller).
- 2 screws [2]
[1] [2] [1]
[2] [2]
F-4-187

Eliminator (inside delivery guide/inside
delivery roller) F-4-189
0015-2197

(upper)]
(lower)]
Unit]
4-48
Chapter 4
4.5.2.7 Removing the Static Eliminator

(saddle transport inlet)
0015-2201

3) Remove the plate [1].
- 2 screws [2]
[2]
[1] [2] [2]
[1] [1]
F-4-192
F-4-190 4.5.2.8 Removing the Flapper Static

Eliminator
4) Remove the stack eliminator (saddle transport
inlet) [1]. 1) Open the front cover.
0015-2202
- 2 screws [2] 2) Slide out the saddle unit.

3) Remove the plate [1].
[2] [1] [2] - 2 screws [2]
[2]
[1]
F-4-191
Points to Note When Mounting the Static F-4-193

Eliminator
Be sure that the tip [1] of the static eliminator is fitted
into the hole [2] of the plate before fitting it into
place.
4-49
Chapter 4
4) Remove the flapper static eliminator [1]. 4.5.3 Horizontal Registration Sensor
- 3 screws [2]
Unit
[1]
4.5.3.1 Before Removing the Horizontal
Registration Sensor Unit
0015-2205
1) Separate the machine from the host machine side.

(page 4-1)Reference[Disconnecting from the
Host Machine]
(right)]
(left)]
4) Remove the middle rear cover.
[2] 4.5.3.2 Removing the Horizontal
F-4-194 Registration Sensor Unit
0015-2206

- 1 connector [2]
Points to Note When Mounting the Static - 2 screws [3]
Eliminator
Be sure to put the tip [1] of the static eliminator into
the hole [2] of the plate before fitting it in place.
[2]
[3]
[1] [2]
[1]
F-4-196
F-4-195
4-50
Chapter 4
2) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1], and remove the 2 4) Disconnect the connector [1], and free the cable
screws [2]. [2] from the 3 cable guides [3] and the edge
saddle [4].
5) Remove the 2 screws [5].
[5]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
F-4-197
[4] [3]
- 2 screws [2] F-4-199
6) Remove the horizontal registration sensor unit [1]

in the direction of the arrow. (page 5-
10)Reference[Adjusting the Sensor Intensity]
[2] [1] [1]
F-4-198
F-4-200
4-51
Chapter 5
MAINTENANCE

Contents
Contents
5.1.2 User Maintenance Item (saddle stitcher) ............................................................... 5-1
5.2.1.2 Periodically Replaced Parts in the Saddle Finisher ........................................................ 5-2
5.2.2 Durables ......................................................................................................................5-2
5.3 Adjustment ......................................................................................................... 5-4
5.3.1.3 Adjusting the Sensor Intensity.......................................................................................... 5-10
5.3.2.11 Adjusting the Delivery of Stapled Stacks (saddle delivery) ....................................... 5-29
5.3.2.12 Adjusting the Saddle Binding Position .......................................................................... 5-32
5.3.2.13 Adjusting the Saddle Folding Position .......................................................................... 5-34
5.3.2.14 Adjusting the Saddle Lead Edge Stopper Position ..................................................... 5-36
5.3.2.15 Adjusting the Saddle Alignment Reference.................................................................. 5-36
38
5.3.2.17 Bufferless mode 1 ............................................................................................................ 5-39
5.3.2.18 Bufferless mode 2 ............................................................................................................ 5-40
5.3.2.19 Assist stopper position adjustment ................................................................................ 5-41

Contents

5.3.3 Other ......................................................................................................................... 5-63
5.4.1 Malfunction ............................................................................................................... 5-66
5.5.7 Sensors (Saddle Stitcher Unit).............................................................................. 5-81
5.5.8 Motors (Saddle Stitcher Unit) ................................................................................ 5-84
5.5.9 Solenoids(Saddle Stitcher Unit) ............................................................................ 5-86
5.5.10 PCBs (Saddle Stitcher Unit) ................................................................................ 5-87
5-88
5.6.1 Overview................................................................................................................... 5-88
5.7 Upgrading.......................................................................................................... 5-88
5.7.1 Upgrading ................................................................................................................. 5-88
5.8 Service Tools .................................................................................................... 5-89

Chapter 5
5.1 User Maintenance

5.1.1 User Maintenance Items (finisher)
0015-2208
T-5-1
No. Item Timing

2 waste staple (disposal) when prompted (in host machine control panel)
5.1.2 User Maintenance Item (saddle stitcher)

0015-2210
T-5-2
No. Item Timing

5-1
Chapter 5
5.2 Maintenance and Inspection

5.2.1 Periodically Replaced Parts
5.2.1.1 Periodically Replaced Parts in the Finisher
0015-2211
The finisher does not have a part that requires periodical replacement.
5.2.1.2 Periodically Replaced Parts in the Saddle Finisher
0015-2212
The saddle finisher does not have a part that requires periodical replacement.
5.2.2 Durables
5.2.2.1 Durables in the Finisher
0015-2213
T-5-3
as of November 2005
1 Stapler FC6-6222-000 500,000 A single cartridge is good
1 times for about 5000 operations.
2 Roller belt FB5-9103-000 1,000,000

2
pages
4 Stack edging roller FC6-6134-000 1,000,000
1
static eliminator pages
1
pages
2
pages
1
pages
5-2
Chapter 5
5.2.2.2 Durables in the Saddle Stitcher

0015-2214
T-5-4
as of November 2005
1 Stitcher FM3-1025-000 500,000 times A single cartridge is good for
1 about 5000 operations.
2 Static eliminator (T2) FL2-6408-000 1 1,000,000 pages

3 Flapper static eliminator FC7-5409-000 1 1,000,000 pages
4 Shift roller FL2-6416-000 1 1,000,000 pages
5.2.3 Periodical Servicing

5.2.3.1 Scheduled Servicing for the Finisher
0015-2216
The finisher does not have items that require scheduled servicing.
5.2.3.2 Scheduled Servicing for the Saddle Stitcher
0015-2217
The saddle stitcher does not have items that require scheduled serving.
5-3
Chapter 5
5.3 Adjustment
5.3.1 Basic Adjustment
5.3.1.1 Adjusting the Height
0015-2219
If jams start to occur often, adjust the height of the

machine as follows:
1. Checking the Height
1) Check the height of the finisher and the host [1]
machine. Be sure that the difference in height
between the right top surface [1] of the finisher
and the left top surface [2] of the host machine is
+/-2 mm.
[1] [2]
[1]
F-5-2
2. Adjusting the Height

2) Detach the spanner [1] connected to the front
F-5-1 cover.
- 1 screw [2]
2) If the difference is +/-2 mm or more, adjust the
height.
[1]
In order to adjusting the height, adjust four casters
[1] shown in the figure.
[2]
F-5-3
5-4
Chapter 5
3) In the case of the Finisher-AB1, remove the caster

cover [1].
- 1 screw [2] [1]
[1]
[2]
F-5-6
[2] 6) Measure the height [A] from the caster mounted

F-5-4 surface to the upper surface of bottom plate using
a scale or the like and check if the height is 84.6
+/- 0.5 mm.
4) In the case of the Saddle Finbserh-AB2, detach the
saddle inside cover (lower) [1].
- 1 screw [2]
- 1 knob [3]
- 3 screws [4]
[A]
[1] 84.6 0.5mm
F-5-7
[4]
[2] [3] [4]

F-5-5
5) Remove the 2 caster covers [1] from the left side.

(The illustration shows the saddle finisher.)
- 2 screws [2]
5-5
Chapter 5
7) Loosen the fixing nut [1] of the scanner by turning

the spanner (large) [2] in the direction of [A]. [1]
[1]
[A]
[B]
[A]
[2]
[2] F-5-10
F-5-8 9) Tighten the fixing nut [1] in the direction of [B].
[1]
When loosening the caster fixing nut [1] on the front

of the saddle finisher, be sure to fit the spanner [3] [B]
through the gap below the saddle assembly base
plate [2].
[1]
F-5-11
10) Likewise, adjust the remaining 3 casters.

11) Connect the finisher to the host machine, and
check the height.
[3] If the difference is +/-2 mm, mount the removed
parts such as the cover. Otherwise, repeat the
[2] adjustment procedure.
F-5-9
8) Turn the adjusting bolt [1] with a spanner (small)

[2]. Adjusting the height measured at step 6) so
that it becomes 84.6 +/-0.5 mm.
- to raise, turn in the direction of [A].
- to lower, turn in the direction of [B].
(A single full turn causes a change of about 1.75
mm.)
5-6
Chapter 5
5.3.1.2 Adjusting the Horizontal

Registration/Angle [1] [3]
0015-2221
If the vibration is excessive (i.e., the horizontal

registration unit shifts excessively), or the skew is SW382
excessive on this machine, adjust the horizontal
DSP381
registration/ skew correction as follows:
1. Checking the Adjustment Value

1) Turn on the finisher and then the host machine. SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[2]
F-5-14
[1]
5) Place a single sheet of A4/LTR paper, and select
ADF or copyboard mode; then, set '3' as the copy
count, and execute printing.
6) Check the horizontal registration/angle
adjustment value indicated by the LED [1].
The indication will be 'A' -> 'horizontal
F-5-12 registration adjustment value' -> 'b' -> 'skew
adjustment value'; take note of the values.
3) Remove the switch cover [1] of the inside cover - horizontal registration adjustment value
(lower). (reference only): -3 to +3 mm (1 index:
- 1 screw [2] equivalent of 1 mm)
- skew adjustment value (reference only); -2 to +2
[1] mm (1 index: equivalent of 1 mm)
[1]
SW382
DSP381
SW381
[2] SW383 SW384 SW385
F-5-13
(-) (+) ENTER
as shown (1, 4, 6, and 8 at ON), and press the F-5-15
enter button (SW385) [2]; in response, the LED
[3] will flash '0'. 7) Press the enter button to end adjustment mode.
8) Turn off the host machine and then the finisher in
sequence.
5-7
Chapter 5
2. Adjusting the Horizontal Registration [4] [1]

2) Loosen the 2 screws [2] on the positioning plate
[1] found on the right side.
plate in the direction of [A] and tighten the screw
[2].
hand, move the plate in the direction of [B] and [3]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[4]
F-5-17
2) Loosen the 2 screws [2] on the latch base (front)

[1].
[B] [A] base in the direction of [A] and tighten the screw
[2].
F-5-16 hand, move the base in the direction of [B] and
3. Adjusting the Angle
If the angle is as indicated, start with step 7).
1) Lift the upper cover [1], and detach the inside
cover (upper) [2]. Make sure that the total of the indexes over which the
- 1 knob [3] latch base (front, rear) is moved is between -2 and +2
- 8 screws [4] mm.
5-8
Chapter 5
Make sure that the total of the indexes over which the
latch base (front, rear) has been moved is between -2
and +2 mm.
[2]
[A] [B]
[1]
[A] [B]
[1] [2]
F-5-18
F-5-20
4) Remove the middle rear cover [1]. 7) Connect the finisher and the host machine.
- 4 screws [2] 8) Turn on the finisher and the host machine in
sequence.
[1] 9) Check the adjustment values once again.
If the adjustment value indicated by the LED is
within a specific range, press the ENTER key to
end adjustment mode. Otherwise, go through the
steps for a second time; if the result is more or less
[2]
[2] the indicated value (reference only), end the
work.
10) Put the DIP switch back to its initial settings, and
attach the covers and parts you have removed.
F-5-19
5) Loosen the 2 screws [2] on the latch base (rear)

[1].
[2].
hand, move the base in the direction of [B] and
5-9
Chapter 5
5.3.1.3 Adjusting the Sensor Intensity

0015-2224
[1]
Go through the following steps when installing the
finisher or replacing specific sensor:
sequence.
2) Open the front cover, and insert the door switch [2]
[1]
[1] [2]
F-5-21 F-5-23
3) Insert a screwdriver [2] through the hole [1] in the

bottom face of the tray; then, disengage the tray in
the direction of [A], and lower the tray A/B in the 4) Detach the inside cover (lower) and the switch
direction of [B]. cover [1].
- 1 screw [2]
[1]
[1]
[A] [B]
[2]
[2]
F-5-22
F-5-24
Be sure to lower the tray A/B [2] until it does not

block the tray sensor (front/rear) [1].
5-10
Chapter 5
5) Set the DIP switch SW382 [1] of the switch PCB T-5-5
as shown (1: ON), and press the enter button
(SW385) [2] to start sensor intensity adjustment. Code Sensor Name
[1]
3 Lower path sensor PCB(UN24)
SW382 4 Horizontal sensor PCB(UN12)
DSP381
Punch chip case full sensor
5 PCB(Panch unit U1)
Tray A paper surface sensor PCB
SW381 6 ~ 8 (UN16)
tray B paper surface sensor PCB
9, A, b (UN18)
SW383 SW384 SW385
5.3.2 Adjustment at Time of Parts

(-) (+) ENTER Replacement
[2] 5.3.2.1 Adjusting the Tray A/B Position
F-5-25 0015-2225

6) If the LED [1] indicates '0', the adjustment has the tray A or B so that the tray is horizontal:
been successful. Press the enter button (SW385) 1) Holding the tray horizontally, fit it to the support
[2] to end the sensor intensity adjustment. (left, right).
At this time, be sure that distance A (i.e., from
the tip of the support [3] to the tray shaft [4]) is the
[1] same at the front [1] and the rear [2].
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[2]
F-5-26
7) If any of the sensors is faulty (i.e., the LED flashes

'0'), press the + (SW384) [1]/- (SW383) [2] button
to find out the code number indicated by the LED
[3], and replace the faulty sensor.
5-11
Chapter 5
2) Fix the 2 paper edge stoppers [1] in place on the

host machine using 2 screws [2].
[3]
[4] [A]
[2]
[2] [1]
F-5-29
[1]
F-5-27
5.3.2.2 Adjusting the Angle of the Aligning

Plate (orthogonal)
0015-2226

the alignment motor of the intermediate handling
tray assembly or the EEPROM of the finisher
controller PCB:
1) After mounting the intermediate handling tray
assembly, loosen the 2 screws [2] on the aligning
plate [1] of the assembly.
[2] [1] [2]
F-5-28
5-12
Chapter 5
3) Place A4 paper [1] in the intermediate handling 5.3.2.3 Adjusting the Stapler Position
tray in the direction of the arrow. Make adjustments
so that there is no gap between the paper edge [1] and 0015-2227
the aligning plate [2]; then, fix the aligning plate Go through the following steps if you have replaced
the stapler unit found in the intermediate handling
using a screw [3]. tray assembly:
1) Mark the position [1] of the stapler unit before
[3] replacement.
2) Mount the new stapler unit [2] with reference
to the marking [1], fixing it in place using 2
screws [3].
[1]
[1]
Before
adjustment
[2]
[C] [1]
After
adjustment
[2]
[3] [2]
F-5-31
[1]
F-5-30
5-13
Chapter 5
5.3.2.4 Adjusting the Speed of the Swing 5) Set the DIP switch SW382 [1] on the switch PCB
Guide as follows:
0015-2229
[1]
the swing guide motor or the EEPROM of the
finisher controller PCB:
DSP381
standby state.
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
[1] (-) (+) ENTER
F-5-34

adjustment of the swing guide speed.
In a while, press the push switch SW385 [1]; if
F-5-32 the LED [2] indicates '0', the adjustment has
ended successfully.
cover [1]. [2]
[1]
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER

[2]
F-5-33
[1]
F-5-35
7) If the LED indicates other than '0', the result is not

good. Repeat the steps.
5-14
Chapter 5
5.3.2.5 Adjusting the Aligning Plate Width

0015-2230
[1]
the front alignment motor or the rear alignment
motor or the EEPROM of the controller PCB:
1) Turn on the finisher. SW382
DSP381
standby state.
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER

[1]
F-5-38
for L-Series,
[1]
F-5-36

cover [1].
SW382
DSP381
[1]
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
F-5-39
[2]
F-5-37

as follows:
for A-Series,
5-15
Chapter 5

adjustment of the front aligning plate width. [3]
SW382
DSP381
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385 SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER

(-) (+) ENTER
[1] [2]
[1]
F-5-40

handling tray.)
[4]
F-5-42
[1]
9) Press the push switch SW385 [1] to store the
distance of travel of the front aligning plate.
SW382
DSP381
F-5-41
8) Press the push switch SW383 [1] or SW384 [2] to SW381

store the new value.
to indicate '-1', moving the front aligning plate [4]
by about 0.2 mm toward the front. On the other
hand, a single press on SW384 will cause the SW383 SW384 SW385
LED [3] to indicate '+1', moving the front
aligning plate [4] by about 0.2 mm toward the
rear. (-) (+) ENTER
[1]
F-5-43
5-16
Chapter 5
10) Check that there is no gap between the paper and

the aligning plate as the result of the foregoing [1]
steps. If there still is a gap, go back to step 8).
[1]
[2]
[2]
F-5-44 F-5-46
5.3.2.6 Adjusting the Transport Belt 5) Set the DIP switch SW382 [1] on the switch PCB
as follows:
Position
0015-2231 [1]
the transport belt of the intermediate tray or there is
displacement among the sheets of a delivered stack:
DSP381
standby state.
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER

[1]
F-5-47
F-5-45

cover [1].
5-17
Chapter 5

adjustment of the transport belt position. [3]
SW382
DSP381
SW382
DSP381
SW381 SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385

SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER

(-) (+) ENTER
[1] [2]
[1]
F-5-48
[4]
A single press on SW383 will cause the LED to
indicate '-1', closing up the distance between the
belt [4] and the paper [5] and, thus, increasing the
retention by the belt. On the other hand, a single
press on SW384 will cause the LED to indicate
'+1', distancing the belt [4] and the paper [5] and,
thus, decreasing the retention by the belt. (range:
+4 to -4)
[5]
Reference:
1. If wear has occurred on the transport belt or
recycled paper (i.e., with high surface resistance)
is used, select a negative adjustment value (-1 to - F-5-49
4) to increase the retention.
2. If dents have occurred in the edge of paper,
select a positive adjustment value (+1 to +4) to
decrease the retention.
5-18
Chapter 5
8) Press the push switch SW385 [1] to end 4) Remove the screw [2], and detach the switch
adjustment of the transport belt. cover [1].
If the LED [2] indicates '0', the adjustment has
ended successfully. [1]
[2]
SW382
DSP381
SW381
[2]
SW383 SW384 SW385
F-5-52
(-) (+) ENTER
5) Set the DIP switch SW382 [1] of the switch PCB
[1] as follows:
F-5-50 [1]
9) If the LED indicates '0', on the other hand, the
adjustment has failed. Repeat the foregoing steps.
5.3.2.7 Adjusting the Stapling Position SW382
DSP381
(rear 1-point)
0015-2232

displacement in the stapling position (rear 1-point) SW381
controller PCB:
standby state. SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
F-5-53
[1]
F-5-51
5-19
Chapter 5

adjustment of the stapling position (rear 1-point). [3]
for A-Series,
SW382
DSP381
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385

SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER

(-) (+) ENTER
[1]
[2] [1]
F-5-54
F-5-56
for L-Series,
[1] stapler to the rear.
SW382
DSP381
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
(-) (+) ENTER

[1]
F-5-55
F-5-57
to indicate '-1', moving the stapling position
toward the rear. On the other hand, a single press
moving the stapling position toward the front.
5-20
Chapter 5
9) Place A4 paper [1] in the intermediate handling If the LED indicates a value other than '0', the
tray. (Be sure to butt the paper against the rear of adjustment is likely to have failed. Start over.
the handling tray.)
Thereafter, press the push switch SW385 to
execute stapling.
5.3.2.8 Adjusting the Stapling Position
(front 1-point)
0015-2233
Go through the following steps if the stapling

position (front 1-point) is displaced or if you have
PCB:
standby state.
[1]
F-5-58
10) Check to see that the stapling position is 5 +/-2 [1]

mm [1] as a result of the foregoing steps.
[1]
F-5-60
4) Remove the switch [2], and detach the switch

cover [1].
[1]
F-5-59 [2]
F-5-61
5-21
Chapter 5

as follows:
for A-Series, SW382
DSP381
[1]
SW381
SW382
DSP381
SW383 SW384 SW385
SW381
(-) (+) ENTER
[1]
SW383 SW384 SW385
F-5-64

(-) (+) ENTER store the new adjustment value.
A press on SW383 causes the LED [3] to
F-5-62 indicate '-1', moving the stapling position (front
1-point) toward the rear. On the other hand, a
for L-Series, press on SW384 causes the LED [3] to indicate
'+1', moving the stapling position toward the
[1] front.
SW382 [3]
DSP381
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER

SW383 SW384 SW385
F-5-63
6) Press the push switch SW385 [1] to start (-) (+) ENTER
adjustment of the stapling position (front 1-
point).
[1] [2]
F-5-65
5-22
Chapter 5

stapler toward the front.
[1]
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[1]
F-5-66

tray. (Be sure to butt the paper against the rear of
the handling tray.) F-5-68

[1]
F-5-67
10) Check to make sure that the stapling position is 5

+/-2 mm [1] as a result of the foregoing steps.
5-23
Chapter 5
5.3.2.9 Adjusting the Stapling Position (2-

point) [1]
0015-2237

displacement in stapling position (2-point) or if you
have replaced the EEPROM of the finisher controller SW382
DSP381
PCB:
standby state.
3) Open the front door, and insert the door switch SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
F-5-71
[1]
for L-Series,
[1]
F-5-69
SW382
DSP381
cover [1].
[1]
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
F-5-72
[2]
F-5-70

as follows:
for A-Series,
5-24
Chapter 5

adjustment of stapling position (2-point).
[3]
SW382
DSP381
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385

SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER (-) (+) ENTER
[1] [1] [2]
F-5-73

store the new adjustment value.
to indicate '-1', moving the stapling position (2-
point) upward. On the other hand, a single press
moving the stapling position in downward
direction.
F-5-74
5-25
Chapter 5

stapler to the 2-point stapling position.
[1]
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385

F-5-77
(-) (+) ENTER
[1]
F-5-75 If the LED indicates other than '0', the adjustment is
handling tray.)
5.3.2.10 Adjusting the Delivery of Stapled
Stacks (lower delivery)
0015-2238

displacement among sheets of a stapled stack (lower
delivery; cover, 1st to 3rd sheets) or if you have
PCB:
[1] standby state.
F-5-76
10) Check to see that the stapling position is as

follows [1] as the result of the foregoing steps: for [1]
A-Series, 86.3 +/-4 mm; for L-Series, 73.7 +/-4
mm. Otherwise, go back to step 6).
F-5-78
5-26
Chapter 5

cover [1]. [2]
[1]
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
[2] (-) (+) ENTER
F-5-79 [1]
F-5-81
as follows: 7) Place 3 originals in the ADF, and set as follows on
the control panel: A4, 1 set (staple sort).
[1] 8) Press the Start key on the control panel to execute
copying.
SW382 between 2nd and 3rd sheets).
Repeat this step 5 times, and see that the average
DSP381
of A and B is as indicated (2 +/-0.5 mm). If not,

go through the following steps:
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
F-5-80

for adjustment.
5-27
Chapter 5
and 2nd sheets). Press the push switch SW383 [2]

to decrease the displacement, or press SW384 [3]
to increase the displacement. (The LED [4]
indicates the correction value.)
[4]
SW382
DSP381
SW381
[3] [2] [1]
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[2] [3] [1]

F-5-84
11) If B (between 2nd and 3rd sheets) is not as

indicated, go through the following:
F-5-82
machine is in adjustment mode for B (between 1st
and 3rd sheets).
Press the push switch SW382 [2] to decrease
the displacement, or press SW384 [3] to increase
the displacement. (The LED [4] will indicate the
correction value.)
[3]
[2] Another press on SW385 will store the A/B
correction value.
[1]
[B] [A]
F-5-83
[1] 1st sheet

[2] 2nd sheets
[3] 3rd sheets

2nd and 3rd sheets) is not as indicated, go through
the following:
machine is in adjustment mode for A (between 1st
5-28
Chapter 5
[4]
SW382
DSP381
[1]
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385 F-5-86

(-) (+) ENTER
cover [1].
[1]
[2] [3] [1]
F-5-85
A press on the push switch SW385 while the LED is

indicating '0' will cause the LED to indicate the A
and B correction values in sequence.
Pay attention so that you remain aware of which
correction value you are working on.
5.3.2.11 Adjusting the Delivery of Stapled [2]

Stacks (saddle delivery)
F-5-87
0015-2239
Go through the following steps if there is 5) Set the DIP switch SW382 [1] on the switch PCB
displacement (cover, 1st to 3rd sheets) among sheets as follows:
of a stapled stack (saddle delivery) or if you have
replaced the EEPROM of the finisher controller:
1) Turn on the finisher. [1]
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
F-5-88
5-29
Chapter 5

for adjustment.
[2]
SW382
DSP381
SW381
[3] [2] [1]

SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[1]
F-5-89
7) Set three A3 originals to ADF. In the control

panel, select Finisher > Staple-sort, To The Next
> Center Binding, Duplexing > Double-sided to
Double-sided. Then, make a copy using A3
paper.
8) Press the Start key on the control panel to start
printing. F-5-90
between 2nd and 3rd sheets) of the stack found in
the buffer assembly. Repeat this step 5 times, and
see that the average of A/B is as indicated (A: 2 +/ [1]
-0.5 mm; B: 6 +/-0.5mm). If not, go through the
following: [2]
[3]
Be sure to turn over the stack as follows before [A]

taking measurements:
[B]
F-5-91
[1] 1st sheet

[2] 2nd sheets
[3] 3rd sheets
2nd and 3rd sheets) is not as indicated, go through
the following:
Press the push switch SW385 [1] once so that the
machine is ready for adjustment of A (between
1st and 2nd sheets). A press on the push switch
5-30
Chapter 5
SW383 [2] will decrease the displacement, while

a press on SW384 [3] will increase the [4]
displacement. (The LED [4] will indicate the
correction value.)
[4] SW382
DSP381
SW382 SW381
DSP381
SW381 SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
SW383 SW384 SW385

[2] [3] [1]
F-5-93
(-) (+) ENTER
[2] [3] [1]

F-5-92
11) If B (between 1st and 3rd sheets) is not as

indicated, go through the following: A press on the push switch SW385 while the LED is
Press the push switch SW385 [1] so that the indicating '0' will cause the LED to indicate the A
machine is ready fro adjustment of B (cover, and B correction values in sequence.
between 1st and 3rd sheets). Pay attention to remain aware of which correction
A press on the push switch SW383 [2] will value you are working on.
decrease the displacement, while a press on
SW384 [3] will increase the displacement. (The
LED [4] will indicate the correction value.)
range of adjustment: +30 and -30 (unit: 0.2 mm)
Another press on SW385 will store the new A/B
correction value.
5-31
Chapter 5
5.3.2.12 Adjusting the Saddle Binding 5) Set the DIP switch DIP SW382 [1] on the switch
Position PCB as follows:
- for A-Series, [2]
0015-2240 - for L-Series, [3]
displacement in stitching position (saddle delivery) [1]
controller PCB:
standby state. SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385

[2]
[1]
(-) (+) ENTER
[3]
F-5-94 F-5-96
4) Remove the screw [2], and detach the switch 6) Hold the lever [1], and slide out the saddle unit
cover. [2]; then, open the saddle right guide [3].
[1] [3]
[2]
[1]
[2]
F-5-95 F-5-97
5-32
Chapter 5
7) Place paper (A4 or LTR) [1] along the transport

guide. (Be sure to butt the paper against the
positioning plate.)
[2] [1]
[A]
[B]
F-5-100
10) If the measurements (A, B) are as indicated (i.e.,

F-5-98
if A - B is within 0.5 mm), press the push switch
SW385 [1] once to end adjustment mode. If not,
8) Press the push switch SW384 [1] once to start go through the following:
stitching operation.
SW382
DSP381
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385

SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER

(-) (+) ENTER
[1]
[1]
F-5-101
F-5-99
9) Remove the paper, and measure the stitching

position (A, B).
5-33
Chapter 5
11) Press the push switch (SW383, SW384)

according to the degree of displacement from the
standard.
A press on SW383 [1] will move the stapling
position upward, while a press on SW384 [2] will
move it downward.
[2]
[1]
SW382
DSP381
[C]
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385 F-5-103

(-) (+) ENTER actuator into the door switch [1].
[1] [2]
[1]
F-5-104

F-5-102 cover [1].
5.3.2.13 Adjusting the Saddle Folding [1]

Position
0015-2241

displacement in folding position (saddle delivery) or
if you have replaced the EEPROM of the finisher
controller PCB:
standby state.
3) Set the machine for a set of 20 sheets on the
control panel, and execute printing.
4) Spread open the bound booklet, and measure the
following position [2] in relation to the stapling
position [1].
If the measurement is as indicated (i.e., C is 0.5 mm
or less), end the adjustment. Otherwise, go through [2]
the following:
F-5-105
5-34
Chapter 5
7) Set the DIP switch DIPSW382 [1] on the switch

PCB as follows:
SW382
DSP381
[1]
SW381
SW382
DSP381
SW383 SW384 SW385
SW381 (-) (+) ENTER
[1] [3]
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
F-5-106
[2]
6) Obtain the correction value from the
measurement, and press the 2 push switches
(SW383, SW384) as necessary to correct.
A press on SW383 [1] will move the folding
position [2] upward, while a press on SW 384 [3]
will move it downward.
range of adjustment: +30to -30 (unit: 0.1 mm)
F-5-107
9) Press the push switch SW385 once to end

adjustment mode.
5-35
Chapter 5
5.3.2.14 Adjusting the Saddle Lead Edge

Stopper Position
0015-2242
Go through the following steps if the saddle folding

position has become displaced.
1) Generate a print using the saddle assembly, and
measure the displacement (C) of the folding
position.
[1]
[C]
[3] [2]
F-5-110
5.3.2.15 Adjusting the Saddle Alignment

F-5-108 Reference
2) Slide out the saddle assembly; then, remove the 6 0015-2243
screws [1], and detach the PCB cover [2]. Make the following adjustments if the saddle
reference is displaced.
2) Turn on the copier's power switch, and see that it
is in a standby state.
[1] [1]
[2]
F-5-109
[1]
3) Loosen the fixing screw [1] of the lead edge
stopper, and change the position of the stopper to
suit the displacement (C) of the following
position measured in the foregoing step. (A single
index will cause a change of 1 mm.)
Specifically, insert a Phillips screwdriver into the
adjusting hole, and move the screwdriver up/ F-5-111
down to move to a different index.
5-36
Chapter 5

[1]. [3]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2] F-5-114
F-5-112 7) Place paper [3] in the saddle assembly [1]. (A4R

or LTRR)
5) Set DIP SW382 [1] on the switch PCB as follows: At this time, moving up the gear in area A in the
- if A configuration, [2] direction of the arrow releases the saddle pull-in
- if L configuration, [3] roller so that paper may be placed in the saddle
Thereafter, press SW385 to end the preparatory assembly.
work.
[2]
[1]
SW382
DSP381
SW381
[A]
SW383 SW384 SW385 [1]
[2]
(-) (+) ENTER
[3]
F-5-115
F-5-113
8) Check to see that there is a gap between the saddle
6) Hold the lever [1], and slide out the saddle unit guide plate and the edge of the paper. If there is,
[2]; then, open the saddle right guide [3]. go to the next step.
5-37
Chapter 5
9) Adjust the 3 push switches (SW383, 384) so that

there is no gap [D] between the saddle guide plate
[1] and the edge of the paper [2].
The method of adjustment is as follows:

A press on SW383 [3] causes the guide plate to
move to the left, while a press on SW384 [4]
causes it to move to the right.
Range of adjustment: +10 to -10 (unit of
[1]
correction: 0.2 mm)
SW382
DSP381
F-5-117
SW381
4) Detach the switch cover [1] by removing the
screw [2].
SW383 SW384 SW385 [1]
(-) (+) ENTER
[3] [4]
[D] [D]
[1]
A B
[2]
F-5-118
[2]
F-5-116
10) Press the push switch SW385 once to end

adjustment mode.
5.3.2.16 Adjustment of EEPROM (IC107)
on the Finisher Controller PCB After
Replacement
0015-2244
Adjustments after replacing the EEPROM (IC107)

on the finisher controller PCB
These adjustments are performed when the
EEPROM (IC107) on the finisher controller PCB
has been replaced.
2) Turn on the copier and set the copier in a stand-by
mode.
5-38
Chapter 5
5) Set the DIP SW382 [1] on the Switch PCB as code: 1109) has occurred
shown in the figure below. EEPROM is - When the EEPROM (IC107) on the finisher
initialized by pressing the switches in the order of controller PCB has been replaced
SW385,SW384,SW383, once for each.
not performed regardless of the loading method
SW382 (non-staple loading or staple loading).
DSP381
The procedure for establishing the settings in this
mode is described below.
SW381 3) Open the front door, and insert the door switch
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
F-5-119
6) Make the following adjustments: [1]

- Alignment plate width adjustment
the rear)
the front) F-5-120
- Staple position adjustment (2-point binding)
- Stapled stack delivery adjustment (lower 4) Remove the screw [2], and detach the switch
delivery) cover [1].
- Stapled stack delivery adjustment (saddle
delivery) [1]
- Feed belt position adjustment
- Saddle leading edge stopper position adjustment
- Punch hole position adjustment (side
- Punch hole position adjustment (feed direction)
- Bufferless mode 1
- Bufferless mode 2
- Staple inlet guide height adjustment
- Paddle height adjustment
upper curl occurs)
lower curl occurs)
- Adjustment at poor tray stackability (run over
when using thin paper) [2]
- Tray stacking limit cancellation adjustment
F-5-121
5.3.2.17 Bufferless mode 1
0016-4794

a multiple number of copies has been made
- When the corners of the sheets are creased
- When a buffer path 2 sensor stationary jam (jam
5-39
Chapter 5

as follows:
[1]
SW382
DSP381
[1]
SW381
F-5-123
SW383 SW384 SW385 4) Remove the screw [2], and detach the switch
cover [1].
(-) (+) ENTER [1]

F-5-122

pressing SW385.
7) Since "1" appears on the LED when SW384 is
pressed once, press SW385 once again.
5.3.2.18 Bufferless mode 2
0016-4795

a multiple number of copies has been made using
coated sheets for the originals
- When the finisher controller PCB has been replaced [2]
controller PCB has been replaced F-5-124
not performed during the staple loading.
5-40
Chapter 5
5) Set the DIP switch SW382 [1] on the switch PCB 3) Place the A4 or letter size sheets [1] in the
as follows: intermediate processing tray in the direction of the
arrow. Then, measure the degree of displacement [A]
[1] between the paper edge stopper [2] and the assist
stopper [3].
If the measured value (+A or -A) is outside of the
reference value (0+0.5 mm), perform the adjustment
to make the degree of displacement falls within the
SW382 range of the reference value.
DSP381
SW381
[1]
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
F-5-125

pressing SW385.ÅB
7) Since “2” appears on the LED when SW384 is
pressed twice, press SW385 once again.
5.3.2.19 Assist stopper position
adjustment
0016-4797
This adjustment is performed when there are

variations in the position of the topmost sheet of the +A
delivered stack.
[1] [2] [3] [2]
-A
[2] [1] [2] [3] [2]
[1] F-5-127
F-5-126
5-41
Chapter 5
4) Remove the 2 screws [2], and remove the assist 6) Attach the assist stopper [1] using the 2 screws [2].
stopper [1].
[2] [1] [2]
[2] [1] [2]
F-5-130
F-5-128
5.3.2.20 Staple inlet guide height
5) Loosen the screw [1] of the assist stopper, and adjustment
adjust it so that the degree of displacement of the
stopper [2] falls within the range of the reference 0016-4796
value [3]. This adjustment is performed either when poor tray

[2] controller PCB is replaced.
F-5-131
[1]
[3] 1) Turn on the finisher.
F-5-129 be in a standby state.
T-5-6
If the measured value [3] obtained in the step

3 is -A, move the stopper [2] in the direction
of the white arrow, on the other hand, if it is
+A, move in the direction of the black arrow.
5-42
Chapter 5
3) Open the front door, and insert the door switch 6) The preparations for the staple inlet guide height
actuator into the door switch [1]. adjustment are completed by pressing the push
switch (SW385) [1].
SW382
DSP381
SW381
[1]
SW383 SW384 SW385
F-5-132 (-) (+) ENTER
4) Remove the screw [2], and detach the switch [1]

cover [1].
F-5-135
[1]
SW384 [2].
[4] is lowered.
guide height position [5] is raised.
Adjustment range: +4 to -4 (Each 1 setting value
change results in the movement of 0.5mm.)
<Reference>
When the foregoing fault has occurred, it can be
remedied by changing the adjustment value in the
[2]
negative direction.
F-5-133
[3]
as follows:
[1]
SW382
DSP381
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
SW383 SW384 SW385 (-) (+) ENTER
(-) (+) ENTER [1] [2]
F-5-134 F-5-136
5-43
Chapter 5
[4]
F-5-139

F-5-137 2) Turn on the host machine so that the machine will
8) This adjustment is completed by pressing the push 3) Open the front door, and insert the door switch
switch SW385 [1] again. actuator into the door switch [1].
SW382
DSP381
SW381
[1]
SW383 SW384 SW385
F-5-140
(-) (+) ENTER
[1] cover [1].
F-5-138
[1]
5.3.2.21 Paddle height adjustment
0016-6224

[1].
[2]
F-5-141
5-44
Chapter 5
5) The preparations for the paddle height adjustment <Reference>

are completed by pressing the push switch When the foregoing fault has occurred, it can be
SW385 [1]. remedied by changing the adjustment value in the
negative direction.
[1]
[3]
SW382
DSP381
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
SW383 SW384 SW385

(-) (+) ENTER
F-5-142 (-) (+) ENTER

are completed by pressing the push switch [1] [2]
SW385 [1].
F-5-144
SW382
DSP381
[5]
SW381
[4]
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER

F-5-145
[1] 7) The adjustment amount is determined by pressing

F-5-143
SW384 [2].
7) The adjustment amount is determined by pressing LED [3], and the staple inelt guide height position
either one of the push switches: SW383 [1] or [4] is lowered.
SW384 [2]. On the other hand, when SW384 is pressed once,
When SW383 is pressed once, "-1" appears on the "+1" appears on the LED [3], and the staple inlet
LED [3], and the staple inelt guide height position guide height position [5] is raised.
[4] is lowered. o Adjustment range: +4 to -4 (Each 1 setting
On the other hand, when SW384 is pressed once, value change results in the movement of 0.5mm.)
guide height position [5] is raised. <Reference>
o Adjustment range: +4 to -4 (Each 1 setting When the foregoing fault has occurred, it can be
value change results in the movement of 0.5mm.) remedied by changing the adjustment value in the
negative direction.
5-45
Chapter 5
SW382
DSP381
SW381
[1]
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER F-5-148
[1] 4) Remove the screw [2], and detach the switch

cover [1].
F-5-146
[1]
stackability (when the upper curl
occurs)
0016-6227

stackability occurs (when the upper curl occurs)
[2]
F-5-149

as follows:
F-5-147 [1]
<Memo>
By executing this adjustment, the finisher increases
the feeding speed when the trailing edge of paper SW382
DSP381
reaches to the delivery roller. The tray stackability is

thereby improved since no sheets are left in place
near the delivery exit.
SW381
below.
be in a standby state. SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
F-5-150
5-46
Chapter 5

[1]. SW382
DSP381
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
SW383 SW384 SW385 (-) (+) ENTER
[1]
(-) (+) ENTER
F-5-153
[1]
F-5-151
stackability (when the lower curl
7) When the push switch SW384 [1] is pressed once, occurs)
"+1" appears on the LED [2]. 0016-6228

[2] stackability occurs (when the lower curl occurs)
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385 F-5-154
<Memo>
(-) (+) ENTER When delivering sheets while paper stacks with
downward curl are stacked on a tray, the delivered
papers may slide along the tilt of the paper stacks,
[1] causing fall out from the tray.
However, by executing this adjustment, the finisher
F-5-152 reduces the feeding speed when the trailing edge of
paper reaches to the delivery roller. Because the
8) This adjustment is completed when the push degree that the delivered paper goes beyond the
switch SW385 [1] is pressed again. paper stack is reduced, it prevents the paper to be
fallen out from the tray.

below.
5-47
Chapter 5
3) Open the front door, and insert the door switch 6) The preparations for this adjustment are
actuator into the door switch [1]. completed by pressing the push switch SW385
[1].
SW382
DSP381
[1]
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385

F-5-155
4) Remove the screw [2], and detach the switch (-) (+) ENTER
cover [1].
[1]
[1]
F-5-158
7) When the push switch SW384 [1] is pressed twice,

[2]
SW382
DSP381
[2]
F-5-156 SW381
as follows:
[1] SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER

SW382
DSP381
[1]
F-5-159
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
F-5-157
5-48
Chapter 5

SW382
DSP381
SW381 [1]
SW383 SW384 SW385

F-5-162
(-) (+) ENTER 4) Remove the screw [2], and detach the switch
cover [1].
[1]
[1]
F-5-160

stackability (run over when using thin
paper)
0016-6230

stackability occurs with thin papers shown in the
figure below or when the EEPROM (IC107) on the
finisher controller PCB is replaced.
[2]
F-5-163

as follows:
[1]
F-5-161
SW382
<Memo>
DSP381
By executing this adjustment, the finisher reduces

the feeding speed. As a result, the degree of curl of
thin paper is reduced; thus, the poor tray stackability
mentioned above is reduced. SW381

below.
1) Turn on the finisher. SW383 SW384 SW385
3) Open the front door, and insert the door switch (-) (+) ENTER
F-5-164
5-49
Chapter 5

[1]. SW382
DSP381
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
SW383 SW384 SW385 (-) (+) ENTER
[1]
(-) (+) ENTER
F-5-167
[1]
5.3.2.25 Tray stacking limit cancellation
F-5-165
adjustment
7) When the push switch SW384 [1] is pressed once, 0016-6232
"+1" appears on the LED [2]. This adjustment is performed either when canceling
the tray stacking limit for coated paper and extra long
[2] paper or when replacing the EEPROM (IC107) on
the finisher controller PCB.
[B]
SW382
DSP381
[A]
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER

F-5-168
[1] [1] Loading under normal conditions

[2] Loading when the stacking limit is cancelled
F-5-166

5-50
Chapter 5
<Memo>
This adjustment works for the upper tray only. The [1]
stacking limit of the lower tray cannot be cancelled.
The table below shows the loading capacity of the
lower tray when the stacking limit has been
cancelled.
T-5-7
Loading capacity
Paper type When the
Under normal
stacking limit is
conditions
cancelled
Plain paper (extra
1,000 sheets 1,500 sheets
long size)
Coated paper [2]

(half size)
F-5-170
Coated paper 5) Set the DIP switch SW382 [1] on the switch PCB
(large size) as follows:
[1]
Details of the adjustment procedure are provided SW382

below.
DSP381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[1] F-5-171
F-5-169

cover [1].
5-51
Chapter 5

[1]. SW382
DSP381
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
SW383 SW384 SW385 (-) (+) ENTER
[1]
(-) (+) ENTER
F-5-174
[1]
5.3.2.26 Saddle staple alignment
F-5-172
adjustment
7) When the push switch SW384 [1] is pressed once, 0016-4897

T-5-8
[2]
Be careful not to touch any of the drive parts

when checking the adjustment since this job is
SW382 done with no covers in place and with the
DSP381
finisher running.
SW381 This adjustment is performed either when the saddle

staple unit is replaced or when the staple positions
(saddle delivery) at the front and the rear are
misaligned.
SW383 SW384 SW385 1) Open the front door.
- 1 knob [2]
- 2 screws [3]
(-) (+) ENTER
[1]
F-5-173

5-52
Chapter 5
[2]
[1]
[1]
[3]
F-5-177

[1].
[1]
F-5-175
3) Detach the saddle inner cover (lower) [1].

- 4 screws [2]
- 1 knob [3]
[3]
[2]
[2]
[1] [2]
F-5-178
F-5-176
4) Turn on the power of the finisher.

5) Turn on the power switch on the host machine to
set the host machine to the standby mode.
5-53
Chapter 5

[1]; and then, open the saddle right guide [3]. [1]
[3]
SW382
DSP381
SW381
[2]
[1] SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
F-5-181
F-5-179
11) The preparations for stapling (lower delivery)
9) Place the sheets (A3 or LDR) [1] along the feeding are completed by pressing the push switch
guide [2]. (Push the sheets in until they come into SW385 [1] once.
contact with the positioning plate.)
[2] [1] SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[1]
F-5-180
F-5-182
10) Set the DIP SW382 [1] on the switch PCB as
shown in the figure below.
5-54
Chapter 5
12) Stapling is executed by pressing the push switch

SW384 [1] several times.
[2]
[1] [1]
SW382
DSP381
[B]
[A]
[2]
SW381
F-5-185
SW383 SW384 SW385
15) Loosen the 2 screws [1] used to secure the saddle
staple unit.
(-) (+) ENTER
[2]
[1]
F-5-183
13) The sheets are folded and delivered by pressing

the push switch SW383 [1] several times. [1]
SW382
DSP381
SW381
F-5-186
16) Adjust the tilting of the saddle staple unit in

SW383 SW384 SW385 accordance with the degree of misalignment in
the staple positions.
(-) (+) ENTER - If, as described in step 14), the front staple
position has shifted downward (the degree of
misalignment [A])
Action to take:
[1] Move the staple unit [1] in the direction of the
F-5-184 black arrow [A] by an amount equivalent to the
shift.
14) Based on the output results, measure the degree
of misalignment [A] or [B] between the rear - If, as described in step 14), the front staple
staple position [1] and the front staple position position has shifted upward (the degree of
[2]. misalignment [B])
If the degree is significant, follow the steps below Action to take:
to adjust the tilting of the saddle staple unit. Move the staple unit [1] in the direction of the
white arrow [B] by an amount equivalent to the
shift.
17) Return the finisher to the operable status by

following steps 1) to 8) and step 15) but in reverse.
5-55
Chapter 5
5.3.2.27 Saddle disengage roller position

adjustment Details of the adjustment method are as described
below.
0016-6915 1) Turn the finisher power ON.
This adjustment is to be carried out when there is a 2) Turn on the host machine power switch and put
noticeable misalignment in the folding position or the copier in standby.
stapling position. 3) Open the front door and insert the door switch
<MEMO> actuator into the door switch [1].
[1]
F-5-188

[1].
[1]
[1]
M102
[2]
F-5-189
F-5-187
5-56
Chapter 5
5) Set dipswitch DIP SW382 [1] on the switch PCB 7) Press switch SW383 [1] or SW384 [2] to fix the
as illustrated below. degree of adjustment.
[1] 1" and the gap between the disengage roller and
SW382 disengage roller and the paper will decrease.
DSP381
0.3mm.)
SW381 [3]
SW383 SW384 SW385

SW382
DSP381
(-) (+) ENTER
F-5-190
SW381
adjustment.
SW383 SW384 SW385

SW382
DSP381
(-) (+) ENTER
SW381
[1] [2]
F-5-192
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[1]
F-5-191
5-57
Chapter 5
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[1]
F-5-194
5.3.2.28 The amount of sending of a

saddle disengage roller adjustment
0016-7248
[1] This adjustment is to be carried out when there is a

M102
noticeable misalignment in the folding position or
stapling position.
<MEMO>
M101
[1]
F-5-193

adjustment.
F-5-195
5-58
Chapter 5
Details of the adjustment method are as described [1]

below.
2) Turn on the copier main unit power switch and put
3) Open the front door and insert the door switch SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
[1]
(-) (+) ENTER
F-5-198

F-5-196 adjustment.

[1]. SW382
DSP381
[1]
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[1]
F-5-199
[2]
F-5-197

5-59
Chapter 5

Press SW383 once and the LED [3]will display "- SW382
DSP381
disengage roller and the paper will decrease. SW381
0.3mm.)
SW383 SW384 SW385
SW382 DSP381
(-) (+) ENTER
SW381 [1]
F-5-201
SW383 SW384 SW385

5.3.2.29 Saddle staple position adjustment
0016-6929

(-) (+) ENTER noticeable misalignment of the folding position with
the stapling position.
[1] [2] <MEMO>
This operation adjusts the length of the paper feed
time just before the folding operation is carried out.
(Adjusts Mxxxx rotation time.)
The adjustment prevents lack of feed caused by
slippage of the disengage roller, so that the defect
described above does not occur.
M101
[1]
F-5-200

adjustment.
F-5-202
5-60
Chapter 5
Details of the adjustment method are as described [1]

below.
2) Turn on the host machine power switch and put
3) Open the front door and insert the door switch SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385

[1]
(-) (+) ENTER
F-5-205

F-5-203 adjustment.
[1].
SW382
DSP381
[1]
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[1]
F-5-206
[2]
F-5-204

5-61
Chapter 5

1" and the folding position lowers, as illustrated M101
below. (+ direction.)
will display "+1" and the folding position lowers,
as illustrated below. (- direction.) [1]
1mm.)
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[1] [2]
F-5-208

adjustment.
SW382
DSP381
SW381
F-5-207
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[1]
F-5-209
5-62
Chapter 5
5.3.3 Other
5.3.3.1 Service Mode (by DIP switch)<Incerter>
0015-2245
The machine is equipped with a set of service mode items used to adjust it or to run checks on operation. The
items may be executed from the machine or from its host machine.
- From the Inserter

See Maintenance>VR, LED, and Check Pins>DIP Switch.
- From the Finisher

1) Open the finisher front cover; then, remove the screw [1] and the cover [2].
2) Make adjustments and checks using the DIP switch [3] (SW382) and the push switch [4] (SW383/SW384/
SW385) found on the service PCB I.
[3]
[2]
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[1]
[4]
F-5-210
5-63
Chapter 5
T-5-9
SW382 driving the drive switchover motor Press ENTER to start. A press on + will start tray A,
while a press on - will start tray B. Press ENTER to
end.
SW382 driving tray pickup motor Press ENTER to start. A press on +/- will switch
over the speed (250, 500, 1100 mm/sec). Press
ENTER to end.
SW382 driving the feed motor Press ENTER to start (1100 mm/sec). Press ENTER
to end.
SW382 driving the tray A lift motor Press ENTER to start (1100 mms/sec). Press
ENTER to end.
SW382 driving the tray B lift motor
SW382 driving the tray registration clutch Press ENTER to start. It will stop automatically.
(ON for 500 msec)
SW382 Ageing Press ENTER to start and repeat the following

operations; press ENTER to end:
tray A up>50 sheets in tray A>tray A down>tray B
up>50 sheets in tray B>tray B down
1. tray A paper placement sensor
2. tray A pickup sensor
3. tray A registration sensor
4. tray A paper sensor
7. tray B paper placement sensor
8. tray B pickup sensor
9. tray B registration sensor
A press on the + switch to start the sensor in
question. The sensor in question is indicated on the
display (DSP381). If the sensor operation is normal,
1 goes on in response to the placement of paper,
while it flashes when the paper is removed.
5-64
Chapter 5
1. feed sensor
2. not used
3. feed sensor 2
4. tray A lower limit sensor
5. tray B lower limit sensor
6. drive switchover sensor
7. not used
8. upper cover open/closed sensor
9. inserter open/closed sensor
A press on the + switch moves the sensor in
question. The sensor in question is indicated on the
display (DSP381).
SW382 adjusting the tray A width (A4) 1) Set the DIP switch to suit the tray being adjusted
and the paper configuration.
2) Press ENTER.
3) Place A4 or LTR paper in the upper or lower tray.
(minimum width adjustment)
4) Press the + switch.
SW382 adjusting the tray B width (A4) 5) $
6) Press the - switch.
7) Press ENTER to end.
SW382 adjusting the tray A width (LTR)
SW382 adjusting the tray B width (LTR)
5-65
Chapter 5
5.4 Troubleshooting
5.4.1 Malfunction
5.4.1.1 Malfunction/Faulty Detection
5.4.1.1.1 The output is sent to tray B even when
tray A is selected.
0015-2247 [1]
[Case Study]
Description
Enabling the following in user mode will select tray
B as the destination of output (large-capacity
stacking mode): initial setup/registration>common
spec setup>large-capacity stacking mode.
F-5-211
Once the setting has been enabled (ON), th target of
output will be tray B, regardless of the selection 11) Detach the switch cover [1] by removing the
made on the control panel. screw [2].
Field Remedy
Disable (OFF) 'large-capacity stacking mode' in user [1]
mode so that the target of output may freely be
selected on the control panel.
5.4.1.1.2 Remedy for EEPROM Problem on
Finisher Controller PCB
0015-2248
Description
The remedy in case 'E505' is displayed at the time of
Finisher Controller PCB replacement is described
below.
Remedy in the Field
With the following procedure, resolve the
problem.
1) Turning off the copier.
2) Remove the old PCB from the finisher and
mount the new PCB. [2]
3) Remove EEP-ROM (IC107) from the new
PCB. (Do not throw the EEP-ROM away at this F-5-212
point.)
4) Remove EEP-ROM from the old PCB and set 12) Set the DIP SW382 [1] located on switch PCB as
it into the socket (ICS1) on the new PCB. the following:
5) Turn on the copier. If E505 is not displayed on
the copier, it is the end of the procedure (The
memory contents in the old PCB is backupped to
the new PCB.) SW382
DSP381
6) If E505 is displayed, go on to the next step.

(If E505 occurs once again, it is due to EEP-ROM
fault. Memory backup using the old EEP-ROM is
not succeeded.)
7) Turn off the copier, and replace the old EEP- SW381
ROM set into the socket on the new PCB to the
new EEP-ROM.
8) Turn on the finisher once again.
9) Turn on the copier, and make it in the standby
state. SW383 SW384 SW385
10) Open the front door, and insert a door switch
(-) (+) ENTER
F-5-213
5-66
Chapter 5
13) Execute the following adjustment.

Each press enables to execute initializing EEPROM
from SW385 to SW383 in order.
- Aligning plate width adjustment
- Stapling position adjustment (rear 1-point
binding)
- Stapling position adjustment (front 1-point
binding)
- Stapling position adjustment (2-point binding)
- Stuck stapling delivery adjustment (bottom
delivery)
- Stuck stapling delivery adjustment (saddle
delivery)
- Feeding belt position adjustment
- Saddle lead edge stopper position adjustment
- Punch hole position adjustment (vertical
- Punch hole position adjustment (feeding
direction)
5-67
Chapter 5
5.5 Outline of Electrical Components

5.5.1 Sensors (Finisher Unit)
0015-2249
PS32
PS34
PS33
PS35
PS5
PS9
PS8
PS3
PS2 PS4
PS24
PS7
PS26
PS6
PS25
PS31
PS29 PS30
PS1
PS28
PS27
PS18
PS21 PS42
PS22
PS12 PS23
PS16
PS17
PS20 PS13
PS15
PS11 PS14
PS19
F-5-214
5-68
Chapter 5
T-5-10

PS1 detects the state (open/closed) of the front FK2-0149
front cover open sensor 1422
cover
PS2 upper cover open/closed detects the state (open/closed) of the upper FK2-0149
1422
sensor cover
PS3 inlet sensor detects paper at the inlet WG8-5736 1002/1103
PS4 shift unit trail edge WG8-5736
detects paper in the shift unit 1004/1105
sensor
PS5 WG8-5736 100A/
upper delivery sensor detects paper in the upper delivery assembly
110B
PS6 lower delivery sensor detects paper in the lower delivery sensor WG8-5736 100E/110F
PS7 horizontal registration detects the home position of the horizontal FK2-0149
E566
HP sensor registration unit
PS8 shift roller unit HP detects the home position of the shift roller FK2-0149
E567
sensor unit
PS9 transport roller HP detects the home position of the transport FK2-0149
E568
sensor roller
PS11 front alignment HP detects the home position of the front FK2-0149
E537
sensor aligning plate
PS12 detects the home position of the rear aligning FK2-0149
rear alignment HP sensor E530
plate
PS13 assist HP sensor detects the home position of the assist unit FK2-0149 E514
PS14 stack delivery auxiliary detects the home position of the stack FK2-0149
E583
tray HP sensor delivery auxiliary tray
PS17 handling tray paper detects paper in the handling tray FK2-0149
sensor
PS18 swing motor rotation detects the rotation of the swing motor FK2-0149
sensor
PS19 shutter HP sensor detects home position of the shutter FK2-0149 E584
PS20 paddle rotation HP detects the home position of the paddle FK2-0149 E577
sensor rotation
PS21 paddle lifter HP sensor detects the home position of the paddle lifter FK2-0149 E577
operation
PS22 swing guide closed detects the opening operation of the swing FK2-0149 E535
sensor guide
PS23 swing guide open sensor detects closing operation of the swing guide FK2-0149 E535
PS24 paper trail edge push detects the home position of the paper trail FK2-0149 E57B
mechanism HP sensor edge push mechanism
PS25 transport belt HP sensor detects the home position of the transport FK2-0149 E578
belt
PS26 upper guide HP sensor detects the home position of the upper guide FK2-0149 E57C
PS27 stapling position HP detects the home position of stapling FK2-0149

sensor
5-69
Chapter 5

PS32 tray A paper sensor detects paper in tray A FK2-0149 E540
PS33 tray B paper sensor detects paper in tray B FK2-0149 E542
PS34 tray A lifter motor detects lifter operation of tray A FK2-0149 E540
rotation sensor
PS35 tray B lifer motor detects lifter operation of tray B FK2-0149 E542
rotation sensor
PS42 staple waste case full detects the state (full) of the staple waste case FK2-0149
sensor
T-5-11
PS1 J117
PS2 J117
PS3 J117
PS4 J463/J461 J278/J271 J118
PS5 J279/J271 J118
PS6 J116
PS7 J116
PS8 J116
PS9 J279/J271 J118
PS11 J257/J252 J104
PS12 J256/J252 J104
PS13 J256/J252 J104
PS14 J253/J252 J104
PS15 J257/J252 J104
PS16 J256/J252 J104
PS17 J256/J252 J104
PS18 J253/J252 J104
5-70
Chapter 5
PS19 J253/J252 J104
PS20 J253/J252 J104
PS21 J253/J252 J104
PS22 J253/J252 J104
PS23 J253/J252 J104
PS24 J116
PS25 J263/J251 J104
PS26 J263/J251 J104
PS27 J114
PS28 J114
PS29 J114
PS30 J114
PS31 J114
PS32 J109
PS33 J108
PS34 J109
PS35 J108
PS42 J121
5-71
Chapter 5
5.5.2 Microswitches (Finisher Unit)

0015-2250
MSW2
MSW4
MSW6
MSW5
MSW3
SW1
MSW7
MSW1
CB1
F-5-215
5-72
Chapter 5
T-5-12
Finisher
controller PCB
MSW1 front door switch detects the state (open/ WC4-5231 1422 J101
closed) of the front door
MSW2 tray approach detects the approach of the WC4-5159 E540 J101
switch tray
MSW3 tray safety switch detects the tray (front) for WC4-5159 J111
(front) safety
MSW4 tray safety switch detects the tray (rear) for WC4-5159 J111
(rear) safety
MSW5 stapler safety detects the stapler (rear) for FH7-6336 J101
switch (front) safety
MSW6 stapler safety detects the stapler (rear) for FH7-6336 J101
switch (rear) safety
MSW7 swing guide detects the swing guide for FH7-6336 J113
safety switch safety
SW1 main switch FK2-1741 J103
CB1 circuit breaker FH7-7625 J103
5-73
Chapter 5
5.5.3 Solenoids (Finisher Unit)

0015-2251
SL6
SL2
SL5
SL1 SL3
SL8 SL4
F-5-216
5-74
Chapter 5
T-5-13

SL1 buffer switchover solenoid FK2-1740
SL2 upper path solenoid FK2-1740
SL3 saddle path switchover solenoid FK2-1740
SL8 handling tray solenoid FK2-1782
T-5-14
Notation Transport motor driver PCB Handling tray driver PCB Finisher controller PCB
SL1 J117
SL2 J117
SL3 J116
SL4 J117
SL5 J117
SL6 J279/271 J118
SL8 J259/J252 J104
5-75
Chapter 5
5.5.4 Motors (Finisher Unit)

0015-2253
M22
M23
M3
M8
M4
M2
M5 M6
M7
M16
M17
M1
M20
M25
M18
M21
M12
M15
M10
M13
M9
M14
M11
M19
F-5-217
5-76
Chapter 5
T-5-15

M1 inlet transport motor FK2-1704
M2 shift transport motor FK2-1705
M3 pre-buffer transport motor FK2-1705
M4 buffer motor FK2-1704
M5 delivery motor FK2-1704
M6 horizontal registration detection unit FK2-1709 E566
shift motor
M7 horizontal shift motor FK2-1710 E567
M8 transport roller shift motor FK2-1711 E568
M9 front alignment motor FK2-1712 E537
M10 rear alignment motor FK2-1712 E530
M11 paper edge stopper shift motor FK2-1714 E57A
M12 assist motor FK2-1715 E514
M13 stack delivery auxiliary motor FK2-1716 E57B
M14 paddle rotation motor FK2-1717 E577
M15 paddle lifter motor FK2-1718 E577
M16 paper trail edge push motor FK2-1718 E57B
M17 transport belt shift motor FK2-1718 E578
M18 swing guide motor FH6-1644 E535
M19 stack delivery motor FK2-1722
M20 upper guide motor FK2-1718 E57B
M21 stapler shift motor FK2-1724 E532
M22 tray A lifter motor FK2-1725 E540
M23 tray B lifter motor FK2-1725 E542
M25 stapler motor FM2-6541 E531
T-5-16
Transport motor Handling tray Stapler driver PCB tray A motor driver Finisher controller
driver PCB driver PCB PCB/tray B motor PCB
Notation driver PCB
M1 J273/J271 J118
M2 J278/J271 J118
M3 J276/J271 J118
M4 J277/J271 J118
M5 J275/J271 J118
M6 J276/J271 J118
5-77
Chapter 5
Transport motor Handling tray Stapler driver PCB tray A motor driver Finisher controller
driver PCB driver PCB PCB/tray B motor PCB
Notation driver PCB
M7 J277/J271 J118
M8 J279/J271 J118
M9 J257/J252 J104
M10 J256/J252 J104
M11 J257/J252 J104
M12 J264/J252 J104
M13 J260/J252 J104
M14 J260/J252 J104
M15 J259/J252 J104
M16 J258/J252 J104
M17 J263/J252 J104
M18 J264/J252 J104
M19 J264/J252 J104
M20 J263/J252 J104
M21 J317/J311 J114
M22 J291/J292 J109
M23 J291/J292 J108
M25 J315/J311 J114
5-78
Chapter 5
5.5.5 Fans (Finisher Unit)

0015-2254
FM2
FM3
FM1
F-5-218
T-5-17
Notation Name Parts No. Error Finisher controller PCB
FM1 power supply fan FK2-0636 E551 J103
5-79
Chapter 5
5.5.6 PCBs (Finisher Unit)

0015-2255
UN5
UN2
UN6 UN4
UN9
UN8
UN7
F-5-219
T-5-18

UN2 Finisher controller PCB FM2-5695 Control the finisher
UN4 Intermediate processing tray driver
FM2-5697 Control the load on the intermediate processing tray
PCB
UN5 Feed motor driver PCB FM2-5698 Control the motor for the feed system
UN6 Staple driver PCB FM2-5699 Control the stapler
UN7 Fuse box PCB FM2-5700 Detect overcurrent
UN8 Transceiver PCB FM2-4858 Control the communication with the host machine
UN9 Optional switch PCB FM2-5719 Control the adjustment switch for service
5-80
Chapter 5
5.5.7 Sensors (Saddle Stitcher Unit)

0015-2256
PS101
PS103
PS104
PS111
PS113
PS110
PS120 PS105
PS109
PS121
PS107
PS108 PS106
PS119 PS118
PS117
PS122
PS116
F-5-220
5-81
Chapter 5
T-5-19

PS101 saddle inlet sensor detects paper at the saddle inlet FK2-0149 1042/1143
PS103 detects the trail edge of paper in the
saddle small sensor FK2-0149 1044/1145
vertical path assembly 1
PS104 saddle pull-in roller HP detects the home position of the saddle
FK2-0149
sensor pull-in roller
PS105 detects paper in the vertical path
saddle vertical path sensor FK2-0149 1147
assembly
PS106 saddle lead edge path detects paper in the saddle lead edge
FK2-0149
sensor path
PS107 saddle lead edge stopper detects the home position of the saddle
FK2-0149 E5F0
HP sensor lead edge stopper
PS108 saddle aligning plate HP detects the home position of the saddle
FK2-0149 E5F3
sensor aligning plate
PS109 saddle roller guide HP detects the home position of the saddle
FK2-0149 E5F2
sensor roller guide
PS110 saddle paper stop plate HP detects the home position of the saddle
FK2-0149
sensor paper stop plate
PS111 saddle pre-pressing HP detects paper in front of the saddle
FK2-0149 104A/114B
sensor pressing unit
PS113 detects the home position of the saddle
saddle HP sensor FK2-0149 1054/1155 E5F9
pressing unit
PS116 saddle delivery tray sensor
detects paper in the saddle delivery tray FK2-0149
1
PS117 saddle delivery sub tray detects paper in the saddle delivery sub
FK2-0149
sensor tray
PS118 saddle paper stop plate detects the rotation of the saddle paper FK2-0149 E5F6
motor rotation sensor stop plate motor
PS119 saddle folding/transport detects the rotation of the saddle FK2-0149 E5F1
motor rotation sensor folding/transport motor
PS120 saddle pressing motor detects the rotation of the saddle FK2-0149
rotation sensor pressing motor
PS121 saddle pressing positioning detects saddle pressing position FK2-0149 E5F9
sensor
PS122 saddle delivery tray sensor
detects paper in the saddle delivery tray FK2-0149
2
T-5-20
Notation Handling tray driver PCB Saddle stitcher controller PCB
PS101 J209
PS103 J209
PS104 J209
PS105 J209
5-82
Chapter 5
Notation Handling tray driver PCB Saddle stitcher controller PCB
PS106 J106
PS107 J212
PS108 J212
PS109 J209
PS110 J209
PS111 J204
PS113 J204
PS116 J255 J105
PS117 J255 J105
PS118 J213
PS119 J212
PS120 J204
PS121 J204
PS122 J255 J105
5-83
Chapter 5
5.5.8 Motors (Saddle Stitcher Unit)

0015-2257
M101
M110 M102
M105
M109 M103
M104
M107
M106
M108
F-5-221
5-84
Chapter 5
T-5-21
Handling Saddle stitcher

Notati tray delivery controller PCB Finisher
Name Parts No. Error
on PCB controller PCB
M101 saddle transport motor FK2-1728 J205/J203 J130

M102 saddle pull-in roller shift motor FK2-1729 J204/J203 J130
M103 saddle alignment motor FK2-1730 E5F3 J211/J203 J130
M104 saddle guide motor FK2-1731 E5F2 J211/J203 J130
M105 saddle lead edge stopper motor FK2-1732 E5F0 J204/J203 J130
M106 saddle paper stop plate motor FK2-1733 E5F6 J206/J203 J130
M107 saddle folding/transport motor FK2-1734 E5F1 J210/J203 J130
M108 saddle delivery belt motor FK2-1735 J255/J252 J104
M109 saddle pressing motor FK2-1736 E5FA J210/J203 J130

M110 saddle stitcher FC6-6601 E5F4 J207/J203 J130
5-85
Chapter 5
5.5.9 Solenoids(Saddle Stitcher Unit)

0015-2258
SL101
SL102
F-5-222
T-5-22
Saddle stitcher
Notation Name Parts No. Finisher controller PCB
controller PCB
SL101 saddle flapper solenoid 1 FK2-1783 J204/J203 J130

SL102 saddle flapper solenoid 2 FK2-1783 J204/J203 J130
5-86
Chapter 5
5.5.10 PCBs (Saddle Stitcher Unit)

0015-2259
UN3
F-5-223
T-5-23

UN3 Saddle stitcher controller PCB FM2-5696 Control the load on the saddle
5-87
Chapter 5
5.6 Variable Resistors (VR), Light-Emitting Diodes (LED), and Check

Pins by PCB
5.6.1 Overview
0015-2261
Of the LEDs and check pins used in the machine, those needed during servicing in the field are discussed.
Do not touch the check pins not found in the list herein. They are exclusively for factory use, and require
special tools and a high degree of accuracy.

0015-2260
F-5-224
T-5-24
Switch Switch function

SW1 Use to the upgrading
5.7 Upgrading
5.7.1 Upgrading
0015-2262
Perform upgrade of this machine by connecting a copy machine.

Refer to the service manual of imagePRESS C7000 Series for a detailed procedure.
5-88
Chapter 5
5.8 Service Tools

5.8.1 Solvents and Oils
0015-2263
T-5-25
No. Name Description Composition Remarks

1 Vic Clean Cleaning: Hydrocarbon(fluorine Do not bring near fire.
e.g., glass, family) Procure locally.
plastic, rubber parts, Alcohol Isopropyl alcohol may be
external covers Surface activating agent substituted.
Water
2 Lubricant Sliding units Silicone oil MOLYKOTE EM30-L
5-89
Chapter 6
ERROR CODE

Contents
Contents
6.1 Jam Codes ......................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1.1 Jam Codes .................................................................................................................. 6-1
6.2 Error Codes........................................................................................................ 6-2
6.2.1 Error Codes................................................................................................................... 6-2

Chapter 6
6.1 Jam Codes

6.1.1 Jam Codes
T-6-1
Code Jam type Sensor Jam condition
1002 Inlet sensor delay jam PS3 In a case that the inlet sensor (PS3) does not detect a paper
after the specified time (distance) has been passed from the
delivery signal reception from the connected equipment.
1103 Inlet sensor stationary jam PS3 In a case that a paper does not pass through the inlet sensor
(PS3) even feeding it for the specified time (distance) after
the sensor detects it.
1004 Shift unit sensor delay jam PS4 In a case that the shift unit sensor (PS4) does not detect a
paper even feeding it for the specified time (distance) after the
inlet sensor (PS3) detects it.
1105 Shift unit sensor stationary jam PS4 In a case that a paper does not pass through the shift unit
sensor (PS4) even feeding it for the specified time (distance)
after the inlet sensor (PS3) detects it.
1006 Buffer path 1 sensor delay jam UN13 In a case that the buffer path 1 sensor (UN13) does not detect
a paper even feeding it for the specified time (distance) after
the shift unit sensor (PS4) detects it.
1107 Buffer path 1 sensor stationary UN13 In a case that a paper does not pass through the buffer path 1
jam sensor (UN13) even feeding it for the specified time
(distance) after the shift unit sensor (PS4) detects it.
1008 Buffer path 2 sensor delay jam UN14 In a case that the buffer path 2 sensor (UN14) does not detect
a paper even feeding it for the specified time (distance) after
the shift unit sensor (PS4) detects it.
1109 Buffer path 2 sensor stationary UN14 In a case that a paper does not pass through the buffer path 2
(distance) after the shift unit sensor (PS4) detects it.
100A Upper delivery sensor delay PS5 In a case that the upper delivery sensor (PS5) does not detect
jam a paper even feeding it for the specified time (distance) after
the buffer path 2 sensor (UN14) detects it.
110B Upper delivery sensor PS5 In a case that a paper does not pass through the upper delivery
stationary jam sensor (PS5) even feeding it for the specified time (distance)
after the buffer path 2 sensor (UN14) detects it.
100E Lower delivery sensor delay PS6 In a case that the lower delivery sensor (PS6) does not detect
jam a paper even feeding it for the specified time (distance) after
the buffer path 2 sensor (UN14) detects it.
110F Lower delivery sensor PS6 In a case that a paper does not pass through the lower delivery
stationary jam sensor (PS6) even feeding it for the specified time (distance)
after the buffer path 2 sensor (UN14) detects it.
100C Lower path sensor delay jam UN24 In a case that lower path sensor (UN24) does not detect a
paper even feeding it for the specified time (distance) after the
buffer path 2 sensor (UN14) detects it.
110D Lower path sensor stationary UN24 In a case that a paper does not pass through the lower path
(distance) after the buffer path 2 sensor (UN14) detects it.
1320 Residual jam (at power ON) In a case that there is a residual paper in the feeding area when
turning on the power.
1721 Residual jam (at the initial In a case that there is a residual paper in the feeding area
rotation) during the initial rotation of the host machine.
1422 Door open MSW1 In case of detecting cover opening of the front cover switch
(MSW1) during the operation.
6-1
Chapter 6
6.2 Error Codes

6.2.1 Error Codes
T-6-2

code classification
0001 02 Malfunction in communication with Turn power OFF/ ON, re-attach communication
ARCNET network cable/ terminal resistor, replace transceiver PCB.

0001 02 Data communication could not be Check connections of finisher controller PCB and DC
performed properly and failed after controller PCB connectors.
three retries. - Replace finisher controller PCB.
- Replace DC controller PCB.
E503 Communication error between finisher and options

and option and trimmer.
trimmer manual.)

and inserter and trimmer.
trimmer manual.)
E505 EEPROM error

0001 02 Data malfunction in EEPROM on - Replace the EEPROM on the finisher controller
finisher controller PCB PCB.
0004 02 Response timed out - Replace finisher controller PCB.
replace with a new EEPROM.
0007 02 Finisher controller PCB malfunction - Replace finisher controller PCB.

replace with a new EEPROM.D45
6-2
Chapter 6

code classification
E509 Software compatibility malfunction
0002 02 Boot ROM malfunction Replace the finisher controller PCB with the correct
one.
it on the new board.
0003 02 Non-supported option (professional Remove professional puncher.
puncher) connected
0004 02 Non-supported option (trimmer B-1) Connect trimmer C-1.
connected
E514 ASSIST operation error
8001 02 ASSIST HP sensor does not come - Check ASSIST HP sensor connectors.
ON within 5 sec. after ASSIST - Check ASSIST motor connectors.
motor operation begins. - Replace ASSIST HP sensor.
8002 02 ASSIST HP sensor does not go OFF - Check ASSIST HP sensor connectors.
within 5 sec. after ASSIST motor - Check ASSIST motor connectors.
operation begins. - Replace ASSIST HP sensor.
E515 Inserter malfunction or stacker feed motor error

8001 02 Switching gear does not clear drive Check drive switching motor connectors, replace.
(Inserter) switching sensor home position after
8002 Switching gear does not reach drive Check drive switching motor connectors, replace.
switching sensor home position after
8003 Tray A does not clear home position Check tray A lifting motor connectors, replace.
after tray A lifter motor has been
8004 Tray A lifting motor does not reach Check tray A lifting motor connectors, replace.
8005 Tray B does not clear home position Check tray B lifting motor connectors, replace.
after tray B lifter motor has been
8006 Tray B lifting motor does not reach Check tray B lifting motor connectors, replace.
6-3
Chapter 6

code classification
E515 8007 Improper value detected for tray A Adjust tray width.
(cont width detection sensor or tray B
width detection sensor.
inue)
8010 51, 52 Offset Section DriveMotor M07 An alarm has occurred on the offset section drive
Alarm motor driver PCB A07.
E530 Rear alignment malfunction
8001 02 Rear alignment HP sensor does not - Check rear alignment HP sensor connectors.
come on after the rear alignment - Check rear alignment motor connectors.
motor has been running for 5 sec. - Replace rear alignment HP sensor.
8002 02 Rear alignment sensor does not go - Check rear alignment HP sensor connectors.
OFF within 1 sec. of rear alignment - Check rear alignment motor connectors.
motor operation starting. - Replace rear alignment HP sensor.
E531 Staple malfunction

8001 02 Staple position HP sensor does not - Check the staple unit connectors.
come ON within 500 msec. after - Replace the staple unit.
staple motor operation begins. - Check the staple unit HP sensor connectors.
- Replace the finisher unit controller PCB.E89
8002 02 Staple HP sensor does not go OFF - Check the staple unit connectors.
within 500 msec. after staple motor - Replace the staple unit.
operation begins. - Check the staple unit HP sensor connectors.
E532 Staple slide malfunction

8001 02 Staple HP sensor does not come ON - Check the staple shift motor connectors.
within 500 msec. after staple shift - Replace the staple shift motor..
6-4
Chapter 6

code classification
E532 8002 02 Staple HP sensor does not go OFF - Check the staple shift motor connectors.
(cont within 500 msec. after staple shift - Replace the staple shift motor..
inue) - Replace the staple unit HP sensor.
E535 Swing guide malfunction

does not come ON within 2 sec. after - Replace the swing guide motor.
does not go OFF within 2 sec. after - Replace the swing guide motor.
E537 Front alignment malfunction

8001 02 Front alignment HP sensor does not - Check front alignment HP sensor connectors.
come on after the front alignment - Check front alignment motor connectors.
motor has been running for 5 sec. - Replace front alignment HP sensor.
8002 02 Front alignment sensor does not go - Check front alignment HP sensor connectors.
OFF within 5 sec. of front alignment - Check front alignment motor connectors.
motor operation starting. - Replace front alignment HP sensor.
E540 Tray A (upper tray) malfunction
8001 02 Tray A rotation detection sensor does - Check tray A rotation detection sensor connectors.
not come ON within 300ms after the - Check tray A lifter motor connectors.
tray A lifter motor operation begins. - Replace tray A rotation detection sensor.
- Replace tray A lifter motor.
8002 02 Tray A is detected at a lower position - Check tray A area sensor connectors.
than tray B. - Replace tray A area sensor.
6-5
Chapter 6

code classification
E540 8003 02 Tray approach switch faulty - Check the tray approach switch connectors.
(cont operation.. - Replace the tray approach switch.
- Replace the finisher approach PCB.
inue)
80FF 02 Tray lifting operation does not - Check the tray A rotation detection sensor
lifter motor operation has started. - Check the tray A lifter motor connectors.
- Replace the tray A rotation detection sensor.
- Replace the tray A lifter motor.
E542 Tray B (lower tray) malfunction
8001 02 Tray B rotation detection sensor does - Check the tray B rotation detection sensor
not come ON within 300ms after the connectors.
tray B lifter motor operation begins. - Check the tray B lifter motor connectors.
8002 02 Tray B is detected at a higher - Check tray B area sensor connectors.
position than the intermediate - Replace tray B area sensor.
processing delivery guide. - Replace the finisher controller PCB.
80FF 02 Tray B lifting operation does not - Check the tray B rotation detection sensor
B lifter motor operation has started. - Check the tray B lifter motor connectors.
E551 Fan malfunction
8001 02 Lock signal detected after power - Check the power supply fan connectors.
supply fan has been operating for 2 - Faulty power supply fan.
sec. or longer. -Replace the finisher controller PCB.
8002 02 Lock signal detected after paper feed - Check the paper feed fan connectors.
fan has been operating for 2 sec. or - Faulty paper feed fan.
longer. -Replace the finisher controller PCB.
E566 Horizontal registration detection malfunction

not come ON within 5 sec. after side and side registration sensor connectors.
not go OFF within 5 sec. after side and side registration sensor connectors.
6-6
Chapter 6

code classification
E567 Shift roller operation malfunction
come ON within 5 sec. after side roller unit HP sensor connectors.
go OFF within 5 sec. after side roller unit HP sensor connectors.
E568 Feed roller disengage operation malfunction

8001 02 Feed roller HP sensor does not come - Check the feed roller disengage motor and feed
ON within 5 sec. after feed roller roller HP sensor connectors.
8002 02 Feed roller HP sensor does not go - Check the feed roller disengage motor and feed
OFF within 5 sec. after feed roller roller HP sensor connectors.
E577 Paddle rotation/ lifting operation malfunction
come ON within 5 sec. after paddle HP sensor connectors.
rotation HP sensor.
go OFF within 5 sec. after paddle HP sensor connectors.
rotation HP sensor.
8003 02 Paddle lifter HP sensor does not -Check the paddle lifter motor and paddle lifter HP
come ON within 5 sec. after the sensor connectors.
paddle lifter motor operation begins. - Replace the paddle lifter motor and the paddle lifter
HP sensor.
8004 02 Paddle lifter HP sensor does not go -Check the paddle lifter motor and paddle lifter HP
OFF within 5 sec. after the paddle sensor connectors.
lifter motor operation begins. - Replace the paddle lifter motor and the paddle lifter
HP sensor.
6-7
Chapter 6

code classification
E578 Rollette malfunction
8001 02 Feed belt HP sensor does not come - Check feed belt shift motor and feed belt HP sensor
ON within 5 sec. after feed belt shift connectors.
sensor.
8002 02 Feed belt HP sensor does not go OFF - Check feed belt shift motor and feed belt HP sensor
within 5 sec. after feed belt shift connectors.
sensor.
E57A Paper edge stopper operation malfunction
come ON within 5 sec. after paper edge area HP sensor connectors.
edge stopper motor operation begins. - Replace the paper edge stopper shift motor and
go OFF within 5 sec. after paper edge edge area HP sensor connectors.
stopper motor operation begins. - Replace the paper edge stopper shift motor and
8003 02 Paper edge stopper is obstructed by - Check paper edge stopper shift motor connectors.
stapler and cannot operate. - Replace paper edge stopper shift motor.
E57B Paper trailing edge retainer operation malfunction
sensor does not come ON within 5 trailing edge retainer HP sensor connectors.
sensor does not come OFF within 5 trailing edge retainer HP sensor connectors.
E57C Upper guide operation malfunction

8001 02 Upper guide HP sensor does not - Check upper guide motor and upper guide HP sensor
come ON within 5 sec. after upper connectors.
guide motor operation begins. . - Replace upper guide motor and upper guide HP
sensor.
8002 02 Upper guide HP sensor does not go - Check upper guide motor and upper guide HP sensor
OFF within 5 sec. after upper guide connectors.
motor operation begins. . - Replace upper guide motor and upper guide HP
sensor.
6-8
Chapter 6

code classification
E583 Bundle delivery auxiliary tray operation malfunction
sensor does not come ON within 5 bundle delivery auxiliary tray HP sensor connectors
sec. after bundle delivery auxiliary bundle delivery auxiliary tray motor
tray motor operation begins. -Replace bundle delivery auxiliary tray motor and
sensor does not go OFF within 5 sec. bundle delivery auxiliary tray HP sensor connectors
after bundle delivery auxiliary tray bundle delivery auxiliary tray motor
motor operation begins. -Replace bundle delivery auxiliary tray motor and
E584 Shutter malfunction

8001 02 Shutter HP sensor does not come ON -Check paddle rotation motor and shutter HP sensor
connectors.
8002 02 Shutter HP sensor does not go OFF -Check paddle rotation motor and shutter HP sensor
connectors.
E5F0 Saddle positioning plate malfunction
8001 02 Stopper HP sensor does not come - Check stopper motor and stopper HP sensor
(Saddle) ON within 5 sec. after stopper motor connectors.
8002 Stopper HP sensor does not go OFF - Check stopper motor and stopper HP sensor
within 5 sec. after stopper motor connectors.
8010 51, 52 Stack tray overflow Stack tray overflow

The tray lower dead center sensor is activated during
the stack delivery.
E5F1 Saddle folding malfunction

8001 02 Fold/ feed motor rotation detection -Check fold/ feed motor and fold/ feed motor rotation
(Saddle) sensor does not come ON within 5 detection sensor connectors.
sec. after fold/ feed motor operation -Replace fold/ feed motor and fold/ feed motor
begins. rotation detection sensor.
6-9
Chapter 6

code classification
E5F2 Saddle roller guide HP sensor malfunction or saddle guide motor malfunction
not come ON within 5 sec. after sensor connectors.
saddle guide motor operation begins. -Replace saddle guide motor and saddle roller guide
HP sensor.
not go OFF within 5 sec. after saddle sensor connectors.
guide motor operation begins. -Replace saddle guide motor and saddle roller guide
HP sensor.
E5F3 Saddle alignment guide
does not come ON within 5 sec. after plate HP sensor connectors.
does not go OFF within 5 sec. after plate HP sensor connectors.
E5F4 Saddle staple malfunction
8001 02 Saddle unit not detected in home -Check stitcher unit connectors.
8002 02 Saddle unit does not leave home -Check stitcher unit connectors.
E5F6 Saddle paper strike plate operation malfunction
does not come ON within 800ms. paper strike plate HP sensor connectors.
after saddle paper strike plate motor -Replace saddle paper strike plate motor and saddle
6-10
Chapter 6

code classification
E5FA Saddle press malfunction
8000 02 Saddle press position sensor does not -Check saddle press motor and saddle press position
come ON within 200ms. after saddle sensor connectors.
press motor operation begins. -Replace saddle press motor and saddle press position
sensor.
8001 02 Saddle press HP sensor does not -Check saddle press motor and saddle press HP sensor
come ON within 1 sec. after saddle connectors.
press motor operation begins. -Replace saddle press motor and saddle press HP
sensor.
8002 02 Saddle press HP sensor does not go -Check saddle press motor and saddle press HP sensor
OFF within 1 sec. after saddle press connectors.
motor operation begins. -Replace saddle press motor and saddle press HP
sensor.
E5FB Saddle disengage operation malfunction
not come ON within 3 sec. after HP sensor connectors.
saddle pull-in roller disengage motor -Replace saddle pull-in roller and saddle pull-in roller
not go OFF within 3 sec. after saddle HP sensor connectors.
pull-in roller disengage motor -Replace saddle pull-in roller and saddle pull-in roller
6-11
APPENDIX

1 General Circuit Diagram
List Of Signals(finisher)
T-1-1

ASSIST-HP-SEN assist motor home position detection signal BTRY-SHIMEN-SEN* tray B paper surface sensor detection signal INPASS-M-Clk inlet transport motor clock signal
ASSIST-M-8FG* assist motor rotation detection signal BTRY-SL-ON* auxiliary tray solenoid signal INPASS-M-CW inlet transport motor drive signal
ASSIST-M-CLK assist motor clock signal BUFF2-SEN* buffer No. 2 sensor detection signal INPASS-M-IHA inlet transport motor ON signal
ASSIST-M-CW* assist motor drive signal BUFF-M-Clk buffer motor clock signal INPASS-M-IHB inlet transport motor current switch signal
ASSIST-M-IHA assist motor current switch signal 1 BUFF-M-CW buffer motor drive signal IRIGUCHI-SEN inlet sensor detection signal
ASSIST-M-ILB assist motor current switch signal 2 BUFF-M-IA buffer motor current switch signal 1 ISA-SEL paper surface sensor AD input selector signal 3
ASSIST-R-SL1 assist roller shift solenoid signal 1 BUFF-M-IB buffer motor current switch signal 2 KOUTAN-HP-SEN trail edge pushing home position detection signal
ATRY-M-Clk tray A lift motor clock signal BUFF-PASS-SEN* buffer path sensor detection signal KOUTAN-M-A paper trail edge pushing motor drive signal A
ATRY-M-CW tray A lift motor drive signal BUFF-SL-ON buffer path switch solenoid signal KOUTAN-M-B paper trail edge pushing motor drive signal B
ATRY-M-IA tray A lift motor current switch signal 1 BUNDLE-M-8FG* stack delivery motor rotation detection signal KOUTAN-M-IHA* paper trail edge pushing motor current switch signal
ATRY-M-IB tray A lift motor current switch signal 2 BUNDLE-M-CLK stack delivery motor clock signal MOTARE-SEL paper surface sensor AD input selector signal 1
ATRY-POSS-SEN1 tray A area sensor detection signal 1 BUNDLE-M-CW* stack delivery motor drive signal OTRY-HP-SEN stack delivery auxiliary tray home position detection signal
ATRY-POSS-SEN2 tray A area sensor detection signal 2 BUNDLE-M-IHA stack delivery motor current switch signal 1 OTRY-M-A stack delivery auxiliary tray motor drive signal A
ATRY-POSS-SEN3 tray A area sensor detection signal 3 BUNDLE-M-IHB stack delivery motor current switch signal 2 OTRY-M-B stack delivery auxiliary tray motor drive signal B
ATRY-POSS-SEN4 tray A area motor detection signal 4 DN-SORT-SEN lower delivery sensor detection signal OTRY-M-IHA* stack delivery auxiliary tray motor start-up signal
ATRY-P-SEN tray A paper sensor detection signal EXP-M-CLK delivery motor clock signal PASS-M-Clk pre-buffer transport motor clock signal
ATRY-SHIMEN-SEN* tray A paper surface sensor detection signal EXP-M-CW delivery motor rotation direction switch signal PASS-M-CW pre-buffer transport motor drive signal
BIN-DETECT-SEN1 paper edge sensor detection signal 1 EXP-M-IHA delivery motor current switch signal 1 PASS-M-FG* pre-buffer transport rotation detection signal
BIN-DETECT-SEN2 paper edge sensor detection signal 2 EXP-M-ILB delivery motor current switch signal 2 PASS-M-IA pre-buffer transport motor current switch signal 1
BJOG-HP-SEN rear alignment motor home position detection signal FAN-ERR power supply fan error detection signal PASS-M-IB pre-buffer transport motor current switch signal 2
BJOG-M-Clk rear alignment motor clock signal FEEDROLLER-PARTM-A transport roller shift motor drive signal A PDL-M-Clk paddle rotation motor clock signal
BJOG-M-CW* rear alignment motor drive signal FEEDROLLER-PARTM-B transport roller shift motor drive signal B PDL-M-CW* paddle rotation motor drive signal
BJOG-M-IHA* rear alignment motor current switch signal FEEDROLLER-PARTM-IA transport roller shift motor current switch signal 1 PDL-M-IHA* paddle rotation motor current switch signal
BTRY-ISA-SEN* tray bias sensor detection signal FEEDROLLER-PARTM-IB transport roller shift motor current switch signal 2 PDL-ROTATE-HP-SEN paddle rotation home position detection signal
BTRY-KILL tray B disengagement signal FF-M-4FG* folding/transport motor rotation detection signal PDL-UPDOWN-HP-SEN paddle lift home position detection signal
BTRY-M-Clk tray B lift motor clock signal FJOG-HP-SEN front alignment motor home position detection signal PDL-UP-M-A paddle lift motor drive signal A
BTRY-M-CW tray B lift motor drive signal FJOG-M-Clk front alignment motor clock signal PDL-UP-M-B paddle lift motor drive signal B
BTRY-M-IA tray B lift motor current switch signal 1 FJOG-M-CW* front alignment motor drive signal PDL-UP-M-IHA* paddle lift motor current switch signal
BTRY-M-IB tray B lift motor current switch signal 2 FJOG-M-IHA* front alignment motor current switch signal RLT-HP-SEN transport belt shift home position detection signal
BTRY-POSS-SEN1 tray B position sensor detection signal 1 FRONT-BIN-M-A paper edge stopper shift motor drive signal A RLT-M-A transport belt shift motor drive signal A
BTRY-POSS-SEN2 tray B position sensor detection signal 2 FRONT-BIN-M-B paper edge stopper shift motor drive signal B RLT-M-B transport belt shift motor drive signal B
BTRY-POSS-SEN3 tray B position sensor detection signal 3 FRONT-BIN-M-IHA* paper edge stopper shift motor current switch signal RLT-M-IHA* transport belt shift motor current switch signal
BTRY-POSS-SEN4 tray B position sensor detection signal 4 FRONT-SW-OPEN front door open detection signal ROLLER-HP transport roller home position detection signal
BTRY-P-SEN tray B paper sensor detection signal HOOK-FULL-SEN staple waste case full detection signal 1 SDL-SL-ON saddle path switch solenoid signal

SHIFT-FEED-M-CW shift transport motor drive signal TRY-MSW* tray approach detecting switch detection signal
SHIFT-FEED-M-IA shift transport motor current switch signal 1 UP-DOOR-OPEN upper cover open detection signal
SHIFT-FEED-M-IB shift transport motor current switch signal 2 UPPASS-SL-ON* upper path switch solenoid signal
SHIFTÅ[FEED-M-CLK shift transport motor clock signal UPPERGUIDE-HP-SEN upper guide home position sensor signal
SHIFTUNIT-HP-SEN shift roller unit home position detection signal UPPERGUIDE-M-A upper guide motor drive signal A
SHIFTUNIT-POST-SEN shift unit trail edge sensor detection signal UPPERGUIDE-M-B upper guide motor drive signal B
SHIMENN-SEL paper surface sensor AD input selector signal 2 UPPERGUIDE-M-IHA* upper guide motor current switch signal
SHITAPASU-SEN lower path sensor detection signal UP-SORT-SEN upper delivery sensor detection signal
SHUTTER-HP-SEN shutter position detection signal YDG-CLS-SEN* swing guide closed detection signal
SIDEREJI-HP horizontal registration detection unit home position detec- YDG-HP-SEN swing guide open detection signal
tion signal
SIDEREJI-M-A horizontal registration detection unit shift motor drive sig- YDM-H-SPEED swing guide motor high-speed setting signal
nal A
SIDEREJI-M-A* horizontal registration detection unit shift motor drive sig- YDM-L-SPEED swing guide motor low-speed setting signal
nal A*
SIDEREJI-M-B horizontal registration detection unit shift motor drive sig- YDM-M-SPEED swing guide motor middle-speed setting mode
nal B
SIDEREJI-M-B* horizontal registration detection unit shift motor drive sig- YDM-ON* swing guide motor drive signal
nal B*
SIDEREJI-M-IHA horizontal registration detection unit shift motor current

switch signal 1
SIDEREJI-M-ILB horizontal registration detection unit shift motor current

switch signal 2
SIDEREJI-SEN* horizontal registration sensor detection signal
SIDEREJI-SHIFT-M-CLK horizontal registration shift motor clock signal
SIDEREJI-SHIFT-M-CW horizontal registration shift motor rotation direction switch

signal
SIDEREJI-SHIFT-M-IA horizontal registration shift motor current switch signal 1
SIDEREJI-SHIFT-M-IB horizontal registration shift motor current switch signal 2
STP-HP-SEN* stapler home position detection signal
STP-M-CCW* stapler motor direction switch signal
STP-M-CW* stapler motor drive signal
STP-SLDM-CLK stapler shift motor clock signal
STP-SLDM-CW stapler shift motor drive signal
STP-SLDM-IA stapler shift motor current switch signal
STP-SLDM-IB stapler shift motor current switch signal
STRY-P-SEN handling tray paper detection signal
STRY-SL-ON handling tray solenoid drive signal
SUDDLE-SUBTRAY-SEN saddle sub tray sensor detection signal

List Of Signals(saddle finisher)
T-1-2
Notation Signal name Notation Signal name Signal name
BUNDLE-DELIVERY-SEN saddle stack delivery sensor signal SDL-FEED-M-FG saddle transport motor rotation detection signal
CONVEYOR-M-A saddle transport belt motor drive signal A SDL-FEED-M-IHA saddle transport motor current switch signal A
CONVEYOR-M-B saddle transport belt motor drive signal B SDL-FEED-M-ILB saddle transport motor current switch signal B
CONVEYOR-M-IHA* saddle transport belt motor current switch signal SDL-INLET-SEN saddle inlet sensor signal
CONVEYOR-P-SEN1 saddle transport belt paper detection signal 1 SMALL-SEN saddle small-size paper sensor signal
CONVEYOR-P-SEN2 saddle transport belt paper detection signal 2 STAPLE-HP-SEN saddle stapling home position detection signal
DRAWROLLER-HP-SEN saddle pull-in roller home position detection signal STAPLE-LS2 saddle staple detection signal 2
DRAWROLLER-M-A saddle pull-in roller shift motor drive signal A STOPPER-HP-SEN saddle lead edge stopper home position detection signal
DRAWROLLER-M-B saddle pull-in roller shift motor drive signal B STOPPER-M-A saddle lead edge stopper motor drive signal A
DRAWROLLER-M-IHA saddle pull-in roller shift motor current switch signal STOPPER-M-B saddle lead edge stopper motor drive signal B
FLAP-SL1 saddle flapper solenoid signal 1 STOPPER-M-IHA saddle lead edge stopper motor current switch signal
FLAP-SL2 saddle flapper solenoid signal 2 STP-M-CCW saddle staple motor CCW rotation drive signal
FOLD-M-CCW saddle fold transport motor CCW rotation drive signal STP-M-CW saddle stapler motor CW rotation drive signal
FOLD-M-CW saddle fold transport motor CW rotation drive signal THRUST-CLK-SEN saddle butting motor clock sensor signal
FOLD-M-PWM saddle fold transport motor PWM signal THRUST-HP-SEN saddle butting home position detection signal
JOG-HP-SEN saddle alignment home position detection signal THRUST-M-CCW saddle butting motor CCW rotation drive signal
JOG-M-A saddle alignment motor drive signal A THRUST-M-CW saddle butting motor CW rotation drive signal
JOG-M-A* saddle alignment motor drive signal A* THRUST-M-PWM saddle butting motor PWM signal
JOG-M-B saddle alignment motor drive signal B TOP-PATH-SEN saddle lead edge path detection signal
JOG-M-B* saddle alignment motor drive signal B*
JOG-M-IHA saddle alignment motor current switch signal
LENGTH-PATH-SEN saddle vertical path sensor signal
PRESS-CLK-SEN saddle pressing motor clock signal
PRESS-HP-SEN saddle pressing home position detection signal
PRESS-M-CCW saddle pressing motor CCW rotation drive signal
PRESS-M-CW saddle pressing motor CW rotation drive signal
PRESS-M-PWM saddle pressing motor PWM signal
PRESS-POSITION-SEN saddle pressing position detection signal
ROLLERGUIDE-HP-SEN saddle roller guide home position detection signal
ROLLERGUIDE-M-A saddle roller guide motor drive signal A
ROLLERGUIDE-M-B saddle roller guide motor drive signal B
ROLLERGUIDE-M-IHA saddle roller guide motor current switch signal
SDL-FEED-M-CLK saddle transport motor clock signal
SDL-FEED-M-CW saddle transport motor drive signal

General Circuit Diagram
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
CB1 Leakage breaker
F F
Stapler
Transport motor driver
Power supply driver PCB PCB
SW1
Main switch
Power supply fan

E FM1 E
D D
Fuse box PCB
C C
B B
Transceiver PCB
MSW1
Front door switch
Accessories switch PCB
MSW4 MSW4
A Tray safety Tray safety A
switch (rear) switch (front)
MSW7 MSW6 MSW5
Paper folding Stapler safety Stapler safety
unit safety switch (rear) switch (front)
switch (rear) F26-7101-A501 (1/7)
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
F-1-1
4

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
F F
Finisher connector PCB
E E
D D
C C
B PS3 PS6 UN14 B

PS1 PS2 UN16 Lower delivery UN24 FM2 FM3
UN13 Inlet sensor PS8 Buffer path 2
Front door Upper cover Tray A paper Lower path transport transport
Buffer path 1 sensor
open sensor open sensor surface sensor Shift roller unit sensor sensor fan 1 fan 2
sensor (light-receiving) home position SL3
SL5 SL5 SL2 sensor saddle path
Assist roller 2 Assist roller 1 Upper path PS24 PS7 switch solenoid
shift solenoid shift solenoid switch solenoid Paper surface Horizontal
SL1
Buffer path trail edge pushing registration UN15
switch solenoid home position detection home Tray A paper
sensor position sensor surface sensor
(light-emitting)
A A
F26-7101-A502 (2/7)
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
F-1-2

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Inlet transport motor Delivery motor

F M1 M5 F
E E
D D
Transport motor driver PCB
C C
B UN28 B
Shift relay
PCB
PS5 PS9
Upper Transport
M8 delivery roller home
Transport sensor position
SL6
roller shift sensor
Assist 3 shift
UN26 motor
solenoid
Horizontal sensor
PS4
A M2 Shift unit trail A
M3 M6 M4
Shift edge sensor
Pre-buffer Horizontal M7 Buffer motor
transport
transport motor registration Horizontal motor
detection unit registration
shift motor shift motor
F26-7101-A503 (3/7)
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
F-1-3
6

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
F F
E E
D D
C C
B B
PS14
PS21 PS22
PS11 PS16 PS13 Swing guide
Paper edge home position auxiliary tray
Front alignment M11 Assist home closed sensor
area detection sensor home position PS20
home position Paper edge position sensor
2 sensor sensor Paddle motor
sensor stopper
PS19 home position
shift motor
Shutter home sensor
PS17 position sensor
PS15 PS12 PS23 PS18
A
Paper edge Handling tray M10 A
Rear alignment Swing guide Swing motor
Rear alignment motor
detection 1 home position paper sensor
M9 open sensor rotation sensor
sensor sensor
Front alignment motor
F26-7101-A504 (4/7)
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
F-1-4

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
F F
To INSERTER
E E
D D
C C
PCH-PEPERCOMACK
PCH-PAPEREXITACK
PCH-PANCHENABLE
TRIM-CONNECT
PCH-PAPERENTRY
PCH-CONNECTION
PCH-PAPERLATCH
TRIM-REMOTE
PCH-MACHINEON
PCH-DOOROPEN
PCH-ABNORMAL
PCH-PAPEREXIT
TRIM-OUT2
B B
TRIM-RXD
PCH-STANBY
TRIM-TXD
TRIM-IN2
PCH-RXD
PCH-TXD
GND
GND
GND
GND
+5R
M12
M18 To TRIMMER To Professional Puncher
SL8 Assist motor
Swing guide
Handling tray M15 M19 motor
solenoid M14 M13
motor Paddle rotation Stack delivery
motor auxiliary motor motor
A A
F26-7101-A505 (5/7)
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
F-1-5

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
F F
E E
D D
PS42
Stapler waste
case full sensor
Stapler driver PCB
C C
PS30 PS28
B Stapler Stapler B
Stapler unit position position
sensor 3 sensor 1
PS31 PS29 PS27
UN17 UN18 M25 Stapler stapler
Stapler motor Stapler
Tray B paper tray B paper position position home position
M21
surface sensor surface sensor sensor 4 sensor 2 sensor
(light-emitting) (light-receiving) Stapler shift
motor
PS26
A Upper guide A
home position
sensor PS25
M16
Paper trail Transport belt M17 M20
edge retaining Transport belt Upper guide
home position
motor shift motor motor
sensor F26-7101-A506 (6/7)
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
F-1-6

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
F F
E E
D D
Tray A motor Tray B motor

driver PCB driver PCB
C C
PS33 PS35
MSW2 PS32 PS34 Tray B Tray B
Tray approach Tray A paper tray A lift lift motor lift motor SL9
switch sensor motor rotation rotation Auxiliary tray
sensor sensor solenoid
M23
M22
Tray B
Tray A
B lift motor B
lift motor Tray A area
sensor PCB Tray A area
sensor PCB
A A
F26-7101-A507 (7/7)
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
F-1-7
10

General Circuit Diagram(Saddle finisher1)
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Saddle Saddle Saddle Saddle
transport alignment Saddle guide paper folding Saddle
M110 Stitcher motor motor motor motor pushing /transport pressing
M101 M103 M104 motor motor motor
M106 M107 M109
F Fuse box PCB Finisher controller PCB F
Saddle Saddle Saddle
Stitcher unit delivery delivery delivery Saddle
tray tray sub tray delivery belt
sensor 1 sensor 2 sensor motor
PS122 PS116 PS117 M108
E E
D D
Saddle stitcher controller PCB
C C
B B
PS108 Saddle jam

Saddle
PS101 PS103 PS105 LED PCB
PS111 PS113 PS121 PS110 aligning
Saddle Saddle Saddle
Saddle Saddle Saddle Saddle plate PS119 PS118
vertical small-size vertical
pre-pressing pressing pressing pushing home Saddle folding Saddle pushing
path sensor paper sensor path
sensor home position M105 M102 SL102 home position /transport motor rotation
sensor
position sensor Saddle lead Saddle Saddle position sensor motor rotation sensor
A edge stopper pull-in flapper sensor A
sensor sensor
motor SL101 PS107 PS106
roller shift solenoid 2 PS109
PS120 Saddle PS104 Saddle lead Saddle lead
motor Saddle roller
flapper Saddle pull-in edge stopper edge path
Saddle sub guide home
solenoid roller home home position sensor
tray sensor position sensor
position sensor sensor
F26-7102-A501 (1/1)
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
F-1-8
11


Finisher Ab 1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Finisher Ab 1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Finisher-AB1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Indicates an item of a non-specific nature, possibly classified as Note, Caution, or

Indicates an item requiring care to avoid electric shocks.

Indicates an item requiring care to avoid combustion (fire).

Indicates an item prohibiting disassembly to avoid electric shocks or problems.

Indicates an item of reference assisting the understanding of the topic in question.

Provides a description of a service mode.

Provides a description of the nature of an error indication.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual:

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

3.4.1 Overview..................................................................................................................... 3-8

Chapter 4 Parts Replacement Procedure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4.4.2 Process Tray Assembly ..........................................................................................4-20

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

5.3.2.13 Bufferless mode 2 ............................................................................................................ 5-30

Chapter 6 Error Code

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1.1 Product Specifications

Item Description Remarks

Stacking tray A/B by tray lift

tray B A3,A4,A4R,B4,B5,B5R,279.4mmx432.8mm(11x in feed direction, 182 to 457.2 mm;

Mode type non-staple, staple

Stapling method stapling by rotating cam

Stapled stack if small-size, 100 sheets as converted with reference to paper

Item Description Remarks

Staple accommodation in special staple cartridge (5000 staples)

Detection of staples yes an alert condition

Stack size front 1-point

Paper detection yes

Weight 126 kg (approx.)

Power supply 100V,200-240V

Maximum power 360 W or less

1-Point Stapling (front)

1-Point Stapling (rear)

A3, B4, A4, B5, / 11"x17", LTR A4R / LGL, LTRR

A3, A4 B4, B5 11"x17", LTR

82.7 4.0 62.7 4.0 73.7 4.0

202.7 4.0 182.7 4.0 193.7 4.0

1.2 Names of Parts

[1]Tray B [5]Upper cover

[2]Tray A [6]Inlet transport unit

[3]Top delivery outlet [7]Front cover

[4]Bottom delivery outlet

1.2.2 Cross Section

[7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12]

[1]Transport belt [8]Delivery roller [14]Assist roller 2

[2]Stack delivery roller [9]Buffer roller 2 [15]Shift roller 2

[3]Swing guide [10]Assist roller 3 [16]Shift roller 1

[4]Paddle [11]Buffer roller 3 [17]Assist roller 1

[5]Tray B [12]Transport roller [18]Inlet transport roller

[6]Stack transport roller [13]Buffer roller 1 [19]Stapler

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2.1 Making Pre-Checks

[5] [6] [7] [9] [10]

[11] 2 [12] 3 [13] [14] 3 [15]